Samsung | ACCUVIX V10 | Samsung ACCUVIX V10 User Manual

WARRANTY
Samsung Medison provides the following warranty to the purchaser of this unit. This warranty is valid for
a period of one year from the date of installation and covers all problems caused by faulty workmanship
or faulty material. Samsung Medison will, as sole and exclusive remedy and at no charge, replace any such
defective unit returned to Samsung Medison within the designated warranty period.
The warranty does not cover damages and loss caused by outside factors including, but not limited to, fire,
flood, storm, tidal wave, lightning, earthquake, theft, abnormal conditions of operation, and intentional
destruction of the equipment. Damage caused by equipment relocation is not covered.
The warranty is void in cases where the equipment has been damaged as a result of an accident, misuse,
abuse, dropping, or when attempts to modify or alter any part or assembly of the equipment have taken
place.
Parts with cosmetic defects or deterioration will not be replaced. Replacement of batteries, training
materials, and supplies are not covered.
Samsung Medison will not be responsible for incidental or consequential damages of any kind arising
from or connected with the use of the equipment.
Samsung Medison will not be responsible for any loss, damage, or injury resulting from a delay in services
rendered under the warranty
This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied, including warranties of
merchant ability or fitness for any particular use. No representative or other person is authorized to
represent or assume for Samsung Medison any warranty liability beyond that set forth herein.
Defective equipment shipped from you to Samsung Medison must be packed in the replacement
cartons. Shipping and insurance costs are the responsibility of the customer. To return defective material
to Samsung Medison contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
Samsung Medison or a local distributor will make available, upon request, circuit diagrams, a component
parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions and other information which will assist your appropriately
qualified technical personnel to repair those parts of the equipment which are designed by Samsung
Medison as repairable.
CAUTION: United State federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of physicians.
MANUFACTURER : SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.
42, Teheran-ro 108-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, Korea
Customer Service Department : SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.
TEL : 82-2-2194-1234 FAX : 82-2-2194-1071
Website: www.samsungmedison.com
EC Representative : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK
Diagnostic Ultrasound System
Operation Manual
Version 1.01.00
English
M357-E10100-01
PROPRIETRAY INFORMATION AND SOFTWARE LICENSE
The Customer shall keep confidential all proprietary information furnished or disclosed to the Customer
by Samsung Medison, unless such information has become part of the public domain through no fault of
the Customer. The Customer shall not use such proprietary information, without the prior written consent
of Samsung Medison, for any purpose other than the maintenance, repair or operation of the goods.
Samsung Medison’s systems contain Samsung Medison’s proprietary software in machine-readable
form. Samsung Medison retains all its rights, title and interest in the software except that purchase of this
product includes a license to use the machine-readable software contained in it. The Customer shall not
copy, trace, disassemble or modify the software. Transfer of this product by the Customer shall constitute
a transfer of this license that shall not be otherwise transferable. Upon cancellation or termination of this
contract or return of the goods for reasons other than repair or modification, the Customer shall return to
Samsung Medison all such proprietary information.
Safety Requirements
■■Classifications:
XX
Type of protection against electrical shock: Class I
XX
Degree of protection against electrical shock (Patient connection): Type BF equipment
XX
Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment
XX
Degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable anesthetic material with air or
with oxygen or nitrous oxide: Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable
anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
XX
Mode of operation: Continuous operation
■■Electromechanical safety standards met:
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential
Performance [IEC 60601-1:2005]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1-2: General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential
Performance - Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic Compatibility – Requirements and Tests
[IEC 60601-1-2:2007]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1-6: General Requirements for Basic Safety and Essential
Performance- Collateral Standard: Usability [IEC 60601-1-6:2006]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 2-37: Particular Requirements for the Basic Safety and
Essential Performance of Ultrasonic Medical Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment [IEC606012-37:2007]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety [IEC 60601-1:1988 with
A1:1991 and A2:1995]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety – 1 Collateral Standard:
safety Requirement for Medical Electrical Systems [IEC 60601-1-1:2000]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety – 2 Collateral Standard:
Electromagnetic Compatibility – Requirements and Test [IEC 60601-1-2:2001, A1:2004]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety – 4 Collateral Standard:
Programmable Electrical Medical Systems [IEC 60601-1-4: 1996, A1:1999]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 2: Particular Requirements for Safety - 37 Ultrasonic Medical
Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment [IEC60601-2-37: 2001 with A1:2004, A2:2005]
XX
Medical Devices – Application of Risk Management to Medical Devices [ISO 14971:2007]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety [UL60601-1:2003]
XX
Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Safety [CAN/CSA 22.2
No.601.1-M90:1990, with R2003, with R2005]
XX
Biological Evaluation of Medical Devices [ISO10993 : 2009]
XX
Standard Means for the Reporting of the Acoustic Output of Medical Diagnostic Ultrasonic
Equipment [IEC61157:2007]
■■Declarations:
This is CSA symbol for Canada and United States of America
This is manufacturer’s declaration of product compliance with applicable EEC
directive(s) and the European notified body.
This is manufacturer’s declaration of product compliance with applicable EEC
directive(s).
Read This First
How to Use Your Manual
This manual addresses the reader who is familiar with ultrasound techniques. Only medical doctors
or persons supervised by medical doctors should use this system. Sonography training and clinical
procedures are not included here. This manual is not intended to be used as training material for the
principles of ultrasound, anatomy, scanning techniques, or applications. You should be familiar with all of
these areas before attempting to use this manual or your ultrasound system.
This manual does not include diagnosis results or opinions. Also, check the measurement reference for
each application’s result measurement before the final diagnosis.
It is useless to make constant or complex adjustments to the equipment controls. The system has been
preset at the factory to produce an optimum image in the majority of patients. User adjustments are not
usually required. If the user wishes to change image settings, the variables may be set as desired. Optimal
images are obtained with little difficulty.
We are not responsible for errors that occur when the system is run on a user’s PC.
Non-Samsung Medison product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Please keep this operation manual close to the product as a reference when using the system.
For safe use of this product, you should read ‘Chapter1. Safety’ and ‘Chapter8. Maintenance’ in this
manual, prior to starting to use this system.
NOTE: Some features are not available in some countries. The features with options, and
specifications that this manual present can be changed without notice. Government approval is still
pending in some nations.
Conventions Used in This Manual
DANGER: Describes precautions necessary to prevent user hazards of great urgency. Ignoring a
DANGER warning will risk life-threatening injury.
WARNING: Used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause serious personal injury, or
substantial property damage.
CAUTION: Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause equipment damage.
NOTE: A piece of information useful for installing, operating and maintaining a system. Not related
to any hazard.
If You Need Assistance
If you need any assistance with the equipment, like the service manual, please contact the Samsung
Medison Customer Service Department or one of their worldwide customer service representatives,
immediately.
Revision History
DOCUMENT
DATE
REASON FOR CHANGE
M357-E10100-01
2012-05-15
Initial Release
System Upgrades and Manual Set Updates
Samsung Medison Ultrasound is committed to innovation and continued improvement. Upgrades may be
announced that consist of hardware or software improvements. Updated manuals will accompany those
system upgrades.
Verify thatCheck if this version of the manual is correct for the system version. If not, please contact the
Customer Service Department.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter1Safety
Indication for Use...........................................................................................................................................1-3
Contraindications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Safety Sign........................................................................................................................................................1-4
Safety Symbols..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Symbols.................................................................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Labels ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Electrical Safety...............................................................................................................................................1-8
Prevention of Electric Shock........................................................................................................................................... 1-8
ECG-Related Information...............................................................................................................................................1-10
ESD..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-10
EMI .........................................................................................................................................................................................1-11
EMC .......................................................................................................................................................................................1-12
Mechanical Safety....................................................................................................................................... 1-19
Moving the Equipment...................................................................................................................................................1-19
Safety Note..........................................................................................................................................................................1-20
Biological Safety.......................................................................................................................................... 1-23
ALARA Principle.................................................................................................................................................................1-23
Training.................................................................................................................................................................................1-36
Environmental Protection........................................................................................................................ 1-37
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment ...........................................................................................................1-37
Chapter2Introduction
Specifications..................................................................................................................................................2-3
Product Configuration.................................................................................................................................2-5
Monitor .................................................................................................................................................................................. 2-8
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................................................2-10
Console.................................................................................................................................................................................2-16
Peripheral Devices............................................................................................................................................................2-18
Probe......................................................................................................................................................................................2-21
Accessories..........................................................................................................................................................................2-22
Optional Functions...........................................................................................................................................................2-23
15
Operation Manual
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
Power Supply...................................................................................................................................................3-3
Powering On......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Powering Off......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Probes & Applications..................................................................................................................................3-4
Probe Selection Screen..................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Probe Selection and Application.................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Renaming a Userset........................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Patient Information.......................................................................................................................................3-6
Patient Information for Application............................................................................................................................. 3-8
Finding Patient Information..........................................................................................................................................3-15
Managing Patient Exams...............................................................................................................................................3-18
Changing Measurements..............................................................................................................................................3-25
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Information......................................................................................................................................................4-3
Diagnosis Mode Type........................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Basic Use................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Basic Mode.......................................................................................................................................................4-7
2D Mode................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-7
M Mode.................................................................................................................................................................................4-19
Color Doppler Mode........................................................................................................................................................4-22
Power Doppler Mode......................................................................................................................................................4-27
PW Spectral Doppler Mode...........................................................................................................................................4-30
CW Spectral Doppler Mode..........................................................................................................................................4-36
TDI Mode..............................................................................................................................................................................4-38
TDW Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................4-39
ElastoScan Mode...............................................................................................................................................................4-40
Combined Mode......................................................................................................................................... 4-47
2D/C/PW Mode..................................................................................................................................................................4-47
2D/PD/PW Mode...............................................................................................................................................................4-47
2D/C/CW Mode..................................................................................................................................................................4-47
2D/PD/CW Mode...............................................................................................................................................................4-47
2D/C/M Mode.....................................................................................................................................................................4-48
2D/C Live Mode.................................................................................................................................................................4-48
2D/TDI/TDW........................................................................................................................................................................4-48
16
Table of Contents
Multi-Image Mode...................................................................................................................................... 4-50
Dual Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................4-50
Quad Mode..........................................................................................................................................................................4-51
3D/4D Mode................................................................................................................................................. 4-52
3D Stand By ........................................................................................................................................................................4-56
3D View - MPR....................................................................................................................................................................4-60
VOCAL ..................................................................................................................................................................................4-71
3D XI.......................................................................................................................................................................................4-80
XI VOCAL ..............................................................................................................................................................................4-90
4D............................................................................................................................................................................................4-97
XI STIC....................................................................................................................................................................................4-98
3D Utility Menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-102
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Accuracy...............................................................................................................................5-3
Causes of Measurement Errors...................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy................................................................................................................... 5-5
Measurement Accuracy Table........................................................................................................................................ 5-7
Basic Measurements.....................................................................................................................................5-8
Distance Measurement...................................................................................................................................................5-11
Circumference and Area Measurement...................................................................................................................5-16
Volume Measurement.....................................................................................................................................................5-18
Calculations by Application.................................................................................................................... 5-21
Things to note....................................................................................................................................................................5-21
Common Measurement Methods..............................................................................................................................5-24
OB Calculations..................................................................................................................................................................5-29
Gynecology Calculations...............................................................................................................................................5-40
Cardiac Calculations.........................................................................................................................................................5-43
Vascular Calculations.......................................................................................................................................................5-60
Fetal Heart Calculations..................................................................................................................................................5-84
Urology Calculations........................................................................................................................................................5-89
Abdomen Calculations ..................................................................................................................................................5-94
Small Parts Calculations .................................................................................................................................................5-98
TCD Calculations ........................................................................................................................................................... 5-105
Pediatric Hips Calculations......................................................................................................................................... 5-109
Musculoskeletal Calculations.................................................................................................................................... 5-111
17
Operation Manual
Report............................................................................................................................................................5-112
Viewing Report............................................................................................................................................................... 5-112
Editing Report................................................................................................................................................................. 5-114
Adding Comment.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-116
Printing Report................................................................................................................................................................ 5-118
Saving Report.................................................................................................................................................................. 5-118
Transferring Report....................................................................................................................................................... 5-119
Store SR.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-119
Edit Template .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-120
Insert Image..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-122
Graph.................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-123
History................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-125
Fetal Description............................................................................................................................................................ 5-128
Closing Report................................................................................................................................................................. 5-128
Chapter 6 Image Management
CINE / LOOP......................................................................................................................................................6-3
Annotating Images .......................................................................................................................................6-6
Annotation............................................................................................................................................................................ 6-6
Body Marker .......................................................................................................................................................................6-12
Saving, Playing and Transferring Images..........................................................................................................6-14
Saving Images....................................................................................................................................................................6-14
Playing Images...................................................................................................................................................................6-15
Transferring Images ........................................................................................................................................................6-16
Printing and Recording Images ............................................................................................................ 6-17
Printing Images..................................................................................................................................................................6-17
Recording Images ............................................................................................................................................................6-17
SONOVIEW..................................................................................................................................................... 6-18
Exam Mode..........................................................................................................................................................................6-19
Compare Mode..................................................................................................................................................................6-21
Exam Tool.............................................................................................................................................................................6-23
18
Table of Contents
Chapter 7 Utilities
System Settings..............................................................................................................................................7-3
General ................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Display .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Annotate...............................................................................................................................................................................7-12
Peripherals...........................................................................................................................................................................7-18
User Defined Key...............................................................................................................................................................7-20
Miscellaneous.....................................................................................................................................................................7-23
Option...................................................................................................................................................................................7-27
DICOM Setup (Optional).................................................................................................................................................7-29
Auto Calc..............................................................................................................................................................................7-44
About.....................................................................................................................................................................................7-45
Measurement Setup.................................................................................................................................. 7-46
Touch Menu Design ........................................................................................................................................................7-47
General .................................................................................................................................................................................7-50
Obstetrics ............................................................................................................................................................................7-59
Cardiac .................................................................................................................................................................................7-68
Vascular ................................................................................................................................................................................7-70
Urology ................................................................................................................................................................................7-71
Fetal Heart ..........................................................................................................................................................................7-73
Utility............................................................................................................................................................... 7-74
Post Curve............................................................................................................................................................................7-75
ECG.........................................................................................................................................................................................7-81
Histogram............................................................................................................................................................................7-83
Biopsy....................................................................................................................................................................................7-85
VCR.........................................................................................................................................................................................7-87
Storage Manager...............................................................................................................................................................7-89
Presets...................................................................................................................................................................................7-91
Help........................................................................................................................................................................................7-91
19
Operation Manual
Chapter 8 Maintenance
Operating Environment..............................................................................................................................8-3
System Maintenance....................................................................................................................................8-4
Cleaning and disinfections ............................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Fuse Replacement.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Cleaning Air Filters.............................................................................................................................................................. 8-7
Accuracy Check.................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7
Data Maintenance.........................................................................................................................................8-8
User Setting Back up.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Patient information Back-up........................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Software................................................................................................................................................................................. 8-8
Chapter 9 Probes
Probes.................................................................................................................................................................9-3
Ultrasound transmission Gel.......................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Sheaths.................................................................................................................................................................................9-10
Probe Precautions.............................................................................................................................................................9-11
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe........................................................................................................................9-13
Biopsy.............................................................................................................................................................. 9-22
Biopsy Kit Components..................................................................................................................................................9-22
Using the Biopsy Kit.........................................................................................................................................................9-23
Cleaning and Disinfecting Biopsy Kit........................................................................................................................9-25
Assembling the Biopsy Kit.............................................................................................................................................9-27
** Reference Manual
Samsung Medison is providing an additional ACCUVIX XG Reference Manual. GA tables and references
for each application are included in the Reference Manual.
20
1
Chapter
Safety
‹‹Indication for Use............................................ 1-3
Contraindications ....................................................................1-3
‹‹Safety Sign........................................................ 1-4
Safety Symbols..........................................................................1-4
Symbols........................................................................................1-5
Labels ...........................................................................................1-6
‹‹Electrical Safety............................................... 1-8
Prevention of Electric Shock.................................................1-8
ECG-Related Information.....................................................1-10
ESD...............................................................................................1-10
EMI ...............................................................................................1-11
EMC .............................................................................................1-12
‹‹Mechanical Safety.........................................1-19
Moving the Equipment........................................................1-19
Safety Note................................................................................1-20
‹‹Biological Safety............................................1-23
ALARA Principle......................................................................1-23
‹‹Environmental Protection...........................1-37
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment .................1-37
Chapter 1 Safety
Indication for Use
The ACCUVIX XG Diagnostic Ultrasound System and transducers are intended for diagnostic ultrasound
imaging and fluid analysis of the human body.
The clinical applications include: Fetal, Abdominal, Intra-operative, Pediatric, Small Organs, Neonatal
Cephalic, Adult Cephalic, Trans-rectal, Trans-vaginal, Muscular-Skeletal (conventional, superficial), Cardiac
Adult, Cardiac Pediatric and Peripheral-vessel.
Contraindications
The ACCUVIX XG system is not intended for ophthalmic use or any use causing the acoustic beam to pass
through the eye.
CAUTION:
Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
XX
The method of application or use of the device is described in the manual 'Chapter 3. Starting
XX
Diagnosis' and 'Chapter 4. Diagnosis Modes'.
1-3
Operation Manual
Safety Sign
Please read this chapter before using the Samsung Medison ultrasound system. It is relevant to the
ultrasound system, the probes, the recording devices, and any of the optional equipment.
ACCUVIX XG is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of, a licensed physician
who is qualified for direct use of the medical device.
Safety Symbols
The International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) has established a set of symbols for medical
electronic equipment, which classify a connection or warn of potential hazards. The classifications and
symbols are shown below.
Symbols
1-4
Description
Symbols
Description
AC (alternating current) voltage source
Left and right Audio / Video input
Indicates a caution for risk of electric
shock.
Left and right Audio / Video output
Isolated patient connection (Type BF
applied part).
Remote print output
Isolated patient connection (Type CF
applied part).
Foot switch connector
Power switch (Supplies/cuts the power
for product)
ECG connector
OFF (Cuts the power to a part of the
product)
USB connector
ON (Supplies power to a part of the
product)
Microphone connector
Indicates dangerous voltages over
1000V AC or over 1500V DC.
Identifies an equipotential ground.
Chapter 1 Safety
Symbols
Description
Symbols
Description
Identifies the point where the system
safety ground is fastened to the
chassis. Protective earth connected to
conductive parts of Class I equipment
for safety purposes.
Probe connector
Data Output port
ESD (Electrostatic discharge) caution
symbol
Data Input port
Refer to the operation manual
Data Input/Output port
Do not sit on control panel
WARNING: The accompanying
information must be followed to
prevent serious accidents and/or
damage to property.
Do not push the product
CAUTION: The accompanying
information helps to avoid accidents
and/or damage to property.
Do not lean against the product
Protection against the effects of
immersion.
Follow the operation manual
Protection against dripping water.
Symbols
Symbols
Description
Authorised Representative In The
European Community
Symbols
Description
Manufacturer
1-5
Operation Manual
Labels
To protect the system, you may see ‘Warning’ or ‘Caution’ marked on the surface of the product.
[Label 1. ID label]
1-6
Chapter 1 Safety
[Label 2. Marked below OUTLET]
ATTENTION
Do not push the product with
excessive force or lean against it.
ŝࠥ⦽ ⯹ᮝಽ ᱽ⣩ᮥ ၡÑӹ ʑ‫ݡ‬ḡ ษᝎ᜽᪅.
䇋࣓⫼࡯᥼य़ѻક⾈៪䴴೼݊ϞDŽ
275-K-A858C
Не толкайте изделие и не опирайтесь
на него.
[Label 3. Safety note for “TIP-OVER” Precaution]
[Label 4. Prohibition of seating on Control panel]
1-7
Operation Manual
Electrical Safety
This equipment has been verified as a Class I device with Type BF applied parts.
CAUTION:
As for US requirement, the LEAKAGE CURRENT might be measured from a center-tapped circuit
XX
when the equipment connects in the United States to 240V supply system.
To help assure grounding reliability, connect to a “hospital grade” or “hospital only” grounded
XX
power outlet.
Prevention of Electric Shock
In a hospital, dangerous currents are due to the potential differences between connected equipment
and touchable conducting parts found in medical rooms. The solution to the problem is consistent
equipotential bonding. Medical equipment is connected with connecting leads made up of angled
sockets to the equipotential bonding network in medical rooms.
[Figure 1.1 Equipotential bonding]
Additional equipment connected to medical electrical equipment must comply with the respective IEC
or ISO standards (e.g. IEC 60950 for data processing equipment). Furthermore all configurations shall
comply with the requirements for medical electrical systems (see IEC 60601-1-1 or clause 16 of the 3
Ed. of IEC 60601-1, respectively). Anybody connecting additional equipment to medical electrical
equipment configures a medical system and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the
requirements for medical electrical systems. Attention is drawn to the fact that local laws take priority
over the above-mentioned requirements. If in doubt, consult your local representative or the technical
service department.
1-8
Chapter 1 Safety
WARNING:
Electric shock may exist result if this system, including and all of its externally mounted recording
XX
and monitoring devices, is not properly grounded.
Do not remove the covers on the system; hazardous voltages are present inside. Cabinet panels
XX
must be in place while the system is in use. All internal adjustments and replacements must be
made by a qualified Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
Check the face, housing, and cable before use. Do not use and disconnect the power source, if
XX
the face is cracked, chipped, or torn, the housing is damaged, or if the cable is abraded.
Always disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the system.
XX
All patient contact devices, such as probes and ECG leads, must be removed from the patient
XX
prior to application of a high voltage defibrillation pulse.
The use of flammable anesthetic gas or oxidizing gases (N2O) should be avoided.
XX
Avoid places where the system is likely to be difficult to operate the disconnection device.
XX
Do not use HF surgical equipment with the system. Any malfunctions in the HF surgical
XX
equipment may result in burns to the patient.
CAUTION:
The system has been designed for 100-120VAC and 200-240VAC; you should select the input
XX
voltage of printer and VCR. Prior to connecting a peripheral power cord, verify that the voltage
indicated on the power cord matches the voltage rating of the peripheral device.
An isolation transformer protects the system from power surges. The isolation transformer
XX
continues to operate when the system is in standby.
Do not immerse the cable in liquids. Cables are not waterproof.
XX
The auxiliary socket outlets installed on this system are rated 100-120V and 200-240V with
XX
maximum total load of 200W. Use these outlets only for supplying power to equipment that is
intended to be part of the ultrasound system. Do not connect additional multiple-socket outlets
or extension cords to the system.
Do not connect any peripheral devices not listed in this manual to the auxiliary socket outlets of
XX
the system.
Do not touch SIP/SOP and the patient simultaneously. There is a risk of electric shock from
XX
leakage current.
1-9
Operation Manual
ECG-Related Information
WARNING:
This device is not intended to provide a primary ECG monitoring function, and therefore does
XX
not have means of indicating an inoperative electrocardiograph.
Do not use ECG electrodes of HF surgical equipment. Any malfunctions in the HF surgical
XX
equipment may result in burns to the patient.
Do not use ECG electrodes during cardiac pacemaker procedures or other electrical stimulators.
XX
Do not use ECG leads and electrodes in an operating room.
XX
ESD
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), commonly referred to as a static shock, is a naturally occurring
phenomenon. ESD is most prevalent during conditions of low humidity, which can be caused by heating
or air conditioning. During low humidity conditions, electrical charges naturally build up on individuals,
creating static electricity. An ESD occurs when an individual with an electrical energy build-up comes in
contact with conductive objects such as metal doorknobs, file cabinets, computer equipment, and even
other individuals. The static shock or ESD is a discharge of the electrical energy build-up from a charged
individual to a lesser or non-charged individual or object.
CAUTION:
The level of electrical energy discharged from a system user or patient to an ultrasound system
XX
can be significant enough to cause damage to the system or probes.
Always perform the pre-ESD preventive procedures before using connectors marked with the
XX
ESD warning label.
−−Apply anti-static spray on carpets or linoleum.
−−Use anti-static mats.
−−Ground the product to the patient table or bed.
It is highly recommended that the user be given training on ESD-related warning symbols and
XX
preventive procedures.
1-10
Chapter 1 Safety
EMI
Although this system has been manufactured in compliance with existing EMI (ElectroMagnetic
Interference) requirements, use of this system in the presence of an electromagnetic field can cause
momentary degradation of the ultrasound image.
If this occurs often, Samsung Medison suggests a review of the environment in which the system is being
used, to identify possible sources of radiated emissions. These emissions could be from other electrical
devices used within the same room or an adjacent room. Communication devices such as cellular phones
and pagers can cause these emissions. The existence of radios, TVs, or microwave transmission equipment
nearby can also cause interference.
CAUTION: In cases where EMI is causing disturbances, it may be necessary to relocate this system.
1-11
Operation Manual
EMC
The testing for EMC(Electromagnetic Compatibility) of this system has been performed according to the
international standard for EMC with medical devices (IEC60601-1-2). This IEC standard was adopted in
Europe as the European norm (EN60601-1-2).
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emission
This product is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or
the user of this product should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emission test
Compliance
RF Emission
CISPR 11
Group 1
RF Emission
CISPR 11
Class B
Harmonic Emission
IEC 61000-3-2
Class A
Flicker Emission
IEC 61000-3-3
Complies
Electromagnetic environment -guidance
The Ultrasound System uses RF energy only for its internal
function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not
likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
The Ultrasound System is suitable for use in all establishments,
including domestic establishments and those directly
connected to the public low-voltage power supply network
that supplies building used for domestic purpose.
Approved Cables, Transducers and Accessories for EMC
■■Approved Cable for Electromagnetic Compliance
Cables connected to this product may affect its emissions;
Use only the cable types and lengths listed below table.
1-12
Cable
Type
Length
VGA
Shielded
Normal
RS232C
Shielded
Normal
USB
Shielded
Normal
LAN(RJ45)
Twisted pair
Any
S-Video
Shielded
Normal
Chapter 1 Safety
Cable
Type
Length
Foot Switch
Shielded
2.5m
B/W Printer
Unshielded Coaxial
Normal
MIC
Unshielded
Any
Printer Remote
Unshielded
Any
Audio R.L
Shielded
Normal
VHS
Shielded
Normal
ECG AUX input
Shielded
< 3m
Parallel
Shielded
Normal
■■Approved Transducer for Electromagnetic Compliance
The probe listed in ‘Chapter 9. Probes’ when used with this product, have been tested to comply
with the group1 class B emission as required by International Standard CISPR 11.
■■Approved Accessories for Electromagnetic Compliance
Accessories used with this product may effect its emissions.
CAUTION: When connecting other customer-supplied accessories to the system, such as a remote
printer or VCR, it is the user’s responsibility to ensure the electromagnetic compatibility of the
system. Use only CISPR 11 or CISPR 22, CLASS B compliant devices.
WARNING: The use of cables, transducers, and accessories other than those specified may result in
increased emission or decreased Immunity of the Ultrasound System.
1-13
Operation Manual
Immunity test
Electrotatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 60601 Test level
Compliance level
±6KV Contact
±6KV Contact
±8KV air
±8KV air
IEC 61000-4-4
±2KV
for power supply lines
±1KV
for input/output lines
±2KV
for power supply lines
±1KV
for input/output lines
Surge
±1KV differential mode
±1KV differential mode
IEC 61000-4-5
±2KV common mode
±2KV common mode
<5% Uт for 0.5cycle
(>95% dip in Uт)
<5% Uт for 0.5cycle
(>95% dip in Uт)
40% Uт for 5 cycle
(60% dip in Uт )
40% Uт for 5 cycle
(60% dip in Uт )
70% Uт for 25 cycle
(30% dip in Uт)
70% Uт for 25 cycle
(30% dip in Uт)
<5% Uт for 5 s
(<95% dip in Uт )
<5% Uт for 5 s
(<95% dip in Uт )
IEC 61000-4-2
Electrical fast
transient/burst
Voltage dips, short
interruptions and
voltage variations
on power supply
input lines
IEC 61000-4-11
Power frequency
(50/60Hz)
magnetic field
3 A/m
3 A/m
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE: Uт is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
1-14
Electromagnetic
environment -guidance
Floors should be wood, concrete
or ceramic tile.
If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relat-ive
humidity should be at least 30%.
Mains power quality should be
that of a typical commer-cial or
hospital environment.
Mains power quality should be
that of a typical commer-cial or
hospital environment.
Mains power quality should be
that of a typical commer-cial
or hospital environment. If the
user of this product requires
continued operation during
power mains interrup-tions,
it is recommended that this
product be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply or
a battery.
Power frequency magnetic fields
should be at levels characteristic
of a typical location in a typical
commer-cial or hospital
environment.
Chapter 1 Safety
Immunity test
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
IEC 60601
Test level
3 Vrms
150 kHz
to 80MHz
Compliance
level
0.01V
Electromagnetic
environment - guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of the
Ultrasound System, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated from
the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
80MHz to 800MHZ
800MHz to 2.5GHz
Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3
3 V/m
80 MHz
to 2.5GHz
3V/m
where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recomm-ended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey, a
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range. b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment
marked with the following symbol :
NOTE 1: At 80MHz and 800MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: T hese guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey
should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the Ultrasound System is used exceeds
the applicable RF compliance level above, the Ultrasound System should be observed to verify normal operation. If
abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the
Ultrasound System or using a shielded location with a higher RF shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation.
b
Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80MHz, field strengths should be less than [V1] V/m.
a
1-15
Operation Manual
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the ACCUVIX XG
This product is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or the user of this product can help Prevent electromagnetic interference
by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and this product as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of
the communications equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter [m]
Rated maximum
output power of
transmitter
[W]
150kHz to 80MHz
80MHz to 800MHz
800MHz to 2.5GHz
V1=0.01Vrms
E1=3 V/m
E1=3V/m
0.01
35.00
0.11
0.23
0.1
110.68
0.36
0.73
1
350.00
1.16
2.33
10
1106.80
3.68
7.37
100
3500.00
11.66
23.33
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d
in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where p is the
maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80MHz and 800MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
1-16
Chapter 1 Safety
Electromagnetic environment – guidance
The Ultrasound System must be used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF shielding
effectiveness and, for each cable that enters the shielded location. Field strengths outside the shielded
location from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be less
than 3V/m.
It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.
CAUTION: If the system is connected to other customer-supplied equipment, such as a local area
network (LAN) or a remote printer, Samsung Medison cannot guarantee that the remote equipment
will work correctly in the presence of electromagnetic phenomena.
Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference
Typical interference on Ultrasound Imaging Systems varies depending on Electromagnetic
phenomena. Please refer to following table:
Imaging Mode
2D
ESD(1)
Power Line(3)
For sector imaging probes,
white radial bands or flashes in
the centerlines of the image.
For linear imaging probes, white
vertical bands, sometimes more
pronounced on the sides of the
image.
White dots, dashes, diagonal
lines, or diagonal lines near the
center of the image.
M
Increase in the image
background noise or white M
mode lines.
White dots, dashes, diagonal
lines, or increase in image
background noise
Color
Color flashes, radial or vertical
bands, increase in background
noise, or changes in color
image.
Color flashes, dots, dashes, or
changes in the color noise level.
Doppler
Change of operating
mode, system settings,
or system reset.
Brief flashes in the
displayed or recorded
image.
RF(2)
Horizontal lines in the spectral
Vertical lines in the spectral
display or tones, abnormal noise display, popping type noise in
in the audio, or both.
the audio, or both.
(1)
ESD caused by discharging of electric charge build-up on insulated surfaces or persons.
(2)
RF energy from RF transmitting equipment such as portable phones, hand-held radios, wireless devices,
commercial radio and TV, and so on.
(3)
Conducted interference on powerlines or connected cables caused by other equipment, such as switching
power supplies, electrical controls, and natural phenomena such as lightning.
1-17
Operation Manual
A medical device can either generate or receive electromagnetic interference. The EMC standards
describe tests for both emitted and received interference.
Samsung Medison Ultrasound System do not generate interference in excess of the referenced standards.
An Ultrasound System is designed to receive signals at radio frequency and is therefore susceptible
to interference generated by RF energy sources. Examples of other source of interference are medical
device, information technology products, and radio and television transmission towers. Tracing the
source of radiated interference can be a difficult task. Customers should consider the following in an
attempt to locate the source:
XX
Is the interference intermittent or constant?
XX
Does the interference show up only with one transducers operating at the same frequency or
with several transducer?
XX
Do two different transducer operating at the same frequency have the same problem?
XX
Is the interference present if the system is moved to a different location in the facility?
The answers to these questions will help determine if the problem reside with the system or the scanning
environment. After you answer the question, contact your local Samsung Medison customer service
department.
1-18
Chapter 1 Safety
Mechanical Safety
Moving the Equipment
WARNING: The product weighs more than 100kg. Be extra careful when transporting it. Careless
transportation of the product may result in product damage or personal injury.
XX
Before transporting the product, check that the brakes on wheels are unlocked. Also, make sure
to retract the monitor arm completely so that it is secured in a stationary position.
XX
Always use the handles at the back of the console and move the product slowly.
This product is designed to resist shocks. However, excessive shock, for example if the product falls over,
may cause serious damage.
If the system operates abnormally after repositioning, please contact the Samsung Medison Customer
Service Department.
T
he Brakes
Brakes are mounted to wheels of the console. To lock the brakes, press the bottom part of the brake
with your foot. To unlock them, press the part labelled OFF at the top of the brake with your foot.
You can use the brakes to control the movement of the product. We recommend that you lock the
brakes when using the product.
1-19
Operation Manual
Precautions on Ramps
Always make sure that the control panel is facing the direction of movement.
WARNING: Be aware of the castors, especially when moving the system. Samsung Medison
recommends that you exercise caution when moving the product up or down ramps.
When moving the product down a ramp or resting it temporarily on a ramp, the product may tilt over
even with the brakes on depending on the direction of the product. Do not rest the product on ramps.
Safety Note
CAUTION:
Do not press the control panel excessively.
XX
Never attempt to modify the product in any way.
XX
Check the operational safety when using the product after a prolonged break in service.
XX
Make sure that other objects, such as metal pieces, do not enter the system.
XX
Do not block the ventilation slots.
XX
To prevent damage to the power cord, be sure to grip the plug head – not the cord – when
XX
unplugging.
Excessive bending or twisting of cables on patient-applied parts may cause failure or intermittent
XX
operation of the system.
Improper cleaning or sterilization of a patient-applied part may cause permanent damage.
XX
Please refer to “Chapter 8. Maintenance” for detailed information on protecting, cleaning and disinfecting
the equipment.
1-20
Chapter 1 Safety
Safety Note for Monitor
When adjusting the height or position of the monitor, be careful of the space in the middle of the
monitor arm. Having your fingers or other body parts caught in it may result in injury.
275-K-A730B
[Figure 1.2 Safety note for monitor]
1-21
Operation Manual
Caution for Using Control Panel
CAUTION:
Do not press on the control panel with excessive force or lean against it.
XX
Do not sit on the control panel or apply too much force to it.
XX
When adjusting the height or position of the control panel, be careful not to leave your fingers or hand
in area between the control panel and the lift - they may get trapped and hurt.
275-K-B003A
[Figure 1.3 Safety note for Control Panel]
1-22
Chapter 1 Safety
Biological Safety
For more safety information on probes and biopsy, please refer to Chapter 9 ‘Probes.’
WARNING:
Ultrasound waves may have damaging effects on cells and, therefore, may be harmful to the
XX
patient. If there is no medical benefit, minimize the exposure time and maintain the ultrasound
wave output level at low. Please refer to the ALARA principle.
Do not use the system if an error message appears on the video display indicating that a
XX
hazardous condition exists. Note the error code, turn off the power to the system, and call your
local Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
Do not use a system that exhibits erratic or inconsistent updating. Discontinuities in the
XX
scanning sequence are indicative of a hardware failure that should be corrected before use.
The system limits the maximum contact temperature to 43 degree Celsius, and the ultrasonic
XX
waves output observes American FDA regulations.
ALARA Principle
Guidance for the use of diagnostic ultrasound is defined by the “as low as reasonably achievable” (ALARA)
principle. The decision as to what is reasonable has been left to the judgment and insight of qualified
personnel. No set of rules can be formulated that would be sufficiently complete to dictate the correct
response for every circumstance. By keeping ultrasound exposure as low as possible, while obtaining
diagnostic images, users can minimize ultrasonic bioeffects.
Since the threshold for diagnostic ultrasound bioeffects is undetermined, it is the sonographer’s
responsibility to control the total energy transmitted into the patient. The sonographer must reconcile
exposure time with diagnostic image quality. To ensure diagnostic image quality and limit exposure
time, the ultrasound system provides controls that can be manipulated during the exam to optimize the
results of the exam.
The ability of the user to abide by the ALARA principle is important. Advances in diagnostic ultrasound
not only in the technology but also in the applications of the technology, have resulted in the need for
more and better information to guide the user. The output indices are designed to provide that important
information
There are a number of variables, which affect the way in which the output display indices can be used
to implement the ALARA principle. These variables include mass, body size, location of the bone relative
1-23
Operation Manual
to the focal point, attenuation in the body, and ultrasound exposure time. Exposure time is an especially
useful variable, because the user controls it. The ability to limit the index values over time support the
ALARA principle.
A
pplying ALARA
The system-imaging mode used depends upon the information needed. 2D-mode and M-mode
imaging provide anatomical information, while Doppler, Power, and Color imaging provide information
about blood flow. Scanned modes, like 2D-mode, Power, or Color, disperse or scatter the ultrasonic
energy over an area, while an unscanned mode, like M-mode or Doppler, concentrates ultrasonic
energy. Understanding the nature of the imaging mode being used allows the sonographer to apply
the ALARA principle with informed judgment. The probe frequency, system set-up values, scanning
techniques, and operator experience aid the sonographer in meeting the definition of the ALARA
principle.
The decision as to the amount of acoustic output is, in the final analysis, up to the system operator. This
decision must be based on the following factors: type of patient, type of exam, patient history, ease
or difficulty of obtaining diagnostically useful information, and the potential localized heating of the
patient due to probe surface temperatures. Prudent use of the system occurs when patient exposure
is limited to the lowest index reading for the shortest amount of time necessary to achieve acceptable
diagnostic results.
Although a high index reading does not mean that a bioeffect is actually occurring, a high index
reading should be taken seriously. Every effort should be made to reduce the possible effects of a high
index reading. Limiting exposure time is an effective way to accomplish this goal.
There are several system controls that the operator can use to adjust the image quality and limit
the acoustic intensity. These controls are related to the techniques that an operator might use to
implement ALARA. These controls can be divided into three categories: direct, indirect, and receiver
control.
D
irect Controls
Application selection and the output intensity control directly affect acoustic intensity. There are
different ranges of allowable intensity or output based on your selection. Selecting the correct range
of acoustic intensity for the application is one of the first things required during any exam. For example,
peripheral vascular intensity levels are not recommended for fetal exams. Some systems automatically
select the proper range for a particular procedure, while others require manual selection. Ultimately,
the user bears the responsibility for proper clinical use. The Samsung Medison system provides both
automatic and user-definable settings.
1-24
Chapter 1 Safety
Output has direct impact on acoustic intensity. Once the application has been established, the output
control can be used to increase or decrease the intensity output. The output control allows you to
select intensity levels less than the defined maximum. Prudent use dictates that you select the lowest
output intensity consistent with good image quality.
Indirect Controls
The indirect controls are those that have an indirect effect on acoustic intensity. These controls affect
imaging mode, pulse repetition frequency, focus depth, pulse length, and probe selection.
The choice of imaging mode determines the nature of the ultrasound beam. 2D-mode is a scanning
mode, Doppler is a stationary or unscanned mode. A stationary ultrasound beam concentrates energy
on a single location. A moving or scanned ultrasound beam disperses the energy over a wide area and
the beam is only concentrated on a given area for a fraction of the time necessary in unscanned mode.
Pulse repetition frequency or rate refers to the number of ultrasound bursts of energy over a specific
period of time. The higher the pulse repetition frequency, the more pulses of energy in a given period
of time. Several controls affect pulse repetition frequency: focal depth, display depth, sample volume
depth, color sensitivity, number of focal zones, and sector width controls.
Focus of the ultrasound beam affects the image resolution. To maintain or increase resolution at a
different focus requires a variation in output over the focal zone. This variation of output is a function
of system optimization. Different exams require different focal depths. Setting the focus to the proper
depth improves the resolution of the structure of interest.
Pulse length is the time during which the ultrasonic burst is turned on. The longer the pulse, the greater
the time-average intensity value. The greater the time-average intensity, the greater the likelihood of
temperature increase and cavitations. Pulse length or burst length or pulse duration is the output
pulse duration in pulsed Doppler. Increasing the Doppler sample volume increases the pulse length.
Probe selection affects intensity indirectly. Tissue attenuation changes with frequency. The higher
the probe operating frequency, the greater the attenuation of the ultrasonic energy. Higher probe
operating frequencies require higher output intensity to scan at a deeper depth. To scan deeper at
the same output intensity, a lower probe frequency is required. Using more gain and output beyond
a point, without corresponding increases in image quality, can mean that a lower frequency probe is
needed.
■■Receiver Controls
Receiver controls are used by the operator to improve image quality. These controls have no effect
on output. Receiver controls only affect how the ultrasound echo is received. These controls include
gain, TGC, dynamic range, and image processing. The important thing to remember, relative to
1-25
Operation Manual
output, is that receiver controls should be optimized before increasing output. For example; before
increasing output, optimize gain to improve image quality.
Additional Considerations
Ensure that scanning time is kept to a minimum, and ensure that only medically required scanning is
performed. Never compromise quality by rushing through an exam. A poor exam will require a followup, which ultimately increases the time. Diagnostic ultrasound is an important tool in medicine, and,
like any tool, should be used efficiently and effectively.
Output Display Features
The system output display comprises two basic indices: a mechanical index and a thermal index. The
thermal index consists of the following indices: soft tissue (TIs), bone (TIb) and cranial bone (TIc). One
of these three thermal indices will be displayed at all times. Which one depends upon the system
preset or user choice, depending upon the application at hand.
The mechanical index is continuously displayed over the range of 0.0 to 1.9, in increments of 0.1.
The thermal index consists of the three indices, and only one of these is displayed at any one time.
Each probe application has a default selection that is appropriate for that combination. The TIb or TIs is
continuously displayed over the range of 0.0 to maximum output, based on the probe and application,
in increments of 0.1.
The application-specific nature of the default setting is also an important factor of index behavior. A
default setting is a system control state which is preset by the manufacturer or the operator. The system
has default index settings for the probe application. The default settings are invoked automatically by
the ultrasound system when power is turned on, new patient data is entered into the system database,
or a change in application takes place.
The decision as to which of the three thermal indices to display should be based on the following
criteria:
Appropriate index for the application: TIs is used for imaging soft tissue; and TIb for a focus at or near
bone. Some factors might create artificially high or low thermal index readings e.g. presence of fluid
or bone, or the flow of blood. A highly attenuating tissue path, for example, will cause the potential for
local zone heating to be less than the thermal index displays.
Scanned modes versus unscanned modes of operation affect the thermal index. For scanned modes,
heating tends to be near the surface; for unscanned modes, the potential for heating tends to be
deeper in the focal zone.
1-26
Chapter 1 Safety
Always limit ultrasound exposure time. Do not rush the exam. Ensure that the indices are kept to a
minimum and that exposure time is limited without compromising diagnostic sensitivity.
■■Mechanical Index (MI) Display
Mechanical bioeffects are threshold phenomena that occur when a certain level of output is
exceeded. The threshold level varies, however, with the type of tissue. The potential for mechanical
bioeffects varies with peak pressure and ultrasound frequency. The MI accounts for these two
factors. The higher the MI value, the greater the likelihood of mechanical bioeffects occurring but
there is no specific MI value that means that a mechanical effect will actually occur. The MI should
be used as a guide for implementing the ALARA principle.
■■Thermal Index (TI) Display
The TI informs the user about the potential for temperature increase occuring at the body surface,
within body tissue, or at the point of focus of the ultrasound beam on bone. The TI is an estimate
of the temperature increase in specific body tissues. The actual amount of any temperature rise is
influenced by factors such as tissue type, vascularity, and mode of operation etc. The TI should be
used as a guide for implementing the ALARA principle.
The bone thermal index (TIb) informs the user about potential heating at or near the focus after
the ultrasound beam has passed through soft tissue or fluid, for example, at or near second or third
trimester fetal bone.
The cranial bone thermal index (TIc) informs the user about the potential heating of bone at or near
the surface, for example, cranial bone.
The soft tissue thermal index (TIs) informs the user about the potential for heating within soft
homogeneous tissue.
TIc is displayed when you select a trans-cranial application.
You can select TI Display in Utility > Setup > Display > Display.
■■Mechanical and Thermal indices Display Precision and Accuracy
The Mechanical and Thermal Indices on the system are precise to 0.1 units.
The MI and TI display accuracy estimates for the system are given in the Acoustic Output Tables
manual. These accuracy estimates are based on the variability range of probes and systems, inherent
acoustic output modeling errors and measurement variability, as described below.
The displayed values should be interpreted as relative information to help the system operator
achieve the ALARA principle through prudent use of the system. The values should not be interpreted
1-27
Operation Manual
as actual physical values investigated tissue or organs. The initial data that is used to support the
output display is derived from laboratory measurements based on the AIUM measurement standard.
The measurements are then put into algorithms for calculating the displayed output values.
Many of the assumptions used in the process of measurement and calculation are conservative in
nature. Over-estimation of actual in situ exposure, for the vast majority of tissue paths, is built into
the measurement and calculation process. For example:
The measured water tank values are de-rated using a conservative, industry standard, attenuation
coefficient of 0.3dB/cm-MHz.
Conservative values for tissue characteristics were selected for use in the TI models. Conservative
values for tissue or bone absorption rates, blood perfusion rates, blood heat capacity, and tissue
thermal conductivity were selected.
Steady state temperature rise is assumed in the industry standard TI models, and the assumption is
made that the ultrasound probe is held steady in one position long enough for steady state to be
reached.
A number of factors are considered when estimating the accuracy of display values: hardware
variations, algorithm accuracy estimation and measurement variability. Variability among probes
and systems is a significant factor. Probe variability results from piezoelectric crystal efficiencies,
process-related impedance differences, and sensitive lens focusing parameter variations.
Differences in the system pulse voltage control and efficiencies are also a contributor to variability.
There are inherent uncertainties in the algorithms used for estimating acoustic output values over
the range of possible system operating conditions and pulse voltages. Inaccuracies in laboratory
measurements are related to differences in hydrophone calibration and performance, positioning,
alignment and digitization tolerances, and variability among test operators.
The conservative assumptions of the output estimation algorithms of linear propagation, at all
depths, through a 0.3dB/cm-MHz attenuated medium are not taken into account in calculation of
the accuracy estimate displayed. Neither linear propagation, nor uniform attenuation at the 0.3dB/
cm-MHz rate, occur in water tank measurements or in most tissue paths in the body. In the body,
different tissues and organs have dissimilar attenuation characteristics. In water, there is almost no
attenuation. In the body, and particularly in water tank measurements, non-linear propagation and
saturation losses occur as pulse voltages increase.
The display accuracy estimates take into account the variability ranges of probes and systems,
inherent acoustic output modeling errors, and measurement variability. Display accuracy estimates
are not based on errors in, or caused by measuring according to, the AIUM measurement standards.
They are also independent of the effects of non-linear loss on the measured values.
1-28
Chapter 1 Safety
Control Effects - Control affecting the indices
As various system controls are adjusted, the TI and MI values may change. This will be most apparent as
the POWER control is adjusted; however, other system controls will affect the on-screen output values.
■■Power
Power controls the system acoustic output. Two real-time output values are on the screen: a TI and
a MI. They change as the system responds to POWER adjustments.
In combined modes, such as simultaneous Color, 2D-mode and pulsed Doppler, the individual
modes each add to the total TI. One mode will be the dominant contributor to this total. The
displayed MI will be from the mode with the largest peak pressure.
2
D-mode Controls
■■2D-mode size
Narrowing the sector angle may increase the frame rate. This action will increase the TI. Pulse
voltage may be automatically adjusted down with software controls to keep the TI below the
system maximums. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI.
■■Zoom
Increasing the zoom magnification may increase frame rate. This action will increase the TI. The
number of focal zones may also increase automatically to improve resolution. This action may
change MI since the peak intensity can occur at a different depth.
■■Persistence
A lower persistence will decrease the TI. Pulse voltage may be automatically increased. An increase
in pulse voltage will increase MI.
■■Focal no.
More focal zones may change both the TI and MI by changing frame rate or focal depth automatically.
Lower frame rates decrease the TI. MI displayed will correspond to the zone with the largest peak
intensity.
■■Focus
Changing the focal depth will change the MI. Generally, higher MI values will occur when the focal
depth is near the natural focus of the transducer.
1-29
Operation Manual
Color and Power Controls
■■Color Sensitivity
Increasing the color sensitivity may increase the TI. More time is spent scanning for color images.
Color pulses are the dominant pulse type in this mode.
■■Color Sector Width
Narrower color sector width will increase color frame rate and the TI will increase. The system may
automatically decrease pulse voltage to stay below the system maximum. A decrease in pulse
voltage will decrease the MI. If pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed Doppler will remain the
dominant mode and the TI change will be small.
■■Color Sector Depth
Deeper color sector depth may automatically decrease color frame rate or select a new color focal
zone or color pulse length. The TI will change due to the combination of these effects. Generally, the
TI will decrease with increased color sector depth. MI will correspond to the peak intensity of the
dominant pulse type, which is a color pulse. However, if pulsed Doppler is also enabled then pulsed
Doppler will remain the dominant mode and the TI change will be small.
■■Scale
Using the SCALE control to increase the color velocity range may increase the TI. The system will
automatically adjust pulse voltage to stay below the system maximums. A decrease in pulse voltage
will also decrease MI.
■■Sec Width
A narrower 2D-mode sector width in Color imaging will increase color frame rate. The TI will
increase. MI will not change. If pulsed Doppler is also enabled, then pulsed Doppler will remain as
the primary mode and the TI change will be small.
M-mode and Doppler Controls
■■Speed
M-mode and Doppler sweep speed adjustments will not affect the MI. When M-mode sweep speed
changes, TI changes.
1-30
Chapter 1 Safety
■■Simultaneous and Update Methods
Use of combination modes affects both the TI and MI through the combination of pulse types.
During simultaneous mode, the TI is additive. During auto-update and duplex, the TI will display
the dominant pulse type. The displayed MI will be from the mode with the largest peak pressure.
■■Sample Volume Depth
When Doppler sample volume depth is increased the Doppler PRF may automatically decrease. A
decrease in PRF will decrease the TI. The system may also automatically decrease the pulse voltage
to remain below the system maximum. A decrease in pulse voltage will decrease MI.
Doppler, CW, M-mode, and Color Imaging Controls
When a new imaging mode is selected, both the TI and the MI will change to default settings. Each
mode has a corresponding pulse repetition frequency and maximum intensity point. In combined or
simultaneous modes, the TI is the sum of the contribution from the modes enabled and MI is the MI for
the focal zone and mode with the largest derated intensity. If a mode is turned off and then reselected,
the system will return to the previously selected settings.
■■Probe
Each probe model available has unique specifications for contact area, beam shape, and center
frequency. Defaults are initialized when you select a probe. Samsung Medison factory defaults vary
with probe, application, and selected mode. Defaults have been chosen below the FDA limits for
intended use.
■■Depth
An increase in 2D-mode depth will automatically decrease the 2D-mode frame rate. This would
decrease the TI. The system may also automatically choose a deeper 2D-mode focal depth. A
change of focal depth may change the MI. The MI displayed is that of the zone with the largest peak
intensity.
■■Application
Acoustic output defaults are set when you select an application. Samsung Medison factory defaults
vary with probe, application, and mode. Defaults have been chosen below the FDA limits for
intended use.
1-31
Operation Manual
Related Guidance Documents
For more information about ultrasonic bioeffects and related topics refer to the following;
XX
AIUM Report, January 28, 1993, “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound”
XX
Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound, J Ultrasound Med., Sept. 1998:
Vol. 7, No. 9 Supplement
XX
Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment. (AIUM, NEMA.
1998)
XX
Acoustic Output Labeling Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM, 1998)
XX
Second Edition of the AIUM Output Display Standard Brochure, Dated March 10, 1994. (A copy
of this document is shipped with each system.)
XX
Information for Manufacturer Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound Systems
and Transducers. FDA. September 1997. FDA.
XX
Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic
Ultrasound Equipment. (Revision 1, AIUM, NEMA. 1998)
XX
WFUMB. Symposium on Safety of Ultrasound in Medicine: Conclusions and Recommendations
on Thermal and Non-Thermal Mechanisms for Biological Effects of Ultrasound, Ultrasound in
Medicine and Biology, 1998: Vol. 24, Supplement1.
Acoustic Output and Measurement
Since the first usage of diagnostic ultrasound, the possible human biological effects (bioeffects) of
ultrasound exposure have been studied by various scientific and medical institutions. In October 1987,
the American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine(AIUM) ratified a report prepared by its Bioeffects
Committee (Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound, J Ultrasound Med., Sept.
1988: Vol.7, No.9 Supplement), sometimes referred to as the Stowe Report, which reviewed available
data on possible effects of ultrasound exposure. Another report “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic
Ultrasound,” dated January 28, 1993 provides more up to date information.
The acoustic output for this system has been measured and calculated in accordance with the December
1985 “510(K) Guide for Measuring and Reporting Acoustic Output of Diagnostic Ultrasound Medical
Devices,” except that the hydrophone meets the requirements of “Acoustic Output Measurement
Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment” (NEMA UD 2-1992)
1-32
Chapter 1 Safety
In Situ, Derated, and Water Value Intensities
All intensity parameters are measured in water. Since water does not absorb acoustic energy, these
water measurements represent a worst case value. Biological tissue does absorb acoustic energy. The
true value of the intensity at any point depends on the amount and type of tissue and the frequency
of the ultrasound that passes through the tissue. The intensity value in the tissue, In Situ, has been
estimated using the following formula:
In Situ = Water [e - (0.23 alf)]
where: In Situ = In Situ Intensity Value
Water = Water Value Intensity
e = 2.7183
a = Attenuation Factor
Tissuea(dB/cm-MHz)
Brain.53
Heart.66
Kidney.79
Liver.43
Muscle.55
l = skin line to measurement depth (cm)
f = Center frequency of the transducer/system/mode combination(MHz)
Since the ultrasonic path during an examination is likely to pass through varying lengths and types of
tissue, it is difficult to estimate the true In Situ intensity. An attenuation factor of 0.3 is used for general
reporting purpose; therefore, the In Situ value which is commonly reported uses the formula:
In Situ (derated) = Water [e -(0.069 lf)]
Since this value is not the true In Situ intensity, the term “derated” is used.
The maximum derated and the maximum water values do not always occur at the same operating
condition; therefore, the reported maximum water and derated values may not be related to the In
Situ (derated) formula. Take for example a multi-zone array transducer that has maximum water value
intensities in its deepest zone: the same transducer may have its largest derated intensity in one if its
shallowest focal zones.
1-33
Operation Manual
Acoustic Output and Measurement
The terms and symbols used in the acoustic output tables are defined in the following paragraphs.
ISPTA.3The derated spatial-peak temporal-average intensity (milliwatts per square
centimeter).
ISPPA.3The derated spatial-peak pulse-average intensity (watts per square centimeter).
The value of IPA.3 at the position of global maximum MI (IPA.3@MI) may be reported
instead of ISPPA.3 if the global maximum MI is reported.
MIThe Mechanical Index. The value of MI at the position of ISPPA.3, (MI@ISPPA.3) may be
reported instead of MI (global maximum value) if ISPPA.3 is ?190W/cm2
Pr.3The derated peak rarefactional pressure (megapascals) associated with the transmit
pattern giving rise to the reported MI value.
WOThe ultrasonic power (milliwatts). For the operating condition giving rise to ISPTA.3,
WO is the total time-average power;. For operating conditions subject to reporting
under ISPPA.3, WO is the ultrasonic power associated with the transmit pattern giving
rise to the value reported under ISPPA.3
FcThe center frequency (MHz). For MI and ISPPA.3, Fc is the center frequency associated
with the transmit pattern giving rise to the global maximum value of the respective
parameter. For ISPTA.3, for combined modes involving beam types of unequal center
frequency, Fc is defined as the overall ranges of center frequencies of the respective
transmit patterns.
ZSP
The axial distance at which the reported parameter is measured (centimeters).
x-6,y-6are respectively the in-plane (azimuth) and out-of-plane (elevation) -6 dimensions in
the x-y plane where ZSP is found (centimeters).
PDThe pulse duration (microseconds) associated with the transmit pattern giving rise to
the reported value of the respective parameter.
PRFThe pulse repetition frequency (Hz) associated with the transmit pattern giving rise
to the reported value of the respective parameter.
EBD
The entrance beam dimensions for the azimuth and elevation planes (centimeters).
EDSThe entrance dimensions of the scan for the azimuth and elevation planes
(centimeters).
1-34
Chapter 1 Safety
Acoustic Measurement Precision and Uncertainty
The Acoustic Measurement Precision and Acoustic Measurement Uncertainty are described below.
Quantity
Precision
Total Uncertainty
PII.3 (derated pulse intensity integral)
3.2 %
+21 % to - 24 %
Wo (acoustic power)
6.2 %
+/- 19 %
Pr.3 (derated rarefaction pressure)
5.4 %
+/- 15 %
Fc (center frequency)
<1%
+/- 4.5 %
■■Systematic Uncertainties.
For the pulse intensity integral, derated rarefaction pressure Pr.3, center frequency and pulse
duration, the analysis includes considerations of the effects on accuracy of:
Hydrophone calibration drift or errors.
Hydrophone / Amp frequency response.
Spatial averaging.
Alignment errors.
Voltage measurement accuracy, including.
XX
Oscilloscope vertical accuracy.
XX
Oscilloscope offset accuracy.
XX
Oscilloscope clock accuracy.
XX
Oscilloscope Digitization rates.
XX
Noise.
The systematic uncertainties Acoustic power measurements using a Radiation Force are measured
through the use of calibrated NIST acoustic power sources.
We also refer to a September 1993 analysis done by a working group of the IEC technical committee
87 and prepared by K. Beissner, as a first supplement to IEC publication 1161.
1-35
Operation Manual
The document includes analysis and discussion of the sources of error/measurement effects due to:
Balance system calibration.
Absorbing (or reflecting) target suspension mechanisms.
Linearity of the balance system.
Extrapolation to the moment of switching the ultrasonic transducer (compensation for ringing
and thermal drift).
Target imperfections.
Absorbing (reflecting) target geometry and finite target size.
Target misalignment.
Ultrasonic transducer misalignment.
Water temperature.
Ultrasonic attenuation and acoustic streaming.
Coupling or shielding foil properties.
Plane-wave assumption.
Environmental influences.
Excitation voltage measurement.
Ultrasonic transducer temperature.
Effects due to nonlinear propagation and saturation loss.
The overall findings of the analysis give a rough Acoustic Power accuracy figure of +/- 10% for the
frequency range of 1 - 10 MHz.
Training
The operator of this equipment must become thoroughly familiar with the correct use of the equipment
in order to optimize its performance and recognize possible malfunctions. It is recommended that all
users receive proper training before operation. Applications training is available through the Samsung
Medison Customer Service Department, or from one of their worldwide customer service representatives.
1-36
Chapter 1 Safety
Environmental Protection
CAUTION:
For disposing of the system or accessories that have come to the end of their lifespan, contact
XX
the vendor or follow appropriate disposal procedures. You are responsible for complying with the relevant regulations for disposing of wastes.
XX
The lithium ion battery used in the product must be replaced by a Samsung Medison service
XX
engineer or an authorized dealer.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
This symbol is applied in the European Union and other European countries.
This symbol on the product indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste. Instead
it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic
equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate
waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For
more detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your
electrical and electronic waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.
1-37
2
Chapter
Introduction
‹‹Specifications................................................... 2-3
‹‹Product Configuration................................... 2-6
Monitor ........................................................................................2-9
Control Panel............................................................................2-11
Console.......................................................................................2-17
Peripheral Devices..................................................................2-19
Probe...........................................................................................2-22
Accessories................................................................................2-23
Optional Functions................................................................2-24
Chapter 2 Introduction
Specifications
Physical Dimensions
Imaging modes
Gray Scale
Focusing
Probes
(Type BF / IPX7)
Probe connections
Monitor
ECG
Rear Panel
Input / Output
Connections
Height: 1340 ~ 1600 mm (Monitor) / 808 ~ 988 mm (CP Trackball)
Width: 540 mm
Depth: 885 ~ 975 mm
Weight: 106.6 kg, 235.3 lb (with monitor)
2D-Mode
M-Mode
Color Doppler
Pulsed Wave (PW) Spectral Doppler
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler
Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI)
Power Doppler (PD)
Directional Power Doppler (DPD)
Color M-Mode
Anatomical M mode
256 (8 bits)
Transmit focusing, maximum of eight points (four points simultaneously selectable)
Digital dynamic receive focusing (continuous)
Phased Array P2-4BA, P3-8CA, P4-12
Linear Array
L3-8, L5-13IS, L7-16IS, LF5-12, LS5-13
Curved Array
C1-4EC, C2-6IC, C4-9/10ED, VR5-9, EV4-9/10ED, ER4-9/10ED
3D
V4-8, 3DC2-6, V5-9, V6-12
CW
CW 2.0, CW 4.0
4 probe connectors (including one CW probe connector)
19 inch LCD monitor
Type BF
VHS and SVHS VCR left and right audio
B/W printer video and remote control
VGA monitor
Serial Communication
Parallel Communication
Microphone
LAN
USB
2-3
Operation Manual
Image Storage
Application
Electrical Parameters
Measurement Packages
Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology, Abdomen, Cardiac, Vascular, Small Part,
Muskuloskeletal, Contrast, Pediatric, Intraoperative, TCD
100~120 / 200~240VAC, 950VA, 50/60Hz
Abdomen, Cardiac, Fetal Echo, Gynecology, MSK, Pediatric Hips, Small Part, TCD,
Urology, Vascular
* Refer the Chapter 5 for additional information
Signal processing
(Pre-processing)
TGC control
Mode-independent gain control
Acoustic power control (adjustable)
Dynamic aperture
Dynamic apodization
Dynamic range control (adjustable)
Image view area control
M-mode sweep speed control
Signal processing
(Post-processing)
Frame average
Edge Enhancement / Blurring
Gamma-scale windowing
Image orientation (left/right and up/down, rotation)
White on black/black on white
Zoom
Measurement
Auxiliary
2-4
Maximum 5400 frames for CINE memory
Maximum 8192 Lines for LOOP memory
Image filing system
Trackball operation of multiple cursors
2D mode: Linear measurements and area measurements using elliptical approximation
or trace
M mode: Continuous readout of distance, time, and slope rate
Doppler mode: Velocity and trace
VCR
Video Page Printer
Color Video Page Printer
USB Video Printer
USB Color Video Printer
Inkjet Printer
Laser Printer
Foot Switch(IPX1)
USB Flash Memory Media
Monitor
User Interface
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Russian, Chinese
Pressure Limits
Operating: 700hPa to 1060hPa
Storage: 700hPa to 1060hPa
Humidity Limits
Operating: 30% to 75%
Storage & Shipping: 20% to 90%
Temperature Limits
Operating: 10°C ~ 35°C
Storage & Shipping: -25°C ~ 60°C
Chapter 2 Introduction
Product Configuration
This Product consists of the monitor, the control panel, the console, the peripheral devices, and the
probes.
2
1
4
7
8
3
6
5
9
10
11
12
13
[Figure 2.1 Front of the ACCUVIX XG]
Item
Descriptions
Item
Descriptions
1
Monitor
8
Speaker
2
Monitor arm
9
ECG port
3
Keyboard
0
Probe port
4
Control panel
!
CW probe port
5
Lift
@
Air filter
6
Probe holder
#
Wheel
7
DVD drive and USB port
2-5
Operation Manual
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
[Figure 2.2 Back of the ACCUVIX XG]
Item
2-6
Descriptions
1
Handle
2
Storage compartments
3
Ventilation
4
USB and LAN ports
5
Rear panel
6
Cable holder
7
Power connection part
Chapter 2 Introduction
Tips!
Principles of Operation
Medical ultrasound images are created by computer and digital memory from the transmission
and reception of mechanical high-frequency waves applied through a probe. The mechanical
ultrasound waves spread through the body, producing an echo where density changes occur.
For example, in the case of tissue, an echo is created where a signal passes from an adipose tissue
region to a muscular tissue region. The echoes return to the probe where they are converted back
into electrical signals.
These echo signals are highly amplified and processed by analog and digital circuits having filters
with many frequency and time response options, transforming the high-frequency electrical signals
into a series of digital image signals which are stored in memory. Once in memory, the image can
be displayed in real-time on the image monitor. All signal transmission, reception and processing
characteristics are controlled by computer.
2-7
Operation Manual
Monitor
Ultrasound images and other information are displayed on the color LCD monitor.
Monitor Display
The monitor displays ultrasound images, operation menus and a variety of other information. The
screen is divided into five areas: u Title area, v Measurement Menu area w Image Area, x Thumbnail
area, and y User Information area.
u
v
w
x
y
[Figure 2.3 Monitor Display]
2-8
Chapter 2 Introduction
■■Title Area
Displays patient name, hospital name, application, frame rate and depth, probe information,
acoustic output information, and date and time.
■■Preview and Measurement Menu Area
Displays the selected thumbnail image. During measurement, displays the measurement menus.
■■Image Area
Displays ultrasound images. Image information, annotation, and measurement information are
also displayed.
■■Thumbnail Area
The images saved by pressing the Save button are displayed. Click a thumbnail to enlarge. Up to 9
images are displayed.
In BodyMarker mode, body markers are displayed
■■User Information Area
The user information area provides a variety of information necessary for system use e.g. current
system status, image information, selectable items, etc.
Tips!
Displaying the current status of the system
: Shows the LAN connection status.
2-9
Operation Manual
Control Panel
The system can be controlled by using the control panel.
[Figure 2.4 Control Panel]
The control panel consists of a keyboard, soft menus, buttons, dials, dial-buttons, a slide, and a trackball.
The dial-button can be used both as a dial and a button.
2-10
Chapter 2 Introduction
Functions of the Control Panel
The following are the descriptions and instructions for the controls on the control panel. For more
information on controls with multiple functions, see Chapter 3 and later in this manual.
Button
Turns the system on/off.
Patient
Button
Displays the Patient Information screen for patient selection and information
entry.
Probe
Button
Displays the Probe Selection screen to select or change probes and
applications.
SONOVIEW
Button
Runs SONOVIEW which is the image filing program.
End Exam
Button
Finishes the exam of the currently selected patient and resets the related
data.
Report
Button
Displays the Report screen that shows the measurement results of the
current application and other information.
User 1
Button
This button is used to perform the special function as you set before.
The function of each button can be set in Utility > Setup > User Defined
Key.
User 2
Dial-Button
This button is used to perform the special function as you set before.
The function of each button can be set in Utility > Setup > User Defined
Key.
Depth / Lt Rt
Dial-button
Allows you to select the Depth or Lt Rt function. The button function is
changed each time you press this button. The default is Depth.
Depth: Adjusts the scanning depth of the image.
Lt Rt: Adjusts side margins of ROI in the 3D View-MPR.
Focus / T B
Dial-Button
Focus: Moves the focus to the target area for observation.
T B: Adjusts top and bottom margins of ROI in 3D View-MPR.
Zoom
Dial- button
Makes the Zoom Box appear.
In order to close the Zoom mode, press the Exit button.
Angle
Dial-Button
Adjusts the angle of sample volume in Spectral Doppler mode. It is also
used to adjust the indicator angle or the probe angle for a body marker.
Q Scan
Button
On/Off
Press this button to turn the Quick Scan function on. The ‘Q’ mark
is displayed on the top of the image. It can be used only in specific
applications of specific probes.
2-11
Operation Manual
Save
Print 1 / Print 2
Freeze
Use this button to save the selected image or report in a database.
Button
Prints the screen to a printer connected to the system, records the screen
on the VCR connected to the system, and saves Cine or Loop images to the
database.
The function can be set in Utility > Setup > Peripherals > Print Setup.
Button
Pauses/Resumes scanning.
M /x
Dial-button
Press this dial-button to start/stop M mode.
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain. Also, turning this dial-button when in
3D View rotates the image along the x-axis.
PD
Dial-button
Press this dial-button to start/stop Power Doppler mode.
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.
Color / z
Dial-button
Press this dial-button to start/stop Color Doppler mode.
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain. Also, turning this dial-button when in
3D View rotates the image along the z-axis.
2D
Dial-button
Press this dial-button to start 2D mode.
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain.
PW / y
Dial-button
Press this dial-button to start/stop PW Spectral Doppler mode.
Rotate this dial-button to adjust gain. Also, turning this dial-button when in
3D View rotates the image along the y-axis.
CW /
Ref. Slice
Dial-button
Carries out the CW or Ref. Slice function.
CW: Press this dial-button to start/stop CW Spectral Doppler mode. This
dial-button can be only used with the Phased Array or Static CW probe.
Ref. Slice: Moves the reference slice horizontally in the 3D View.
3D / 4D
Button
Press this button to turn 3D / 4D Mode on / off.
Button
Carries out the Set or Exit function.
- S et: Selects an item or value using the trackball or changes the function of
the trackball
- E xit: Exits the currently used function and returns to the previous function.
Button
When this is pressed, an arrow marker appears to point to the parts of the
displayed image.
Button
Deletes text, Indicator, body marker, and measurement result, etc. displayed
on an image.
Button
This is used to change the current Trackball function.
/
Set / Exit
Pointer
Clear
Change
2-12
Button
Chapter 2 Introduction
Calculator
Caliper
Button
Starts measurements by application.
Button
Starts to measure distance, circumference, area, and volume.
Trackball
Trackball
TGC
Slide
Moves the cursor on the screen and scrolls through CINE images.
Adjusts TGC values for each depth using 8 slides. TGC stands for Time Gain
Compensation.
CAUTION: Too large a difference in the gain value settings of adjacent TGC slides may lead to the
generation of stripes in an image.
Tips!
Indicator and Pointer Button
You can choose to enter indicators with Pointer button on the control panel. To use Pointer
button to enter indicators, go to Utility > Setup > User Defined Key > Indicator Select and
select Control Panel. In this case, pointer is controlled with the touch screen button.
Select Touch if you wish to enter indicators by using the touch screen (which is the default
setting).
■■Keyboard
The keyboard is used to type in text.
[Figure 2.5 Keyboard]
2-13
Operation Manual
Touch-Screen
The touch screen is an operating tool that can be touched by the user to create input. The functions
that are available in the current mode are shown in the form of buttons or a dial-button.
■■Touch screen display
The touch screen consists of the following four areas:
Item
Tips!
Descriptions
1
Information Area: Shows the title of the touch screen currently displayed.
2
Tab Area: Shows diagnostic modes and utilities under different tabs. The touch screen can be
changed by pressing one of the tabs.
3
Menu Area: The menu items that are available in the current input mode are shown in the form of
buttons. The user can access the desired menu item by pressing the corresponding button. The
menu currently in use is shown in orange.
4
Soft Menu Area: The Soft Menu items that are available in the current input mode are shown. The
menus in use are shown with orange borders. Press or rotate the dial-buttons right below the menu.
When there are two Soft Menus
When there are two menus available upper and lower, both menus can be adjusted with the
corresponding dial-button. Press a desired menu button on the touch screen and then use the
dial-button.
u
v
w
x
[Figure 2.6 Touch Screen]
2-14
Chapter 2 Introduction
Adjusting the Control Panel
CAUTION:
Do not apply excessive force to the control panel.
XX
Use the handle at the back of the body when moving the product.
XX
■■Adjusting to the right and left
Hold the handle of the control panel and move it carefully to the right or left.
■■Adjusting the height
Press the lever on the handle of the control panel and move it carefully up or down.
2-15
Operation Manual
Console
The console consists of two parts – the inner unit and the outer unit. The interior of the console mainly
contains devices that produce ultrasound images. On the exterior of the console are various connectors,
probe holders, storage compartments, handles, wheels, etc.
Rear Panel
A monitor and other peripheral devices like printer, VCR, etc. are connected via the rear panel at the
back of the system.
1
2
3
4
7
7
5
6
[Figure 2.7 Rear Panel]
Item
2-16
Descriptions
1
S-VHS port (I/O): Connects the VCR in S-VHS mode.
2
VHS port (I/O): Connects the VCR in VHS mode.
3
Audio port (I/O): Used to input and output audio signals.
4
Microphone port (Input): Connect a microphone to this port.
5
Print Remote port (Output): Connect an echo printer to this port for remote printing.
6
B/W printer port (Output): Connect an echo printer to this port.
7
DVI port (Output): Outputs digital signals to the monitor.
8
Foot switch port: Connect a foot switch to this port.
Chapter 2 Introduction
Power Connection Part
The power connection part is located at the bottom on the rear panel.
4
tvup{vy
}jy
jvsvyGwypu{ly
ljovGwypu{ly
puw|{GzV~
pusl{
uvyths
1
vsw
6
v}w
v{w
2
puw|{
Oul{zwhuu|unP
XWW}TXYW}hj
{XWhoGVGY\W}
YWW}TY[W}hj
{XWhoGVGY\W}
ˈjh|{pvuGaGmvyGjvu{pu|lk
wyv{lj{pvuGhnhpuz{Gypzr
vmGmpylSGylwshjlGvus€G~p{o
zhtlG{€wlGhukGyh{punGvm
m|zlˉ
v|{sl{
h|Gwv~ly
pzvsh{lGv|{w|{
Opzvsply{lyGh|znhunP
XWWTXYW}hj¥YWW~OthP
YWWTY[W}hj¥YWW~OthP
v|{w|{G}vs{hnlGzlslj{vy
5
3
Oh|znhunGzwhuu|unG~hosP
puw|{G}vs{hnlGzlslj{vy
[Figure 2.8 Power Connection Part]
Item
Descriptions
1
Power Inlet: For the power cable to connect to external power
2
Fuse holder: For the inlet fuse
3
Input rating change switch (Outlet): Selects the input power.
4
Power Outlet (Input): The part to which power is provided from the internal power device of the product.
5
Output rating change switch: Select the output power.
6
Power switch: Supplies or blocks power to the entire system.
Probe Holder
A probe holder is mounted at the left and right side of the control panel.
2-17
Operation Manual
Peripheral Devices
NOTE: Refer to the operation manual of peripheral device about its operating.
Internal Peripheral Devices
These are peripheral devices mounted in the system.
■■DVD-Multi
DVD-RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-ROM
■■Hard Disc Drive
At least 80 GB
External Peripheral Devices
These are peripheral devices that can be connected for use when needed and are connected via the
USB port located at the rear panel.
CAUTION: Do not place peripheral devices, not listed in this manual, inside the patient environment.
If you place them in the patient environment, it may cause electrical hazard.
N
N
N
N
[Figure 2.9 Patient Environment]
2-18
Chapter 2 Introduction
CAUTION: When using a peripheral device from a USB port, always turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the device. Connection/discon-nection of USB devices during power-on
may lead to malfunction of the system and USB devices.
NOTE:
When remove the removable disk, use Utility > Storage manager.
XX
USB ports are located both on the front panel and the rear panel of the console.
XX
We recommend that you connect USB storage devices (Flash Memory Media, etc.) to the ports
on the front panel and other USB peripheral devices to the rear panel for added convenience.
The following products are recommended:
■■Video Cassette Recorder (VCR)
XX
Analog: Panasonic MD835 SVHS (NTSC & PAL), Mitsubishi MD3000, Sony SVO-9500
XX
Digital: Sony DVO-1000MD (NTSC & PAL), JVC BD-X201
■■Video Page printer
XX
BW: Mitsubishi P-93WM, Sony UP-897MD
XX
Color: Mitsubishi CP31W, Sony UP20, Sony UP-25MD
■■USB Video printer
XX
BW : Mitsubishi P-93DW, Mitsubishi P-95DW, Sony UP-D897
XX
Color : Mitsubishi CP-30DW, Sony UP-D21MD, Sony UP-D23MD, Sony UP-D25MD
CAUTION:
You must install a Microsoft Windows XP™or above (English) compatible printer and driver.
XX
Contact Samsung Medison Customer Service Center for inquiries about printer driver installation.
When connecting the printer, ensure that the printer is configured under Microsoft Windows™
XX
or system setup and has been chosen as the default printer.
Please check the port used in printer before connecting. Printers should be connected to the
XX
Printer port while the USB printer connected to the USB port.
■■USB to RS-232C Serial Cable
XX
USB to Serial (RS-232C) Converter with FTDI Chipset (FTDI FT232BM Compatible)
NOTE: For more information about the Open Line Transfer, refer to `Chapter 5. Measurements and
Calculations’.
2-19
Operation Manual
■■Foot Switch
Set the function of the foot switch Utility > Setup > Peripherals > Foot Switch; Freeze, Update,
Record, Print, Store Clip, or Volume Start .
WARNING: Foot Switch cannot be used in the operating room.
■■Others
Flash Memory Media
NOTE:
If you use the USB 1.1 Flash Memory, the system cannot recognize it. In the case of this, delete
XX
the Flash Memory from the console and quip again.
Regarding file formats that are not ordinarily saved: Please check first to see if it is possible to
XX
save the file format on a desktop PC before trying to save the file on a Flash Memory.
2-20
Chapter 2 Introduction
Probe
Probes are devices that generate ultrasound waves and process reflected wave data for the purpose of
image formation.
NOTE: For more information, refer to `Chapter 9 Probes’.
Connecting probes
Be sure to connect or disconnect probes when the power is off to ensure the safety of the system and
the probes.
1. Equip probes to the probe connectors on the front panel of the system. A maximum of three probes
can be connected at one time. The CW probe should only be connected to its own connector.
2. Turn the connector-locking handle clockwise.
[Figure 2.10 Probe Connector]
2-21
Operation Manual
Accessories
An accessory box containing the items below is supplied with the product.
CAUTION: Main cord set, separately certified according to the relevant standards, is to be used
when supplied to EU and USA/CAN.
NOTE: Accessories can be different according to the country.
FUSE
SONO GEL
GROUND CABLE
MANUAL
POWER CORD
DVI2RGB GENDER
WINDOWS XP LABEL
[Figure 2.11 Accessories]
2-22
Chapter 2 Introduction
Optional Functions
This product has the following optional functions:
XX
4D
XX
Spatial Compound Imaging (SCI)
XX
3D XI
XX
XI STIC
XX
CW Function
XX
Auto IMT
XX
Cardiac Measurement
XX
ElastoScan
XX
DynamicMR (DMR)
XX
Panoramic
XX
DICOM
XX
3DMXI Upgrade
XX
HDVI
XX
VolumeNT
For further information about optional functions, please refer to the relevant chapters in this manual.
2-23
Chapter
3
Starting Diagnosis
‹‹Power Supply................................................... 3-3
Powering On...............................................................................3-3
Powering Off..............................................................................3-3
‹‹Probes & Applications.................................... 3-4
Probe Selection Screen..........................................................3-4
Probe Selection and Application........................................3-5
Renaming a Userset.................................................................3-5
‹‹Patient Information........................................ 3-6
Patient Information for Application..................................3-8
Finding Patient Information...............................................3-15
Managing Patient Exams.....................................................3-18
Changing Measurements....................................................3-25
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
Power Supply
Boot the system for use.
CAUTION: Make sure to connect the probe and peripheral devices that will be used before
powering on the system. If you attempt to connect them during system use, it may lead to patient
injury or fatal damage to the console.
Powering On
Press the On/Off button when the power is off. Booting begins, and the product logo appears on the
screen. When booting is completed, the 2D mode screen appears in End Exam status.
CAUTION: Before starting the diagnosis, you must register the patient information.
NOTE:
The product should be turned on about 10 seconds after the power switch at the back of the
XX
product is turned on.
During system booting, do not press any key on the keyboard. It may cause product
XX
malfunction.
If you turn on the power after turning it off forcibly, the system may turn on and off
XX
momentarily. This is one of the characteristics of the Intel® PC main board, not a system error.
Powering Off
Press the On/Off button while using the system.
CAUTION: Pressing the On/Off button longer than 5 seconds will turn the power off and will
result in damage to the hard disk. Please refrain from such use.
3-3
Operation Manual
Probes & Applications
Before scanning, select a probe and an application.
CAUTION: Please refer to Chapter 9 “Probes” for more information about the probes supported by
this system.
Probe Selection Screen
Press the Probe button on the control panel and the Probe Selection screen will be displayed on the touch
screen.
In this screen, you can select the application you want to use and change the probe presets.
The Probe Selection screen is divided into four lists.
Item
Descriptions
1
Probe list: Display a list of probes currently connected to the system.
2
Application list: Display a list of applications the selected probe supports.
3
Preset list: Display a list of presets the selected application supports.
4
Userset list: Display a list of presets you can configure according to your preferences. You can rename a
userset by using the User Rename button.
u
v
w
x
[Figure 3.1 Probe Selection]
3-4
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
Probe Selection and Application
The selected probe, preset, and userset appear in the title area of the monitor screen.
1. Select Probe g Application à Preset g Userset in that order.
XX
If you do not want to use a userset, tap Default on the touch screen.
2. When a userset is selected, the system applies the settings automatically and then switches to the
diagnosis mode.
XX
Tap Cancel or press the Exit button on the control panel to cancel.
Renaming a Userset
1. Select the userset you want to rename by tapping Preset on the touch screen.
2. Tap User Rename. The Rename window will be displayed.
3. Enter the name you want to use and tap Ok. Tap Cancel or press the Exit button on the control panel
to cancel.
NOTE: In order to set a Userset, tap Utility > Preset on the touch screen or tap Preset on each
touch screen menu. Please, refer to “Preset” in this chapter for more information.
3-5
Operation Manual
Patient Information
Press the Patient button on the control panel and the Patient Information screen will appear on the screen.
In this screen, you can enter, search, or change patient information. Patient information includes basic
information such as the patient ID, name, DOB, and gender, together with additional information for
applications.
NOTE: The ID and name fields are required.
Entering Basic Patient Data
You can enter or change basic patient data at the top of the Patient Information screen.
Use the Trackball and the Set button to select the desired field. Press a button on the touch screen to
enter information with the touch screen.
Press OK on the screen to save the information and exit. Press Cancel or Exit on the touch screen to
cancel.
[Figure 3.2 The Patient Information]
3-6
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
[Figure 3.3 The Patient Information – Touch Screen]
■■ID
Enter a patient ID.
XX
To enter it manually, enter an ID in the ID field.
XX
To enter it automatically, select Auto ID Creation and click New. The icon is changed to
XX
If you enter an ID that exists already, the icon next to the ID field is changed to
.
.
■■Name
Enter patient’s full name. The name that you have entered will appear in the title area and reports.
XX
Last Name: Enter the patient’s last name.
XX
First Name: Enter the patient’s first name.
XX
Middle Name: Enter the patient’s middle name.
■■Representation
Specify how the names of Asian patients, including Korean, Chinese and Japanese are displayed.
XX
Roman: Type in Roman letters.
XX
Ideographic: Type in ideographic letters.
XX
Phonetic: Type in phonetic letters.
3-7
Operation Manual
NOTE:
This button appears on the screen only in products that support Asian patient names.
XX
For information on specifying the order or the way in which names are displayed, refer to ‘Screen
XX
Display Settings’ in Chapter 7. ‘Utilities’ to set an order or method for displaying a name.
■■Birth
Enter the patient’s birth date in the specified format.
■■Age
Enter the patient’s age in “yy-mm” format. When a birth date is specified in the Birth field, this
information is automatically calculated and displayed.
■■Gender
Select the patient’s gender.
■■Accession
When viewing the worklist for a patient via the DICOM server, this information is automatically
filled.
Patient Information for Application
In Study Information, enter additional patient information or change the existing patient information
required for a diagnosis.
1. Press the Study Information tab in the Patient Information screen on the monitor, or select
Information by using the Page dial-button on the touch screen.
2. Select an application by using Category on the monitor or the touch screen.
3. Enter additional information required for diagnosis.
To delete all past measurement values, press Clear Measure on the monitor.
General
In Category, select General. Enter additional information. The items in General are also included in the
patient information screen for other applications.
3-8
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
■■Height
Enter the patient’s height in Inches (in.) or Centimeter (cm). Click the unit button to change the unit.
When the unit is changed, the entered number is automatically recalculated and displayed in the
changed unit.
■■Weight
Enter the patient’s weight in Ounces (oz), Pounds (lb) or Kilograms (Kg). Click the unit to change it.
■■BSA
When height and weight are entered, BSA (Body Surface Area) is automatically calculated and
displayed.
■■HR
Enter a heart rate.
■■BP
Enter systolic/diastolic pressure (Blood Pressure).
■■Diag. Physician
Enter the name of the physician who diagnosed the patient. When there is more than one physician
available, you can use the combo button to make a selection.
Tips!
Typing in Korean, Japanese or Chinese
Diag. Physician, Ref. Physician, Sonographer, Description and Indication can be entered in Korean,
Japanese or Chinese. Choose the desired language by using the Language button on the touch
screen.
■■Ref. Physician
Enter the name of the reference physician. When there is more than one physician available, you
can use the combo button to make a selection.
■■Sonographer
Enter the name of the sonographer who scanned the patient. When there is more than one
sonographer available, you can use the combo button to make a selection.
3-9
Operation Manual
■■Description
Enter a description of the diagnosis. If a description is entered, it can be searched for and viewed
under Description in SONOVIEW.
[Figure 3.4 Study Information - General]
OB
In Category, select OB. Enter additional information for OB.
■■LMP (Last Menstrual Period)
Enter the last menstrual period for a patient. You can enter it manually in the specified format, or
have it automatically calculated and displayed with the GA entered.
■■GA (LMP)
Indicates the gestational age of a patient. You can enter it manually in the specified format, or have
it automatically calculated and displayed with the LMP entered.
■■EDD (LMP)
With the LMP or GA entered, EDD (Expected Date of Delivery) is calculated and displayed.
Tips!
Tips!
Typing in Korean, Japanese or Chinese
Diag. Physician, Ref. Physician, Sonographer, Description and Indication can be entered in Korean,
Japanese or Chinese. Choose the desired language by using the Language button on the touch
screen.
Calculating EDD (LMP)
EDD can be calculated by entering LMP or GA.
When LMP is entered: GA and EDD are automatically calculated and displayed on the screen.
XX
When GA is entered: LMP and EDD are automatically calculated and displayed on the screen.
XX
3-10
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
■■Estab.Due Date
Enter EDD in the specified format.
■■Ovul. Date
Enter an ovulation date in the specified format. LMP, GA, and EDD will be automatically calculated
and displayed.
Tips!
Calculating LMP and EDD (LMP) with Ovul. Date
The following formula are used:
LMP = Ovul. Date - 14
XX
EDD = (280 -14) + Ovul. Date
XX
NOTE: Calculated values cannot be modified.
■■Number of Fetuses
Enter the number of fetuses. Up to 4 may be entered.
■■Day of Cycle
Enter a menstrual period in number of days (dd).
■■Para
Enter the number of deliveries.
■■Gravida
Enter the number of pregnancies.
■■Aborta
Enter the number of miscarriages.
■■Ectopic
Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies
3-11
Operation Manual
[Figure 3.5 Study Information-OB]
Gynecology
In Category, select Gynecology. Enter additional information for Gyn. This is the same information as
for OB.
NOTE: In the GYN information input screen, even if the Ovul. Date is entered, LMP and EDD will
not be calculated automatically.
[Figure 3.6 Study Information-Gyn]
Adult Echo
In Category, select Adult Echo. Enter additional information for Cardiac.
[Figure 3.7 Study Information – Adult Echo]
3-12
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
Ped Echo
In Category, select Ped Echo. Enter additional information for Pediatric Cardiac.
[Figure 3.8 Study Information – Pediatric Echo]
Fetal Heart
In Category, select Fetal Heart. Enter additional information for Fetal Cardiac.
This is the same information as for Cardiac.
[Figure 3.9Study Information – Fetal Echo]
Vascular
In Category, select Vascular. Enter additional information for vascular.
[Figure 3.10 Study Information – Vascular]
3-13
Operation Manual
TCD
In Category, select TCD. Enter additional information for TCD.
[Figure 3.11 Study Information – TCD]
Urology
In Category, select Urology. Enter additional information for Urology.
[Figure 3.12 Study Information-Urology]
3-14
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
Finding Patient Information
In the Patient Information screen, select the Search tab. You can search the patient information with
following two methods.
Tips!
Selecting a tab
You can select a desired tab in either one of two ways. Select the way that suits you.
Select a tab on the monitor screen by using the trackball and the Set button.
XX
Select a tab by turning the Page dial-button on the touch screen.
XX
Local Search
Search through the information stored in the system.
[Figure 3.13 Search-Local]
1. Select Local by using Search Source on the monitor or the touch screen.
2. In Search By, select a search condition.
XX
Select Patient ID to search by ID, or select a patient’s name under Patient Name to search by
name.
3. After enter the required ID or name in the search box, click Search. The list of patients who match
the search criteria will be displayed.
3-15
Operation Manual
Tips!
Selecting a tab
To display a list of all the patients that are available in the system, click Search All.
XX
Clicking items such as ID or Name sorts entries in alphabetical or numerical order for the
XX
selected criteria.
4. To apply information on the selected patient to the system, click Apply after selecting a patient
from the patient list.
XX
To delete the ID and all other information of the selected patient, click Delete.
XX
To select all patients in the list, click Select All.
WARNING: If a patient ID is deleted, all related data and images stored in SONOVIEW are erased.
Worklist Search
Perform a search by connecting to the DICOM Modality Worklist server in the hospital network.
NOTE: Worklist search is available only when DICOM is enabled. The Worklist Server can be
specified at Utility > Setup > DICOM. For more information, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in
Chapter 7 ‘Utilities’.
1. Select Worklist by using Search Source on the monitor or the touch screen.
2. After entering at least one item out of Patient ID, Last Name, Accession # (worklist number) and
Procedure ID, click Search. The list of patients who match the criteria will be displayed.
Tips!
3-16
Clicking items such as Date/Time or Patient Name sorts entries in alphabetical or numerical order
for the selected criteria.
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
3. To apply information on the selected patient to the system, click Apply after selecting a patient
from the patient list.
[Figure 3.14 Search - Worklist]
3-17
Operation Manual
Managing Patient Exams
In the Patient Information screen, select the Exam View tab. The list of exams for the patient ID applied in
the previous search will appear.
NOTE: The exam list appears only when a patient search is completed and the related patient
information is applied to the system.
The list provides following information as well as Patient ID, Name, Age, and Gender;
XX
Exam Date: The date of the exam
XX
Images: The number of saved images
XX
Measure: Whether a measurement was performed
XX
SR: Whether a Structured Report was created
XX
SE: Whether a Stress Echo test was performed
XX
SC: The transfer status of the exam. (Storage Commit)
XX
Lock status: Whether the exam is locked
Tips!
If you tap a column header, such as Patient ID or Patient Name, the exam list is sorted
XX
alphabetically or numerically according to the selected column header.
To select multiple exams, hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and press the Set button on
XX
the control panel.
[Figure 3.15 Exam View]
3-18
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
Executing Exam
Use the trackball and the Set button to select an exam, and then click Review Exam or Continue
Exam on the screen. For an exam currently being executed, the button is displayed as Current Exam
and disabled.
NOTE: If the selected exam has been executed in the past 24 hours, the button in the lower left
corner is displayed as Continue Exam. If the exam was executed earlier than this, the button is
displayed as Review Exam.
■■Continue Exam
In addition to using the Resume Exam function, you can update the current scan with the exam
executed previously.
The selected exam appears on the screen and scanning is available. The initial execution date for
the corresponding exam (Exam Resumed) is displayed in the feedback area.
Double-clicking a stored image in the thumbnail area at the bottom of the screen retrieves the
image and displays the stored image information. In the retrieved exam screen, you can perform
measurements or enter text, bodymarkers or indicators.
NOTE: Continue Exam can be stored within 24 hours from the point that the exam is executed.
■■Review Exam
The selected exam appears on the screen. Double-clicking a stored image in the thumbnail area
at the bottom of the screen retrieves the image and displays the initial execution date for the
corresponding exam (Exam Reviewed) and the stored image information. In the retrieved exam
screen, you can perform measurements or enter text, bodymarkers or indicators.
3-19
Operation Manual
Viewing Exam
Select an exam by using the trackball and the Set button, and click Review on the screen. Switch to
the SONOVEIW screen.
NOTE: For information on using SONOVIEW, please refer to “Chapter 6. Image Management.”
Deleting Exam
Select an exam by using the trackball and the Set button, and click Delete on the screen. All images from
the exam will be deleted. However, an exam in progress or a locked exam cannot be deleted.
Select either to delete only the image or to delete only the exam. An exam without Measure Data will
not be displayed on the screen if only the image is deleted.
NOTE: Once deleted, exams cannot be restored.
Tips!
3-20
To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
keyboard.
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
Sending Exams via DICOM
You can send the selected exams via the DICOM network.
NOTE: Before using this feature, make sure that DICOM is properly configured. For information on
configuring DICOM, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in ‘Chapter 7. Utilities’.
Perform the following steps to send the selected exam via DICOM:
1. Select an exam(s) and then click Send on the screen. The DICOM Storage window will appear.
Tips!
To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
keyboard.
2. Select an image or report to send. You can select images under Storage Image, and reports under
Storage SR.
3. Clicking Transfer starts a transfer and displays the transfer progress (%). To cancel the transfer, click
Close.
XX
To check the DICOM connection with the server before sending the exam, click Test.
[Figure 3.16 DICOM Storage]
3-21
Operation Manual
Printing Exams via DICOM
NOTE: Before using this feature, make sure that DICOM is properly configured. For information on
configuring DICOM, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in Chapter 7 ‘Utilities’.
Perform the following steps to print the selected exam via DICOM:
1. After selecting an exam, click Print on the screen. The DICOM Printer window will be displayed.
Tips!
To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
keyboard.
2. Click Transfer. The transfer will be started and its progress (%) will be displayed. To cancel, click
Close.
XX
To check the DICOM connection with the server before sending the exam, click Test.
[Figure 3.17 DICOM Printer]
Exporting Exam
Perform the following steps to export the selected exam to an external storage device:
1. After selecting an exam, click Export on the screen. The Image Export window will be displayed.
Tips!
To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
keyboard.
2. In Drive, select the device in which the exam will be saved. You can select CD-ROM, or Flash
memory.
3-22
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
3. In File Name, enter the file name. The same file name is given to all images of an exam. When an
exam contains multiple images, a serial number is automatically added to the end of the file name.
4. In File Format, select the format in which the files will be saved. You can select BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or
DICOM.
5. In Export Option, select the options to apply to the files. You can select multiple options.
XX
3D Volume Data: Export the 3D volume data together with the image.
XX
2D cine: Export the stored Cine images after converting them to video files (AVI files).
XX
3D and Live Cine: Export 3D Cine and Live Cine images after converting them to video files (AVI
files).
XX
Hide Patient information: Export images from which the patient ID and name have been deleted.
6. In Directories, select the location in which the exam will be saved. To create a new directory, click
and enter the name. To delete a directory, select it and click
. In Files, the files currently
saved in the selected directory are displayed.
7. Click Export to begin exporting. Click Close to cancel.
[Figure 3.18 Image Export]
3-23
Operation Manual
Backing up Exam
You can back up the selected exams in an external storage device.
NOTE: A USB device with an anti-virus program installed is not supported.
1. Connect a storage media for backup. CD-ROM or Flash Memory can be used.
2. Select an exam(s) and then click Backup on the screen.
Tips!
To select more than one image, press the Set button while holding down the Ctrl key on the
keyboard.
3. A confirmation window will appear asking whether to continue the backup. Click Yes to continue.
Click No to cancel.
4. The Backup window will appear. Under Drive, select the media where the selected exams will be
saved.
5. Click Ok to start the backup. Click Cancel to cancel.
[Figure 3.19 Exam Backup]
3-24
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
Changing Measurements
In the Patient Information screen, press the Measure Data tab. Under the Measure Data tab, you can
enter obstetrics measurements for a patient or check the existing measurements. Press the button, and
the Insert screen will appear.
NOTE:
This option is available for obstetrics only and enabled only when a patient ID is selected.
XX
If obstetrics data has been changed by using New Pregnancy in Patient Information > Study
XX
Information > OB, enter LMP as a piece of obstetrics data before changing measurement data.
The Insert Screen
Click Insert on the screen to display the Insert screen. You can enter the existing obstetrics
measurements.
■■Exam. Date
Enter the measurement date.
NOTE: If OB data has been changed by using New Pregnancy, you can only enter a date
between the newly entered LMP and yesterday.
■■Fetus
If the fetus is a twin, identify each fetus. Up to 4 fetuses (A, B, C, D) can be specified.
■■Exam No.
Up to 8 exam numbers can be entered for each date. An exam number appears next to the Fetus
field.
■■New Data
Cancel all measurement data entered for other exams and enter new measurement data.
■■Clear
Cancel entering the measurement data.
3-25
Operation Manual
■■Insert
Complete entering the measurement data.
■■Page Browse
Use the [>>] or [<<] button.
■■View
Switch to the View screen.
[Figure 3.20 Measure Data-View]
The View Screen
Click View on the screen to display the View screen. You can view the measurements entered or
save them in an Excel file. The * symbol next to Exam Date indicates that the data is the current
measurement data.
■■Package
Select a measurement package to display on the screen.
■■Refresh
Update the measurement data. New measurements, or the measurements entered, are added.
3-26
Chapter 3 Starting Diagnosis
■■Save
The Save To Excel window appears, allowing you to save information on the screen in an Excel file.
By default, the Excel file name is set to the measurement ID.
After specifying the target path and file name, click Save to save the information. To cancel saving,
click Close.
NOTE: Checking the HTML checkbox saves information in an HTML file instead of an Excel file.
■■Insert
Switch to the Insert screen.
[Figure 3.21 Measure Data - Insert]
3-27
Chapter
4
Diagnosis Modes
‹‹Information...................................................... 4-3
Diagnosis Mode Type..............................................................4-3
Basic Use......................................................................................4-4
‹‹Basic Mode....................................................... 4-7
2D Mode......................................................................................4-7
M Mode......................................................................................4-19
Color Doppler Mode.............................................................4-22
Power Doppler Mode............................................................4-27
PW Spectral Doppler Mode................................................4-30
CW Spectral Doppler Mode................................................4-36
TDI Mode...................................................................................4-38
TDW Mode................................................................................4-39
ElastoScan Mode....................................................................4-40
‹‹Combined Mode...........................................4-47
2D/C/PW Mode.......................................................................4-47
2D/PD/PW Mode....................................................................4-47
2D/C/CW Mode.......................................................................4-47
2D/PD/CW Mode....................................................................4-47
2D/C/M Mode..........................................................................4-48
2D/C Live Mode.......................................................................4-48
2D/TDI/TDW.............................................................................4-48
Chapter
4
‹‹Multi-Image Mode........................................4-50
Dual Mode.................................................................................4-50
Quad Mode...............................................................................4-51
‹‹3D/4D Mode...................................................4-52
3D Stand By .............................................................................4-56
3D View - MPR..........................................................................4-60
VOCAL ........................................................................................4-71
3D XI............................................................................................4-80
XI VOCAL ...................................................................................4-90
4D.................................................................................................4-97
XI STIC.........................................................................................4-98
3D Utility Menu ...................................................................4-102
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Information
Diagnosis Mode Type
This product supports a variety of diagnosis modes including Basic Mode, Combined Mode, Multi-Image
Mode, and 3D/4D Mode.
XX
Basic Mode: Consists of different modes, each of which has a specific usage and function. By
default, 2D Mode is applied together with another mode.
XX
Combined Mode: For an image, two or three Basic Modes are applied at the same time. By
default, 2D Mode is applied together with another mode. An image is viewed in a single screen.
XX
Multi-Image Mode: The screen is divided into two (dual) or four (quad) sub screens, each of
which is used to view an image. Since each sub screen can display a different image, it can be a
very useful feature, allowing multilateral views of an organ.
XX
3D / 4D Mode: 3D and 4D images can be obtained.
The types of diagnosis mode that are available with the product are shown below:
Mode
Basic Mode
Combined Mode
Multi-Image Mode
3D / 4D Mode
Type
2D Mode
Color Doppler Mode
Power Doppler Mode
M Mode
PW Spectral Doppler Mode
CW Spectral Doppler Mode
Tissue Doppler Imaging Mode
Tissue Doppler Wave Mode
ElastoScan Mode
2D/C/PW Mode
2D/PD/PW Mode
2D/C/CW Mode
2D/PD/CW Mode
2D/C/M Mode
2D/TDI/TDW Mode
2D/C Live Mode
Dual Mode
Quad Mode
3D Mode
4D Mode
4-3
Operation Manual
NOTE: The functionalities for each mode may be restricted by the selected probe.
Basic Use
The items that can be used commonly in each diagnosis mode are shown below:
Using Control Panel
The items that can be used in each diagnosis mode are provided as menu items. You can change the
image format or optimize an image to facilitate your diagnosis.
■■Gain
Use the dial-button on the control panel. The Gain button appears differently depending on the
diagnosis mode, but it is usually in the form of a dial-button used to select a diagnosis mode.
You can adjust the brightness of an image. If you rotate the Gain dial-button clockwise, its value
increases.
■■TGC (Time Gain Compensation)
Use the TGC slide on the control panel.
In general, ultrasound penetration gets weaker with depth. TGC can be used to compensate for
this effect.
The product provides eight TGC slides for varying depths, allowing you to adjust Gain by area.
Among the eight slides, the top slide represents the shallowest area, while the lower slides represent
the deeper ones.
Move the slide to the right (+) to increase Gain, brightening the image.
■■Focus
Use Focus dial-button on the control panel to adjust the location of focus.
NOTE: The same dial-button is used for Focus and TB. It works as Focus in scan mode and as TB
in 3D mode.
4-4
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■Depth
Use Depth dial-button on the control panel to adjust the image scanning depth.
The allowable range for adjustment varies with the selected probe.
NOTE: The same dial-button is used for Depth and Lt Rt. It works as Depth in scan mode and as
Lt Rt in 3D mode.
■■Zoom
Use the Zoom dial-button on the control panel.
You can magnify an image. An image can be magnified by either Read Zoom or Write Zoom.
XX
Read Zoom: This function allows you to zoom an image saved in a hard disk.
1. Rotate the Zoom dial-button on the control panel.
2. Use the Trackball to move the Zoom box. You can locate the Zoom box in an image with the
Zoom Navigation box on the left side of the screen.
3. Observe the magnified image.
XX
Write Zoom: This function allows you to magnify and scan an image in real time.
4. Use the Zoom dial-button on the control panel. The Write Zoom box will appear on the
screen.
5. Use the Change button to move and resize the Zoom box. Each time you press the Change
button, the current state of the Zoom box is displayed in the lower left of the screen.
XX
PreZoom position: You can move the Zoom box. Use the Trackball to move the Zoom
box and press the Set button to specify its position.
XX
PreZoom size: You can resize the Zoom box. Use the Trackball to resize the Zoom box
and press the Set button to specify its size.
6. To finish Zoom mode, press the Zoom dial-button once again. Or press the Exit button on
the control panel. When using Write Zoom, changing Depth automatically finishes Zoom
mode.
Tips!
When you press the Zoom button or the Set button in PreZoom position, it changes to Write
Zoom. When you press the Zoom button in PreZoom size, it changes to the PreZoom position.
4-5
Operation Manual
■■QuickScan
NOTE: The QuickScan function is available with specific probes and applications only.
Use the Quick Scan button on the control panel. The ‘Q Scan’’ mark will appear at the top of an
image.
In 2D Mode, it is used to optimize the contrast and brightness of an image by adjusting Gain and
TGC automatically. In PW Spectral Doppler Mode, it is used to optimize the spectrum by adjusting
Scale and Baseline automatically.
To finish QuickScan mode, press the Q Scan button once again. Or press the Exit button on the
control panel.
Using Touch Screen Menu
The items that can be used in each diagnosis mode are provided as touch screen menu items. You can
change the image format or optimize an image to facilitate your diagnosis.
1. In a diagnosis mode, press the item button or rotate the dial-button on the touch screen.
XX
In a combined mode that uses more than one diagnosis mode, press a tab on the touch screen
to specify settings for each mode.
XX
When there is more than one menu on the touch screen, used the
through pages.
or
button to navigate
2. Select a value by pressing a button or by rotating the dial-button on the touch screen.
4-6
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Basic Mode
2D Mode
This basic mode, also referred to as B Mode (Brightness mode), provides scan planes of organs. This is
used to display two-dimensional anatomy images in the direction of scanning in real time.
[Figure 4.1 2D Mode]
Entering 2D Mode
NOTE: Because 2D Mode is applied by default for all diagnosis modes, it cannot be terminated.
Press the 2D dial-button on the control panel.
If you press the 2D dial-button in other diagnosis modes, it will switch to the basic 2D Mode.
4-7
Operation Manual
2D Mode Menu
[Figure 4.2 Touch screen for 2D Mode]
■■Harmonic
Turn it on or off by tapping Harmonic on the touch screen. The ‘HRA’ mark will be displayed in the
image data.
This product provides the OHI (Optimal Harmonic Imaging) function that optimizes an image with
high frequencies.
4-8
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
NOTE: The Harmonic function is available with specific probes only.
■■Trapezoidal
NOTE: The Trapezoidal item appears in the menu only when a Linear Probe is used.
Turn it on or off by tapping Trapezoidal on the touch screen.
In general, the rectangular frame provided by a Linear Probe is changed to a trapezoidal shape. This
allows a wider view of an image.
The Trapezoid function may not be available for certain depths. In addition, the Write Zoom function
cannot be accessed with the Zoom button when the Trapezoidal function is in use. (However, Read
Zoom can be used.)
■■2D/C Live
Turn it on or off by tapping 2D/C Live on the touch screen.
The 2D image and Color Doppler image for the scanned area can be displayed simultaneously in
real time.
In ACCUVIX XG this item is placed in the 2D menu so that the 2D/C Live Mode, which is used
frequently, can be easily accessed. You can toggle between two images easily with a single button
operation.
■■Pulse Inversion
Turn it on or off by tapping Pulse Inv on the touch screen.
If it is turned on, pulses are inverted to sharpen the displayed image. The INV mark appears at the
top of the image.
NOTE: Pulse Inversion is available with specific probes only.
4-9
Operation Manual
■■Panoramic (Optional)
NOTE: The Panoramic Imaging function is available only in 2D mode with Linear and Convex
probes.
Tap Panoramic on the touch screen. The touch screen will be switched to the Panoramic Ready
screen. For more information, please refer to “Panoramic” in this chapter.
■■Low MI
NOTE: Low MI is available under 2D mode with specific probes only.
Turn it on or off by tapping Low MI on the touch screen. The monitor changes to Low MI screen.
Refer to ‘LOW MI Mode’ in this chapter for detail.
■■Preset
Tapping Preset on the touch screen displays the Probe settings supported by the present
application. For more information, please refer to Chapter 7 “Utilities”.
■■Spatial Compound (Optional)
NOTE: This item appears in the Flexible Soft menu only when a Linear Probe is used.
Tap Spatial Comp on the touch screen. The Spatial Compound mark appears on the image
information. Spatial Comp, which can be used to select a value for Spatial Compound, is enabled
on the touch screen. Tap the button on the touch screen or use the dial-button to select Low,
Medium, or High for Spatial Compound.
■■SRF (Speckle Reduction Filter)
Turn it on or off by tapping SRF on the touch screen. ‘SRF’ will be displayed in the image data.
SRF stands for Speckle Reduction Filter. It is used to optimize an image by minimizing noise and
adjusting the brightness of boundaries automatically. If it is turned on, SRF Index is enabled on the
touch screen.
4-10
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■SRF Index
Tap SRF Index on the touch screen. Set the SRF index to 1, 2 or 3 by pressing a desired button or
using the dial-button on the touch screen.
NOTE: When SRF is used, the Edge Enhance button is not available.
■■DynamicMR
Turn it on or off by tapping DynamicMR on the touch screen. The ‘DMR’ mark will be displayed in
the image data.
You can obtain a clearer image by eliminating noise and enhancing boundaries. Five pre-configured
indices are provided.
If it is turned on, DMR Index is enabled on the touch screen.
NOTE:
XX
Connect a dongle to the console before using DynamicMR. (Dongles can be purchased
separately from the product.)
XX
For information on installing a dongle, please refer to the DynamicMR User Manual.
■■DMR+Index (Optional)
Tap DMR Index on the touch screen. Select an index between 1 - 5 by tapping a desired button or
using the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Frequency
Tap Frequency on the touch screen.
Use the button to change the frequency of the current probe. Select from Res, Pen and Gen.
XX
Res (Resolution): High frequency
XX
Gen (General): General frequency
XX
Pen (Penetration): Low frequency
The selected frequency is displayed in the title area, allowing you to determine the state of the
current frequency easily.
4-11
Operation Manual
■■Dynamic Range
Press Dynamic Range on the touch screen. Select a Dynamic Range value between 50 - 170 by
tapping a desired button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
Dynamic Range adjusts contrast by changing the ratio of the minimum and maximum values of
input signals. When this value becomes higher, the image is displayed more smoothly.
■■Frame Avg.
When an image is updated, the present image and the previous image are averaged. Tap Frame
Avg on the touch screen. Select a value between 0 and 15 by tapping the button on the touch
screen or using the dial-button. When you scan the same diagnosis site repeatedly, speckles may
appear on the updated image. Frame Avg is used to minimize these speckles.
■■FSI (Full Spectrum Imaging)
Use FSI on the touch screen. Select an FSI value between 1 – 3 by tapping a desired button.
This function synthesizes images with data obtained with frequencies of different characteristics.
Therefore, shallow observation depths yield higher resolution and deep observation depths yield
higher penetration. Tap FSI on the touch screen. Select a value between 1 and 3 by tapping the
button on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
■■Reject Level
Press the Reject Level button on the touch screen. Select a value between 1 - 32 by tapping a
desired button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
This function is used to eliminate noise or low level echo for clearer signals.
■■Gray Map
Tap Gray Map on the touch screen. Select a value between 1 and 13 by tapping the button on the
touch screen or using the dial-button. This changes the 2D Post Curve.
■■M line
NOTE: The M line appears always in the following applications: Cardiac, TCD, and Contrast.
An M line appears on the image. The M line indicates where the observed image is located in the 2D
image when M or PW mode is used together with 2D mode.
Tap M line on the touch screen and select On or Off.
4-12
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■U/D Flip (Up / Down Flip)
Tap the up and down flip icon on the touch screen.
The image flips up and down each time this button is pressed.
■■L/R Flip (Left / Right Flip)
Tap the left and right flip icon on the touch screen.
The image flips left and right each time this button is pressed. The M mark at the top of the image
indicates the present direction of the image.
■■Change Window
NOTE: Change Window is available only in the 2D menu of Dual mode.
Tap Change Window on the touch screen. Each time you tap this button, the position of the image
being scanned is altered to the left or right. The image being scanned is outlined in yellow at the
top of it.
■■Top-Bottom Dual
Tap Top-Bottom Dual on the touch screen. The left and right display is changed to top and bottom
display in Dual mode.
■■View Angle
Tap View Angle on the touch screen. Adjust the image angle by tapping a desired button or using
the dial-button on the touch screen. The button is enabled only when Scan Area is less than 100%.
■■Scan Area
Tap Scan Area on the touch screen. Select the width of an image between 40 and 100 by tapping
a desired button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. Increasing the image width reduces
the frame rate.
NOTE: View Area varies depending on the preset.
4-13
Operation Manual
■■Rotation
Tap Rotation on the touch screen. Rotate image clockwise by pressing the button or rotating the
dial-button on the touch screen. Each rotation rotates image by 90 degrees.
■■2D Image Size
Tap 2D Image Size on the touch screen. Set a 2D image size between 80 – 100 by tapping a desired
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Store Method
Select the Cine image saving type when Save is pressed on the control panel. Select Time, Manual
or Beat by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
XX
Time: The images are saved for the set time. Set the time (in seconds) by tapping the button on
the touch screen or using the dial-button.
XX
Manual: The images are saved from the time when the Save button is pressed first until the
button is pressed again.
XX
ECG Beat: Saves images for the duration of the specified beat. Set the heart beat from 1 – 8 beats.
■■Line Density
Tap Density on the touch screen.
Set the scan line density. Select Middle, High or Low by tapping a desired button. If it is set to High,
the number of scan lines increases, enhancing the image resolution. However, the frame rate is
reduced.
■■Chroma Map
Tap Chroma Map on the touch screen and select On or Off. If On is selected, Chroma Map, which
allows image color setting, is enabled. Select a value between Type 1 and 13 or between User 1 and
3 by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
■■Edge Enhance
Tap Edge Enhance on the touch screen. Select a value between -3 and 3 by tapping a desired
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
NOTE: The Edge Enhance button is enabled when SRF is Off.
4-14
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
This function allows you to view more accurate images of organ or tissue boundaries. A higher
value provides more accurate images of boundaries.
■■Power
Tap Power on the touch screen. Select ultrasound power between 10 – 100 by tapping a desired
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Tissue
Select from Solid, Normal, Adipose or Cystic by tapping a desired on the touch screen.
Low MI
NOTE: Low MI function will be displayed in the 2D menu under following conditions;
XX
Probe: C1-4EC
XX
Application: Contrast
XX
Preset: Perfusion
This function is used to observe tissues with a contrast agent injected.
Tap Low MI in the touch screen to switch to the Low MI screen. The Low MI symbol appears in the
upper right corner of the screen and the Low MI timer appears in the upper left corner of the screen.
Entering Low MI Mode
Tips!
XX
FSI turns off and Pulse Inversion turns on.
XX
Other functions, such as Harmonic and PPI, become disabled.
XX
You cannot switch to other diagnosis modes.
■■Low MI Menu
XX
MI Control: Select the MI value from 1 to 60.
XX
Flash: The image will be displayed brightly for the period of time set in Flash Time.
XX
Flash Time: Set a value between 1 and 10 to specify the period of time for which the Flash
function will operate.
XX
Start / Stop: Start or stop the Low MI timer.
XX
Reset: Reset the Low MI timer.
XX
Chroma: Tap the button to select On or Off. When turned on, the colors of the image displayed
on the screen will be changed arbitrarily. Chroma Map will be enabled in the menu.
4-15
Operation Manual
XX
Chroma Map: Select from Type 1 to Type 13 or from User 1 to User 3. You can change the settings
for the user types in Utility > Post Curve > 2D Post > Pseudo Color. For more information, refer
to ‘Post Curve’ in Chapter 3. “Settings”.
XX
Gray Map: Select from Type 1 to Type 13.
XX
Dynamic Range: Select a value between 50 and 170. This is used to adjust the contrast of the
image by changing the minimum and maximum ratios for input signals.
XX
Reject Level: Select a value between 1 and 32. This is used to eliminate noise and echoes from
the image.
[Figure 4.3 Low MI - Touch Screen]
Panoramic (Optional)
NOTE: The Panoramic function is available only in 2D mode with Linear and Convex probes.
Panoramic Imaging is the function that acquires images over a wider range by using continuous
ultrasonographic images. Up to 500 frames can be used.
■■Acquiring a Panoramic Image
1. Tap Panoramic on the touch screen. The touch screen will be switched to the Panoramic Ready
screen.
2. Tap Start/Stop on the touch screen. The system will begin to acquire a panoramic image.
4-16
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
3. Tap Start/Stop to end acquiring the panoramic image. The touch screen will be switched to the
Panoramic Review screen.
Cautions for Acquiring a Panoramic Image
Tips!
XX
When scanning a curved surface, ensure that the scan surface and the contact surface of the
probe are always at right angles.
XX
Moving in the opposite direction while acquiring an image erases the previous saved frames
and saves new frames.
XX
The image quality may deteriorate if the contact surface of the probe loses contact with the
scan surface.
XX
If the scan speed is fast or the contact surface of the probe changes in angle, artifacts may occur.
[Figure 4.4 Panoramic Ready -Touch Screen]
■■Reviewing a Panoramic Image
NOTE:
XX
You can perform basic measurements using the Caliper button. But other functions on the
control panel are not available.
XX
L/R Flip, U/D Flip, and Magnifying are available only when Layout is set to Full Screen.
4-17
Operation Manual
[Figure 4.5 Panoramic Review -Touch Screen]
XX
L/R Flip: Flip the panoramic image horizontally.
XX
U/D Flip: Flip the panoramic image vertically.
XX
Ruler: Turn the ruler on/off. When turned on, the ruler is displayed on the panoramic image.
XX
Cine Save: Save the panoramic image as a cine image.
XX
Layout: Specify how the panoramic image will be displayed on the screen.
−− Full Screen: Display the panoramic image in full screen mode.
−− Left/Right: Display the 2D and panoramic images at the left and right of the screen,
respectively.
−− Top/Down: Display the 2D and panoramic images at the upper and lower parts of the screen,
respectively.
XX
Rotation: Rotate the panoramic image.
XX
Magnifying: Magnify the panoramic image.
XX
Return: Return to the Panoramic Ready screen.
XX
Exit: Exit Panoramic Imaging.
CAUTION: You can review a panoramic image using a VCR. However, when measuring a
panoramic image using a VCR, the measurement values may not be accurate.
4-18
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
M Mode
The M Mode is used to specify an observation area in a 2D image with the M Line, and display changes
over time.
This mode is appropriate for the observation of organs with a lot of movement such as cardiac valves.
The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area within
the entire image.
[Figure 4.6 M Mode]
Entering & Exiting M Mode
Tap the M/x dial-button on the control panel. Tap this button again. M Mode will be terminated and
the mode switched to 2D.
4-19
Operation Manual
M Mode Screen
■■M Line
Use the trackball on the control panel to move to the right or left. The M Line indicates the relative
position of the M Mode image in the 2D image. Therefore, you can move the M Line to change the
observation area.
M Mode Menu
■■Anatomical M
Pressing Anatomical M on the touch screen changes to Anatomical M mode. In this mode, you can
adjust the length of the M line, and adjust the positions of the M1 and M2 points using the Change
button.
NOTE: This is only supported in Phased Array Probe or Cardiac applications.
■■Sweep Speed
Tap Sweep Speed on the touch screen. Select 60Hz, 120Hz, 180z, 240Hz, 300Hz, or 360Hz by using
the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Negative
Turn it on or off by tapping Negative on the touch screen.
This function inverts the color of M images.
■■Display Format
Tap Display Format on the touch screen. Select between Top/Bottom and Side by Side by tapping
the relevant button on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
NOTE: This function is available only when Utility > Setup > General > Option > M/PW Loop
Side By Side is set to Allow.
■■Loop Size
The Loop Size can be changed to a range of values between 30 and 70 by tapping the relevant
button on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
4-20
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■M Edge Enhance
Tap M Edge Enhance on the touch screen. Select an Edge Enhancement value between -3 and 3 by
tapping a desired button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. Higher values provide more
accurate images of boundaries.
NOTE: For information on other menu items, please refer to 2D Mode.
[Figure 4.7 Touch Screen for M Mode]
4-21
Operation Manual
Color Doppler Mode
This mode displays the colored blood flow pattern of the ROI (Region of Interest) within the 2D image.
It is appropriate for examining the presence of the blood flow, its average speed and direction. The 2D
Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the entire image.
[Figure 4.8 Color Doppler Mode]
Entering & Exiting C Mode
Tap the C dial-button on the control panel. Tap the C button again. C Mode will be terminated and the
mode switched to 2D.
4-22
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
C Mode Screen
■■ROI Box
ROI stands for Region of Interest. The ROI Box outlines the area of the 2D image where color (blood
flow) information is displayed in Color Doppler Mode.
Use the Change button to move and resize the ROI box. Each time you tap the Change button, the
current state of the ROI box is displayed in the lower left of the screen.
XX
ROI Position: In this state, the position of the ROI Box can be changed. Use the trackball to move
and position the ROI Box.
XX
ROI Size: In this state, the size of the ROI Box can be changed. Use the trackball to move the ROI
Box and specify its size.
■■Color Bar
In Color Doppler Mode, the color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. Relative to
the baseline in the centre, the red color indicates the direction and speed of the blood flow towards
a probe. By contrast, the blue color indicates the direction and speed of the blood flow away from
a probe.
XX
Adjusting the color bar baseline: Use the Baseline dial-button on the touch screen. If you rotate
the Baseline dial-button clockwise, the baseline on the color bar rises.
The baseline cannot be adjusted only when the Color Doppler Mode value is set to Variance.
■■Wall Filter
Wall Filter is an electrical filter used to eliminate low-frequency Doppler signals caused by the
motion of vessel walls. Adjust Cutoff Frequency to remove from the screen the Doppler signals for
which the frequencies are lower than the Cutoff Frequency.
Use the Filter dial-button on the control panel. Rotating the Filter dial-button clockwise increases
the Cutoff Frequency for Wall Filter, and rotating it counter-clockwise decreases the Cutoff
Frequency for Wall Filter.
4-23
Operation Manual
C Mode Menu
■■Invert
Tap Invert on the touch screen. The color bar is inverted each time this button is tapped. When the
color bar is inverted, the colors on the image are also inverted.
■■Frequency
Set the probe frequency by tapping Frequency on the touch screen or using the dial-button. Select
Pen or Gen by tapping the button.
XX
Gen (General): General frequency
XX
Pen (Penetration): Low frequency
Since the selected frequency is displayed in the title area, you can easily see the current state of the
frequency.
■■Filter
Select a value between 0 and 3 by tapping Filter on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
This is an electric filter to remove the low-frequency doppler signals generated by the movement
of blood vessel walls. Adjust the Cutoff Frequency to remove doppler signals whose frequency is
lower than the cutoff frequency.
■■Scale (PRF)
Rotate the Scale dial-button on the touch screen. Rotating the Scale dial clockwise makes the PRF
(Pulse Repetition Frequency) increase so that the speed range of the blood flow is widened, and
vice versa.
■■BaseLine
Rotating the dial-button clockwise increases the Baseline.
In Color Doppler mode, the color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. Based on the
Baseline at the middle, red indicates the direction and speed of blood flow toward the probe. By
contrast, blue indicates the direction and speed of blood flow that flows in the opposite direction
of the probe.
■■Steer
NOTE: The Steer function appears on the soft menu only when a linear probe is used.
4-24
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Adjust the angle of the ultrasound beam. Loss of color information resulting from the angle of the
ultrasound beam is minimized. Select Left or Right on the touch screen. Pressing the button again
cancels the selection.
■■Display Mode
Select C mode to use. Select Color + B/W or B/W Only by tapping the button on the screen or using
the dial-button.
■■Color Mode
Sets details of the color display. Select Vel (Velocity) or Vel+Var (Variance) by tapping the button on
the touch screen or using the dial-button. This button is enabled only in Phased Array Probe.
■■Balance
Select a value between 1 and 16 by tapping Balance on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
The range of a color image is adjusted by comparing the gray levels of 2D images with the doppler
signal values of color images. When the Balance value increases, the color image also appears in the
part where the gray level of a 2D image is high (the bright part), increasing the range of the color
image.
■■Color Map
Used to configure the post curve in a color image. You can visually highlight blood flow. Select a
value between 1 and 15 by tapping Color Map on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
■■Sensitivity
Select a value between 8 and 31 by tapping Sensitivity on the touch screen or using the dialbutton.
When this value increases, the sensitivity of a color image improves but the frame rate becomes
lower.
■■Line Density
Select the density of the scan line. Select Low, Middle1, Middle2, or High by tapping the button on
the touch screen or using the dial-button.
Selecting High increases the number of scan lines and improves the image resolution. However, the
frame rate decreases in this case.
4-25
Operation Manual
[Figure 4.9 Touch Screen for Color Doppler Mode]
NOTE: For information on other menu items, please refer to “2D Mode.”
4-26
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Power Doppler Mode
This mode displays the color intensity of blood flow within the ROI in the 2D image.
It is appropriate for examining the presence and amount of blood flow. The 2D Mode image is also shown,
allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the entire image.
[Figure 4.10 Power Doppler Mode]
Entering & Exiting PD Mode
Tap the PD dial-button on the control panel. Tap the button again. PD Mode will be terminated and
the mode switched to 2D.
4-27
Operation Manual
PD Mode Screen
■■Color Bar
In Power Doppler Mode, the color bar varies depending on the screen display for Power Doppler
Mode that is selected in the PD Mode menu.
XX
PD Mode: The color bar indicates the presence of blood flow and its amount. The top of the color
bar is the brightest section, where the amount of blood flow is at its highest.
XX
DPDI Mode: The color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. With the baseline in
the centre, the red color represents the direction and speed of blood flow moving toward the
probe, and the blue color represents the direction and speed of blood flow away from the probe.
■■ROI Box
The ROI (Region of Interest) outlines the area of the 2D image where color (blood flow) information
is displayed in Power Doppler Mode.
PD Mode Menu
■■Invert
Tap Invert on the touch screen. The color bar is inverted each time this button is tapped. When the
color bar is inverted, the colors on the image are also inverted.
NOTE: The Invert button only appears on the touch screen when PD Mode is DPDI.
■■PD Mode
Tap PD Mode on the touch screen. Select the screen layout for Power Doppler Mode by tapping a
desired button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
XX
PD Mode: Shows only the power of the blood flow.
XX
DPDI Mode: Directional Power Doppler Imaging (DPDI) shows the power, velocity and direction
of blood flow.
■■TDI (Tissue Doppler Imaging)
Tap TDI on the touch screen. It changes to TDI mode.
4-28
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
NOTE:
XX
This can be used only when the heart application is selected in Phased Array Probe.
XX
This is also supported in Color Mode.
XX
For more information on TDI, see TDI Mode.
NOTE: Description for touch screen menu items is the same as for Color Doppler Mode.
[Figure 4.11 Touch Screen for Power Doppler Mode]
4-29
Operation Manual
PW Spectral Doppler Mode
PW stands for Pulse Wave. PW Spectral Doppler Mode gives information on the speed of blood flow at
a specific site in the form of a spectral trace and audio signal. Distance (depth) information can also be
obtained by transmitting pulses over time frames.
This mode is useful for measuring low-speed blood flow such as in the abdomen and peripheral vessels.
The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area within
the entire image.
[Figure 4.12 PW Spectral Doppler Mode]
4-30
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Entering & Exiting PW Spectral Doppler Mode
Press the PW/y dial-button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D Mode.
Press the Set button on the control panel to obtain a spectral doppler image.
NOTE:
XX
The doppler image can be obtained only in D Only or Simultaneous state.
XX
When the M Line is enabled, you can instantly get a spectral doppler image in PW mode.
PW Spectral Doppler Mode Screen
■■Sample Volume
The doppler spectrum is displayed when the Sample Volume is located above the blood flow on the
2D image . The size and depth of Sample volume is displayed in [mm] units. Its position is moved
with the Trackball and displayed in the xx.xx@yy.yy mm format. The format means that a Sample
Volume of ‘xx.xx’ mm size is located at a depth of ‘yy.yy’ mm. For example, 2.00@16.70 mm means
that a Sample Volume of 2.00mm size is located at a depth of 16.07mm.
XX
Moving Sample Volume: Use the Trackball on the control panel.
XX
Resizing Sample Volume
On the control panel: After pressing the Change button on the control panel, adjust the size of
the sample volume by using the trackball. Press the Change button again to return to the Sample
Volume Position Control screen.
On the touch screen: Tap SV Size on the touch screen. Select a value between 0.5 - 15 by tapping a
desired button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
XX
Adjusting Sample Volume Angle: Select a value between -70 and 70° by rotating the Angle dialbutton on the control panel. Select –60°, 0° or 60° by pressing the Angle dial-button.
■■Adjusting Doppler Baseline
Adjust Baseline by rotating the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■HPRF (High PRF) Function
Adjust the blood flow above the speed limit at a specific depth. This increases the scale. This function
is available only in PW Spectral Doppler Mode (D Only).
4-31
Operation Manual
XX
Activating HPRF
To activate HPRF, increase the Scale values at the required depth. A The Phantom Gate will
appear on the D Line at a position higher than the sample volume. Once HPRF starts, PRF does
not increase even if you increase the scale value.
XX
Finishing HPRF
While HPRF is in use, decrease the scale value by one step to finish HPRF. The maximum PRF
values in PW Spectral Doppler Mode are shown.
XX
Moving Sample Volume
To move the Sample Volume position in the D Only state, the system calculates PRF values and
the Phantom Gate position, and updates them on the PW Spectral Doppler image. HPRF is
terminated when HPRF cannot be activated.
When Sample Volume is moved in the 2D Only state, the PRF values don’t change.
NOTE: HPRF is not activated in Simultaneous Mode. This is set in [Utility] > [General] > [Scan
Mode] > [Simultaneous]. It is also not activated if [PRF*2] exceeds 23KHz.
CAUTION:
XX
The Phantom Gate position can be located outside the 2D image area in Zoom Mode.
XX
Make sure that sample volume and Phantom Gate are not placed together in the measuring
area. If more than two Sample Volumes are located in the vessels, all Doppler components will
appear in the spectrum, causing noise.
4-32
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
PW Spectral Doppler Mode Menu
[Figure 4.13 PW Spectral Doppler Mode]
■■Simultaneous
Tap Simultaneous on the touch screen. Each time you tap the button, the Simultaneous function
turns on and off.
NOTE: It appears in the PW menu only when “Utility > Setup > General > Simultaneous Mode” is
set to Allow.
4-33
Operation Manual
If the Simultaneous function is enabled, you can view the 2D image and Spectral Doppler image
simultaneously in real time. If it is disabled, you can view only one of the two images.
The Simultaneous function decreases Doppler PRF, thus decreasing the measurable speed range.
■■Invert
Tap Invert on the touch screen.
Each time the button is pressed, the speed indicator (+ / –) for a spectrum is inverted.
■■Sound
Adjusts the doppler volume. Select a value between 0 and 100 by tapping the button or rotating
the dial-button.
■■Mean Trace
Tap Mean Trace on the touch screen. Mean Trace for the selected spectrum is performed.
■■Auto Clac
Turn it on or off by pressing Auto Clac on the touch screen.
If it is turned on, Doppler Trace is performed and its results are displayed. . The values selected from
Setup > AutoCalc are displayed on the screen. You can select up to six values. If it is turned on, the
Mean Trace button is enabled.
For information on setting display values, please refer to Chapter 7, “Utility.”
CAUTION: The measurements done by Auto Trace under Measure and Real Time Automatic
Doppler Trace (Automatic Calculator) may be different from each other. This is because the
algorithms for these two methods are different. It is recommended to use Auto Trace under
Measure for more accurate measurement.
4-34
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Things to Consider for Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace
Tips!
1. Aliasing occurs because PRF is too low in comparison to the image speed, or the spectrum is
clustered around the baseline because PRF is too high.
2. Peak is indistinctive or intermittent such as in Spectral waveforms for veins.
3. Meaningful spectrum distinction becomes difficult because Doppler Gain is set too high or too
low.
4. An index is displayed during the transition time after Sample Volume is moved with the Trackball.
5. The major spectral signals are cut off because Doppler Wall Filter is set too high.
6. Peak Trace is interrupted due to abnormal Doppler noise or artifact, and the heart rate is above
approximately 140 bpm.
The trace and/or results of Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace may not be accurate in the above
situations. Furthermore, during auto calculation, results will not be displayed if the Freeze function
is run against inaccurate values.
■■AutoCalc Direction
Tap AutoCalc Direction on the touch screen. Select the part of spectrum to use AutoCalc from All,
Up or Down.
■■TDW (Tissue Doppler Wave Mode)
Tap TDW on the touch screen. The system will switch to TDW Mode.
NOTE:
XX
This option is available only when the cardiac application is selected for a Phased Array probe.
XX
For information on TDW, please refer to “Tissue Doppler Wave Mode.”
■■Spectrum Enhancement
Tap Spectrum Ehn. on the touch screen. This function controls brightness and sensitivity of Spectral
Doppler images. You can select a value between 1-4.
■■Spectrum Type
Tap Spectrum Type on the touch screen. Select the spectrum type from Type 1 – 3.
NOTE: Description for touch screen menu items is the same as for Color Doppler Mode.
4-35
Operation Manual
CW Spectral Doppler Mode
CW stands for Continuous Wave. PW Spectral Doppler Mode gives information on the speed/direction of
blood flow at a specific site in the form of a spectral trace and audio signal. Unlike PW Spectral Doppler
Mode, it does not provide Sample Volume.
[Figure 4.14 CW Spectral Doppler Mode]
■■Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode
This mode is available with a Phase Array Probe only.
The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an observation area
within the entire image.
■■Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode
This mode is available with a Static CW Probe only.
The 2D image is not displayed.
4-36
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Entering & Exiting CW Spectral Doppler Mode
Press the CW/Ref. Slice button on the control panel. Press it again to return to 2D Mode.
NOTE: The information on menu and Flexible Soft menu items for PW Spectral Doppler Mode
also applies to this mode.
[Figure 4.15 Touch Screen for CW Spectral Doppler Mode]
4-37
Operation Manual
TDI Mode
TDI stands for Tissue Doppler Imaging. TDI mode represents movements of tissues such as a heart.TDI
Mode is available in Color Doppler or Power Doppler Mode. In Color Doppler or Power Doppler Mode,
TDI shows cardiac tissues in color.
[Figure 4.16 Tissue Dopple Imaging Mode]
Entering & Exiting TDI Mode
Press the TDI button in C or PD mode to enter TDI mode. Press the button again to exit TDI mode and
enter C or PD mode.
NOTE:
XX
This function can be used only with Phased Array Probe and cardiac application.
XX
For descriptions of other items on the soft menu, see PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
4-38
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
TDW Mode
TDW stands for Tissue Doppler Wave. TDW mode represents movements of tissues such as a heart. TDW
Mode is available in PW or CW Spectral Doppler Mode. If it is used in Spectral Doppler Mode along with
Color Doppler or Power Doppler Mode, changes in cardiac tissues over time can be observed.
[Figure 4.17 TDW Mode]
Entering & Exiting TDW Mode
Press the PW/y dial-button in TDI mode to enter TDW mode. Or tap the TDW button on the touch
screen in PW Spectral mode.
NOTE:
XX
This function can be used only with Phased Array Probe and cardiac application.
XX
For descriptions of other items on the soft menu, see PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
4-39
Operation Manual
ElastoScan Mode
The elasticity of ROI in a 2D image is shown in color. A scanned 2D image is also displayed to indicate the
relative position of ROI and allow the user to change the position.
NOTE:
XX
ElastoScan Mode is an option for this product.
XX
The probes that can use the ElastoScan Mode are as follows:
L5-13IS (Breast), LF5-12 (Breast), and VR5-9(Urology-Prostate / Gynecology)
ElastoScan
Tips!
This process converts the elastic modulus (ultrasound image data) of a target object, obtained from continuous
ultrasound images, into an elastogram. A lesion's location can be estimated by comparing the differences in
elastic modulus obtained from elastograms. The function of elastography is to determine the difference in
hardness or stiffness between healthy organs and lesions. Palpation has been used to measure stiffness, but this
method is only useful at depths close to the tissue surface. ElastoScan allows the user to identify the existence
of solid masses in tissue, and converts the hardness data into an image by sonically enhancing the palpation.
Elastography shows the spatial distribution of tissue elasticity properties in a region of interest by estimating the
strain before and after tissue distortion caused by external or internal forces. Quantitative elastography is not
provided.
4-40
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Entering and Exiting E Mode
Tap ElastoScan on the touch screen..
NOTE: You can exit E Mode by pressing the 2D dial-button on the control panel.
E Mode Screen
■■E Dual Mode
[Figure 4.18 E Dual Mode]
In E Dual Mode, an E image, elastogram, and a 2D image are displayed together in the screen. Tap
Single / Dual on the touch screen to select either Single or Dual Mode.
To facilitate comparative observation, the 2D image is shown on the left and an E image is shown
on the right.
4-41
Operation Manual
■■E Single Mode
In E Single Mode, only an E image is displayed in the screen. Tap Single / Dual on the touch screen
to select either Single or Dual Mode.
[Figure 4.19 E Single Mode]
■■ROI Mode
ROI stands for Region of Interest. In E Mode, the ROI Box represents the area where elasticity
information is shown. Tap ROI Mode on the touch screen to enter or exit ROI Mode.
The position and size of the ROI Box can be adjusted by using the Change button on the control
panel. Each time the Change button is pressed, the current status of the ROI Box is shown in the
lower left corner of the screen.
XX
E ROI Pos.: The position of the ROI Box can be changed. Move the ROI Box with the Trackball to
confirm the new position.
XX
E ROI Size: The size of the ROI Box can be changed. Resize the ROI Box with the Trackball and
press the Change button to confirm the new size.
4-42
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
[Figure 4.20 ROI Mode]
NOTE: ROI Mode is available in E Single Mode as well as in E Dual Mode.
Scanning
When using ElastoScan, place a probe onto the surface of an area to observe and apply periodic
compression to it. The compression should be adjusted so that the strain stays within 3 - 5 %.
■■Breast
A breast is a complex organ that consists of latecomer, laticifer, glandular mammaria, fatty tissues,
fibrous tissues and chest muscles. Moving a probe along vertically causes unintended movements
of the tissues. To observe a lesion in ElastoScan Mode (E Mode), it is recommended to minimize
lateral or other directional movements including vertical movement of tissues along the axis.
4-43
Operation Manual
The following figure shows a scanned image of a breast tumor.
(a) 2D Mode
(b) ElastoScan Mode
[Figure 4.21 A scanned image of a breast tumor]
■■Prostate
The prostate consists of tissues simpler than a breast, and there are relatively less unintended
movements.
The following figure shows an image of the prostate with a tumor.
(a) 2D Mode
(b) ElastoScan Mode
[Figure 4.22 An image of the prostate with a tumor]
4-44
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Screen Layout
■■Color Bar
In E Mode, the color bar indicates the stiffness of a tissue. Regardless of the color, the lower section
of the bar indicates that the target area is stiffer than the surrounding tissues, and the upper section
indicates that the target area is less stiff than the surrounding tissues.
E Mode menu
[Figure 4.23 Touch screen for E Mode]
■■Invert Color Map
Tapping the button reverses the color bar. Inverting the color bar also inverts the color displayed
on the image.
■■Alpha Blending
Tapping the button enables or disables Alpha Blending.
Alpha Blending blends 2D and E images so that they appear to overlap with each other. Use
Blending Level to adjust the blending ratio.
■■E Gain
Adjust the brightness of E image between 1 - 100%.
4-45
Operation Manual
■■Contrast
Select the contrast for an E image between 1 – 100%.
■■Enhancement
Control brightness and sensitivity of E image between 1 – 100%. A higher value provides more
accurate images of boundaries. However noise may increase according to the value.
■■Color Map Index
Select the color for an E image between Type 1 - Type 5. Changing the color map also change the
color bar.
■■Blending Level
Select the ratio of Alpha Blending. You can adjust the ratio in 5% steps between 0 - 100%. Setting it
to 0% shows an E image only and setting it to 100% shows a 2D image only.
■■Persistence Level
Specify the change speed of frame between frames. You can adjust the ratio in 5% steps between
0 – 100%. If you set a higher value, the image applies the previous frame much more.
NOTE:
XX
The Following are not available or have limit to use in E mode;
−−Not available functions: Angle, Scan Area, ECG, Histogram.
−−Available only one Focus.
−−Available Biopsy On and Off only.
−−2D measurements, including measurement of distance, circumference and area, are available
only.
XX
If you press the Dual or Quad button in E mode, it will terminate E mode and enter to 2D
mode..
4-46
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Combined Mode
In Combined Mode, three different modes are combined including the default 2D Mode. Note that, in
2D/C Live Mode, only two modes are combined: 2D and Color Doppler Modes.
2D/C/PW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the PW/y dial-button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler
Mode, press the Color/z dial-button on the control panel.
2D/PD/PW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Power Doppler Mode, press the PW/y dial-button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler
Mode, press the PD dial-button on the control panel.
2D/C/CW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. This mode is available
only with certain probes.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the CW/Ref. Slice dial-button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral
Doppler Mode, press the Color/z dial-button on the control panel.
2D/PD/CW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. This mode is available
only with certain probes.
In Power Doppler Mode, press the CW/Ref. Slice dial-button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral
Doppler Mode, press the PD dial-button on the control panel.
4-47
Operation Manual
2D/C/M Mode
Color Doppler Mode and M Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the M/x dial-button on the control panel. Or, in M Mode, press the Color/z
dial-button on the control panel. (This button is enabled for specific diagnostic applications with specific
probes only.)
2D/C Live Mode
2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. Press 2D/C Live in the 2D menu.
2D/TDI/TDW
TDI Mode and TDW Mode are displayed simultaneously. Tap TDI on the touch screen in PD mode and
then press the PW/y dial-button.
Changing Combined Mode Format
■■Changing the active image mode
Press the Set button on the control panel. The current active image mode - ‘D Only’ or ‘2D Only’ - is
displayed above the menu on the screen.
In Combined Mode, more than two image modes are used at the same time. The image mode
currently in use is called ‘Active Image Mode.’ For example, if Sample Volume is moved with the
Trackball in 2D/C/PW Mode, PW Spectral Doppler Mode becomes the current active image mode.
Because the menu and button options vary depending on the active image mode, use the Set
button change the active image mode.
Note that the active image mode cannot be changed with the Set button when the Freeze function
is in effect.
4-48
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■Changing menu
Press the Change Menu button on the control panel.
You can change the menu and touch screen menu items without changing the active image mode.
Buttons for the active image mode appear on the control panel.
For example, when the touch screen menu for 2D mode is displayed on the screen in 2D/C/PW
mode, you can select another mode on the touch screen menu to switch to it.
NOTE: For information on optimizing an image in Combined Mode, please refer to “Basic Mode.”
4-49
Operation Manual
Multi-Image Mode
The product supports Dual Mode and Quad Mode.
In Multi-Image Mode, an image can be displayed in different combined modes. Button operations in an
active area are the same as in Combined Mode.
Dual Mode
Press the Dual button on the touch screen.
You can compare two different images at the same time. Each time you press the Dual button, one of the
two images is selected. The current active image mode is displayed as a yellow line at the top. Button and
menu items for the current image mode are displayed.
Press the Single or 2D button on the touch screen to exit Dual Mode.
[Figure 4.24 Dual mode]
4-50
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Quad Mode
Press the Quad button on the touch screen.
You can compare four different images at the same time. Each time you press the Quad button, one of
the four images is selected. The current active image mode is displayed as a yellow line at the top. Button
and menu items for the current image mode are displayed.
Press the Single or 2D button on the touch screen to exit Quad Mode.
[Figure 4.25 Quad mode]
NOTE: For information on optimizing an image in Multi-Image Mode, please refer to “Basic Mode.”
4-51
Operation Manual
3D/4D Mode
These modes show 3D images of the region being examined. The ACCUVIX XG provides 3D Mode and
4D Mode (optional).
NOTE:
XX
Standard probes cannot be used for 3D/4D Modes.
XX
This manual has been prepared based on the 3D MXI Upgrade..
Entering and Exiting 3D/4D Mode
Press the 3D/4D button on the control panel. Press it again to exit 3D/4D Mode and return to 2D Mode.
3D/4D Mode Screen
■■ROI Box
In 3D/4D Mode, the ROI box is also called the volume box, which shows an area to be converted
into a 3D/4D image.
You can adjust the position and size of the ROI box by using the Change button on the control
panel. Each time the Change button is pressed, the state of the ROI box is displayed in the lower
middle part of the screen as follows:
XX
ROI Position: In this state, the position of the ROI box can be changed. You can move the ROI box
using the trackball.
XX
ROI Size: In this state, the size of the ROI box can be changed. After resizing the ROI box with the
trackball, press the Change button to confirm the new size.
4-52
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
3D Mode
You can get 3D images using a 3D probe. This product provides 3D Mode and XI STIC.
[Figure 4.26 3D Mode]
■■3D
In this mode, you can get 3D images using a 3D probe.
■■XI STIC (Optional)
In this mode, fetal cardiac cycle and STIC volume data can be obtained with 3D probes. For more
information, please refer to “XI STIC” in this chapter.'
NOTE: XI STIC is an optional feature of this product.
4-53
Operation Manual
Color 3D Mode
Tips!
With the ACCUVIX XG, 3D Mode can be used in combination with Color Doppler or Power Doppler
Mode.
XX
3D/C Mode: Press the 3D/4D button in Color Doppler Mode. Along with a 3D image of the
observation area, the speed and direction of blood flow will be shown in color.
XX
3D/PD Mode: Press the 3D/4D button in Power Doppler Mode. Along with a 3D image of the
observation area, the presence and amount of blood flow will be shown in color.
4D Mode (Optional)
In 4D Mode, 3D images can be obtained in real time with 3D probes. This mode is also called Live 3D
Mode.
NOTE: 4D Mode is an optional feature of this product.
[Figure 4.27 4D Mode]
4-54
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Acquiring 3D/4D Images
1. Specify the location and size of the ROI Box as desired.
2. Set the required parameters in the 3D Stand By screen on the touch screen.
XX
After selecting the menu tab for 3D/4D Modes, select View Mode à Rendering Preset à Userset
à the desired item.
3. Press the Freeze or Set button on the control panel. The system will start acquiring 3D images.
4. Once 3D images are acquired, the 3D View or 3D XI screen is displayed. The 3D View or 3D XI
indication appears in the upper left corner of the screen.
XX
If a horizontally-reversed 3D image is obtained, the image will also be shown horizontallyreversed in 3D View or 3D XI.
5. Optimize the acquired images as needed for diagnosis. Press the 3D/4D button to acquire 3D
images again.
How to Improve 3D Image Quality
Tips!
Consider the direction, size and section of the viewpoint as well as the visibility of an object.
XX
Before acquiring 3D images, adjust the contrast in 2D Mode.
XX
The bigger the ROI box, the slower the rendering speed. Therefore, set an appropriate ROI box
size.
XX
To see the 3D image of a fetus in frontal view, position the fetal head in the direction of the
Direction Mark, putting it in the coronal plane. Then scan the fetus from back to abdomen.
XX
The 3D image of a fetal face can be more easily located in the coronal plane than in the Sagittal
plane.
XX
To determine surface contour, subjects such as amniotic fluid that do not generate echoes
should be insulated with hypo-echoic textures.
XX
To obtain a high quality 3D surface, adjust the Low Threshold value. The general rule is not to
adjust High Threshold; set it to the maximum value of 255.
NOTE: You can cancel a scan job by pressing the Exit button.
4-55
Operation Manual
3D Stand By
This screen is displayed on the touch screen when 3D/4D Modes are entered. Set the required parameters
to specify how 3D images are acquired.
[Figure 4.28 3D Stand By – Touch Screen]
Menu Tab
Select a tab for 3D/4D Modes. The tabs that are enabled on the touch screen vary depending on the
probe being used and whether Color 3D Mode is enabled.
XX
In Color 3D Mode, only the 3D or XI STIC tab is enabled.
Adjusting 2D Images in 3D/4D Modes
Tips!
Click the 2D Menu tab on the touch screen to optimize a 2D image before acquiring the
corresponding 3D image.
Once the 2D image is optimized, click 3D Menu on the touch screen to return to 3D Stand By Mode.
View Mode
Select a view mode to use after 3D images are acquired.
■■3D View
The standard view mode for 3D image review. Tap MPR on the touch screen to select this view
mode.
4-56
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■3D XI (Optional)
NOTE: 3D XI is an optional feature of this product.
The view mode for 3D XI image review. Select either MSV or Oblique View. For more information,
please refer to “3D XI Mode.”
Rendering preset
Specify how 3D images are presented in a view mode. For more information, please refer to “Display
Format” under “3D View-MPR Mode.”
Auto ROI
NOTE: Auto ROI is available only under the OB application.
Tap the button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the ROI box will be automatically
placed in the area that will be converted to a 3D image.
When Auto ROI is used, the following should be taken into account:
XX
Only images of the fetal body can be acquired.
XX
Once Auto ROI is turned on, the position or size of the ROI box cannot be changed.
XX
It is affected by the brightness or contrast of 2D images.
XX
It is not available in Color 3D Mode.
4-57
Operation Manual
ROI Curve
Adjust the curve for the ROI Line to select the rendered area.
NOTE:
XX
ROI Curve is available only under the OB application.
XX
ROI Curve is not available in XI STIC.
NOTE: For more information, refer to ‘ROI Curve’ in the ‘3D View-MPR Mode’ section.
Scan Quality
NOTE: Scan Quality is not available under the XI STIC menu tab.
Selects the quality of 3D images. Tap the touch screen or use dial-button to select Low, Medium 1,
Medium 2, High, or Extreme.
XX
Extreme: Provides superior image quality. Use for studying a highly detailed image.
XX
High: Provides higher 3D image capturing (or rendering) speed than Extreme setting, at the
expense of image quality.
XX
Middle 1, 2: Provides better image capturing speed and lower image quality than High setting.
XX
Low: Provides the highest 3D image capturing speed and the lowest image quality.
Scan Angle
Set the scan angle by tapping the touch screen or using the dial-button. The setting range varies by
the selected probe.
NOTE:
XX
In XI STIC, set the scan angle between 15˚and 60˚.
XX
In NT preset, set the scan angle between 40° and 50°.
4-58
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Scan Time
Set the image acquisition time. Select a value between 7s and 15s by tapping the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. This button is enabled in XI STIC only.
NOTE: For more information, please refer to “XI STIC.”
Trimester
Set the pregnancy trimester. Select from 1st, 2nd and 3rd by tapping the corresponding button or using
the dial-button on the touch screen. This button is enabled in XI STIC only.
NOTE: For more information, please refer to “XI STIC.”
4-59
Operation Manual
3D View - MPR
This view mode is enabled upon acquisition of images when MPR is selected in 3D Stand By. The 3D
View indication appears in the upper left corner of the screen, and 3D images are displayed in MPR.
You can optimize 3D images, perform diagnosis, and take measurements.
Changing View Mode
Tips!
Select the 3D Menu tab on the touch screen to change the view mode.
The Basics of 3D View Mode
■■Screen Layout
1
2
3
4
5
6
[Figure 4.29 3D View]
4-60
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Item
Descriptions
1
In MPR Mode, Mix, Threshold Low, Render Direction, and Render Mode 1, 2 are displayed together with the
present mode in the 3D image information.
3D Image Information: The present 3D mode and image information are displayed on the monitor. You can
switch the display on or off by pressing the spacebar of the keyboard.
2
A Plane: Image of Axial Section.
3
B Plane: Image of Sagittal Section.
4
C Plane: Image of Coronal Section.
5
3D Image
6
Trackball status indication: The current status of the trackball appears at the bottom of the screen. Select from
Pointer, Move or ROI to access the desired trackball functions. Press the Change button on the control panel
to change the trackball status. Each time the button is pressed, the trackball status is toggled.
−− Move: Move a 3D image with the trackball. The acquired 3D image is moved around based on the trackball
movements.
−− ROI: Resize the ROI box with the trackball. The size of the ROI box over a 3D image is changed based on
the trackball movements.
−− Pointer: Reposition the ROI Box. Pressing the Pointer button on the control panel switches to Pointer
state. You can rotate the ROI box around the image axis by using the pointer while pressing the Set
button. Press the Change button again to switch to another state.
■■Touch Screen Layout
Only those buttons that are available in the current mode are enabled.
u
v
[Figure 4.30 3D View Menu]
4-61
Operation Manual
Item
Descriptions
1
3D Menu
2
3D Utility Menu: This menu appears vertically at the right side of the touch screen. You can move to another
page using the Previous and Next buttons above the Utility Menu.
■■Post Gain
Works independently from 2D Gain, with a separate value. The initial value is 0, but this value can be
set to any value from -256 to 256. In 4D mode, Post Gain works during Freeze.
■■Zooming In/Out Image
Turn the Zoom dial-button on the control panel to zoom in/out images. The current zoom factor
appears in the left side of the screen.
■■TB
Use the TB dial-button on the control panel. It adjusts top and bottom margins of ROI.
NOTE: The same dial-button is used for TB and Focus.
It works as TB in 3D mode and Focus as in scan mode.
■■Lt Rt
Use the Lt Rt dial-button on the control panel. It adjusts side margins of ROI.
NOTE: The same dial-button is used for Lt Rt and Depth.
It works as Lt Rt in 3D mode and as Depth in scan mode.
■■Ref. Slice
Use the Ref. Slice dial-button on the control panel. It moves the Reference Slice to left and right in
parallel.
NOTE: The same dial-button is used for Ref. Slice and CW.
It works as Ref. Slice in 3D mode and as CW in Scan mode.
4-62
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■Niche Zoom
NOTE: This option is available with VCT.
Press the Zoom dial-button on the control panel to use Niche Zoom. Turn the dial-button to zoom
in/out VCT images. The current niche zoom factor appears in the left side of the screen.
■■Rotating Image by X-axis
Use the M / x dial-button on the control panel.
■■Rotating Image by Y-axis
Use the PW / y dial-button on the control panel.
■■Rotating Image by Z-axis
Use the Color / z dial-button on the control panel.
■■Measurements by Application:
NOTE:
XX
Measurements can be taken only for images in MPR, MSV or 4D Mode.
XX
Only the SONOVIEW, Patient, Report, Indicator, and Text buttons are available during
measurement.
Press the Calculator button on the control panel. For information on taking measurements, please
refer to “Calculations by Applications” in Chapter 5 “Measurements and Calculations.”
■■Basic Measurement
Press the Caliper button on the control panel. For more information, please refer to “Basic
Measurements” in Chapter 5 “Measurements and Calculation.”
■■Entering Text
Press the Annotation button on the touch screen. If Quick Text is enabled, pressing any key on the
keyboard switches to Annotation Mode. For more information, please refer to “Text” in Chapter 6
“Image Management.”
4-63
Operation Manual
■■Entering Indicator
Tap Annotation on the touch screen and then press a button for which Indicator can be set.
For more information, please refer to “Indicator” in Chapter 6 “Image Management.”
NOTE: In all modes, measurement functions such as Calculator and Caliper cannot be used, but
such functions as Text and Indicator can be used.
■■Saving Image
NOTE: If volume data contains both 4D and 3D Cine images, choose either 4D or 3D for saving.
1. Press the Save button on the control panel. 3D Data Save screen is displayed on the touch screen.
2. Specify settings such as Data Type, Save Item, and Volume Format.
3. Tap Save on the touch screen to save it. Or tap Cancel to cancel it.
Volume Data
Tips!
1. If volume data contains a Cine image, it is saved at the same time.
2. If images are saved with volume data, they can be converted to new 3D rendering images with
SONOVIEW.
[Figure 4.31 3D Data Save]
4-64
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■Printing Image
Press the Print 1 or Print 2 buttons on the control panel.
Mode
Select the display format in which 3D images are presented.
■■3D / 4D
Axial, Sagittal, or Coronal plane images are displayed together with the 3D image.
■■2D
Axial, Sagittal and Coronal plane images, along with OH (Orientation Help), are displayed on the
screen. OH indicates the relative position of the currently selected plane in regard to volume data.
Tips!
Click Single on the touch screen for a more detailed view.
■■VCT
Axial, Sagittal and Coronal plane images and combinations of them are displayed. Each plane is
displayed with a different colored frame. VCT is an abbreviation for Volume CT.
■■Accept ROI
NOTE: This option is available only in 3D/4D or Mirror View.
Click the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, ROI will not be displayed.
Display Format
You can change the display format using the touch screen. The display format varies for each mode.
XX
Single: Switches to Full screen.
XX
Dual: Switches to 2D/3D screen.
XX
Quad: Switches to ROI 3D screen.
4-65
Operation Manual
NOTE: In 2D or VCT mode, only Single or Quad Format can be used.
Ref. Image
Select a reference image from A, B or C by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen. The
selected image will be highlighted with orange borders.
XX
A: Axial Section
XX
B: Sagittal Section
XX
C: Coronal Section
■■OH (Orientation Help)
NOTE: This option is available in 2D or 3D/4D.
Click the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, a 3D image will be displayed along with
OH.
3D Rotation
NOTE: 3D Rotation, Mix, Th.Low, and Transparency are available in 3D/4D mode.
Select -90˚, 90˚, or 180˚by tapping the button on the screen. The coordinate system rotates based on
the current 3D image.
FAD (Fetal Face Auto Detection)
Automatically detects the face of the fetus and removes the images of any limbs that obscure the face.
Init
When you tap the touch screen, the position information of the 3D image is initialized.
4-66
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Mix
Set a combination of Render Modes 1 and 2. Select a value between 0:100(%) and 100:0(%) by clicking
the corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
NOTE: For information on rendering modes, please refer to Render Setup in 3D Utility Menu.
Th.Low
Specify the minimum range of threshold. Select a value between 0 and 254 by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
Threshold
Tips!
This option allows you to adjust the threshold value in order to eliminate unnecessary data from
images. As the number increases, cyst elements become more apparent. As the number decreases,
bone elements become more apparent.
Select
Select Post Curve. Select from 2D or 3D by clicking the corresponding button or using the dial-button
on the touch screen.
NOTE: In the case of Mirror View, the Select function is enabled only in Color 3D mode.
Position
Set the position of the post curve selected under Select. Select a value between 0 and 100 by clicking
the corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
4-67
Operation Manual
Bias
Set the bias of the post curve selected under Select. Select a value between -100 and 100 by clicking
the corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
Tips!
Initializing Post Curve
Double-clicking a post curve when the trackball is in Pointer mode initializes the curve.
Transparency
Set the transparency of a 3D image. Select a value between 20 and 250 by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
The lowest value (20) is for complete transparency, and the highest value (250) is for complete opacity.
DynamicMR (Option)
Removes the noise in images and intensifies boundary lines to make images more vivid. Five predefined
indexes are available.
In On state, DMR Index is enabled on the touch screen.
NOTE: For more information on DynamicMR and DMR Index, refer to the 2D Mode Menu in this
Chapter.
HDVI (Option)
Filters 3D images to express outlines more vividly and improve images. Five predefined indexes are
available.
HDVI Index
Tap HDVI Index on the touch screen. Select an index between 1 and 5 by tapping the button on the
touch screen or using the dial-button.
4-68
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
HDVI Type
You can choose the measurement site from among Face, Brain, Early OB, Heart, Spine, Gyn, Breast,
Thyroid, Carotid, Abdomen, and Kidney by tapping the button on the touch screen to adjust the image.
NOTE: The DMR and HDVI options are enabled in MPR, MSV, or Oblique View mode.
NOTE: The following 3D Utility Menu items are enabled in MPR mode: Mirror View, 3D Cine, 4D
Cine, Auto Contour, Contour Edit, Volume Slice, NTD, Post Processing, Render Setup, Preset, and
Chroma.
For more information on 3D Utility, see 3D Utility Menu.
ROI Curve
NOTE:
XX
Cannot be used with OH (Orientation Help) turned on.
XX
Supported when Render Direction is set to C+.
XX
Supported only in Quad Mode.
Adjust the curve for the ROI Line to select the rendered area. You can select settings for the ROI Line by
tapping Contour Type on the touch screen.
4-69
Operation Manual
[Figure 4.32 ROI Curve]
[Figure 4.33 ROI Curve- Touch Screen]
4-70
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
VOCAL
Measure the volume of tissues within the human body. VOCAL is an abbreviation for Virtual Organ
Computer Aided anaLysis.
VOCAL can be performed in the following order: VOCAL Define → VOCAL Edit → VOCAL.
[Figure 4.34 VOCAL]
4-71
Operation Manual
VOCAL Define
Specify the settings required for VOCAL execution. Information on the current mode, contour type and
reference angle is displayed in the 3D image information area.
[Figure 4.35 VOCAL Define Image Information]
Contour Type
Select the contour line type. A contour line is automatically created for all types but Manual.
■■Solid
Used for object data with many echoes.
■■General
Draw a contour line based on a typical object. It is faster than other automatic contour types but
less accurate.
■■Prostate
Used for prostate data.
■■Cystic
Used for object data with fewer echoes.
■■Sphere
After creating a spherical object, edit its contour to make it into the desired shape.
■■Manual
Create the desired shape of an object manually.
4-72
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Ref. Image
Select a reference image from A, B or C by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen. The
selected image will be highlighted with orange borders.
Step Angle
Set the reference angle. Select from 12, 18 or 30 by clicking the corresponding button on the touch
screen.
Pole Point Move Using Trackball
Set the range to perform VOCAL in a reference image. In a reference image, Pole 1 indicates the
position of the upper arrow and Pole 2 indicates the position of the lower arrow.
Click Pole1 and Pole2 on the touch screen, and then use the trackball and the Set button on the
control panel.
Or, click None and then use the dial-button on the touch screen.
Init
Click the touch screen to initialize the position of a 3D image.
Start
Click the touch screen to begin creation of VOCAL data.
When Contour Type is set to Manual
Tips!
1. Tap Start on the touch screen. The Image Position screen will be displayed on the touch screen.
2. After pressing the Set button over an image, move the trackball to contour.
XX
Tap Next to move the next frame.
XX
Tap Previous to move the previous frame.
3. Tap Done on the touch screen. Start VOCAL.
XX
If you tap Done without contouring, VOCAL is performed over a sphere.
4-73
Operation Manual
[Figure 4.36 VOCAL Define – Touch Screen]
VOCAL Edit
Once VOCAL data is created, volume information will be displayed on the screen. In VOCAL Edit Mode,
you can modify or redo the existing contour lines.
Information on the current mode, shell mode, the current frame number / the total number of frames is
displayed in the 3D image information area.
[Figure 4.37 VOCAL Edit Image Information]
Shell Mode
Set the shell of an object based on its contour line.
■■Off
Do not use Shell Mode. The created contour and the shell overlap.
■■Inside
Shell is drawn inside the contour generated by the Shell Thick. specified.
4-74
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■Outside
Shell is drawn outside the contour generated by the Shell Thick. specified.
■■Symmetric
Half the shell is drawn inside the contour and the other half of the shell is drawn outside the contour
respectively, by half the Shell Thick. specified.
Shell Thick.
Set the shell thickness of an object. Select a value between 1 and 20mm by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. This option appears on the touch screen only
when Shell Mode is used.
Image Position
Review contour lines for each frame. Use Previous and Next to move through frames.
Multi Edit
Modify more than one contour line at once. Tap the corresponding button on the touch screen to
turn it on or off. If it is turned on, up to 6 contour lines can be displayed simultaneously on the screen.
When there are more than 6 lines, use the MEV Page dial-button to navigate through pages. MEV is an
abbreviation for Multi Edit View.
Use Pole 1 and Pole 2 to edit contour lines. You can also use the trackball and the Set button on the
control panel to edit contour lines. Once editing is complete, tap Multi Edit again to turn it off.
Clear Contour
When you tap this button on the touch screen, the VOCAL data are deleted, the settings are maintained,
and it returns to the VOCAL Define step.
New Contour
When you tap this button on the touch screen, the VOCAL data and the settings are all deleted and it
returns to the initial setting stage of VOCAL Define.
4-75
Operation Manual
Accept Contour
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to apply changes to the contour. The system will
switch to the review VOCAL data screen.
[Figure 4.38 VOCAL Edit – Touch Screen]
4-76
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
VOCAL
Optimize VOCAL data for review. Information on the current mode and display format is shown in the 3D
image information area.
[Figure 4.39 VOCAL Edit Image Information]
Mode
Specify how VOCAL data are presented.
■■ROI 3D
Shows images in the Axial, Sagittal and Coronal planes, and VOCAL data.
■■Fixed 3D
Shows images in the Axial, Sagittal and Coronal planes, and 3D images for VOCAL data.
■■VCT
Shows actual combinations of images in the Axial, Sagittal and Coronal planes and VOCAL data.
Display Format
When you tap this button on the touch screen and select Single or Quad, the VOCAL data are displayed
in full screen. This can be used in every mode. When you tap this button again, the display returns to
the previous screen.
Ref. Image
Select a reference image from A, B or C by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen. The
selected image will be highlighted with orange borders.
VOCAL Edit
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to return to the VOCAL Edit stage.
4-77
Operation Manual
Init
Click the touch screen to initialize the position of a 3D image.
Histogram
NOTE: Histogram is available only for 2D and Power Doppler 3D images.
A shell histogram is calculated and displayed on the screen.
It represents the gray value distribution within the 2D and Power Doppler images of an object for
which VOCAL is performed. It also indicates Mean Gray (MG), Vascularization Index (VI), Flow Index (FI)
and Vascularization Flow Index (VFI).
Formula for Shell Histogram:
Tips!
XX
MG: The average value of gray voxel brightness (gray)
MG = The sum of brightness (gray) / The total number of voxels
XX
VI: The ratio of color voxels over all voxels within the shell
VI = The number of color voxels / The total number of voxels
XX
FI: The average value of brightness (color) for color voxels within the shell
FI = The sum of brightness (color) / The total number of color voxels
XX
VFI: The average value of brightness (color) for all voxels within the shell
VFI = The sum of brightness (color) / The total number of voxels
Niche
NOTE: This option is available with Volume CT.
Select from Type 1 to Type 8 by clicking the corresponding button or using the dial-button on the
touch screen.
4-78
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Mode
NOTE: This option is available with 3D/4D.
Specify how the surface of VOCAL data is presented. Select Surface or Wireframe by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
XX
Surface: VOCAL data are represented using the method of expressing the exterior of images by
curves.
XX
Wireframe: Represent VOCAL data with dots and lines.
[Figure 4.40 VOCAL – Touch Screen]
4-79
Operation Manual
3D XI
NOTE:
XX
3D XI is an optional feature of this product.
XX
3D XI is available only when 3D probes are used.
This view mode is enabled if 3D image acquisition is completed when MSV or Oblique View is selected
in 3D Stand By. “3D XI” is shown in the upper left corner of the screen.
An image can be viewed in multiple slices.
MSV
An image can be viewed in multiple slices. MSV is an abbreviation for Multi-Slice View.
[Figure 4.41 Multi Slice View]
4-80
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
NOTE: Available options are Calculator, Caliper, Text and Indicator.
MSV Screen
The images sliced at the thickness set in [Slice Thick.] are displayed on the screen. The slice number /
total number of slices are displayed at the bottom of each sliced image. The currently selected slice
image is indicated by an orange contour.
The image information displays the current mode, Ref.Image, and Slice Thick.
■■Rotating Image
Rotating the reference plane affects all planes.
XX
X-axis Rotation: Use the M / X dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball is in Pointer mode,
place the Pointer near the X-axis in an image and then move the trackball while pressing the Set
button.
XX
Y-axis Rotation: Use the PW / Y dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball is in Pointer
mode, place the Pointer near the Y-axis in an image and then move the trackball while pressing
the Set button.
XX
Z-axis Rotation: Use the Color / Z dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball is in Pointer
mode, place the Pointer near the Z-axis in an image and then move the trackball while pressing
the Set button.
■■Moving Image
Set the trackball in Move Mode, and then move it up/down/left/right. Move the image to the X- and
Y-axes on the coordinate system.
Display Format
Set the layout of slice images. Select from 1*1, 2*1, 2*2, 3*2, 3*3 or 4*3 by clicking the corresponding
button on the touch screen. The number of indices that can be displayed simultaneously on the screen
varies depending on this setting. If the layout is changed, the selected slice image moves to the first
place on the screen.
4-81
Operation Manual
Ref. Image
Select a reference image from A, B or C by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen.
■■MSV OH
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the A, B and
C planes of the selected slice image will be displayed on the screen. The selected slice and reference
images will be highlighted with orange borders.
Page
Change the page on the screen. This option can be useful when the total number of slice images
exceeds what is specified in Display Format. Select a page by tapping the Previous and Next buttons
on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
Selected Slice
Select a slice image to observe. Select an index by clicking the corresponding button or using the dialbutton on the touch screen. The selected index will be highlighted with orange borders.
Slice Thick.
NOTE: The Slice Thick. represents the slice width in volume data rather than the actual anatomical
position.
Set the cut depth of images. Select a value from 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 or 10.0mm by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. Depending on your selection, the
number of indices and pages will vary.
Position
Set the position of the post curve. Select a value between 0 and 100 by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
4-82
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Bias
Set the bias of the post curve. Select a value between -100 and 100 by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
Ruler
Set the position of the ruler. Select from None, Right, Left, Top, Bottom or All by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
NOTE: The following 3D Utility Menu items are enabled in MSV mode: Orientation Dot, 3D CI,
Chroma, 4D Cine, Volume CT, Post Processing, Auto Contrast, Negative, Preset
For more information on 3D Utility, see 3D Utility Menu.
[Figure 4.42 Multi Slice View – Touch Screen]
4-83
Operation Manual
Oblique View
After drawing a straight or curved line in the selected image in MSV Mode, observe the related oblique
image. To do this, follow the procedure below:
1. Select Display Format and then specify the number of oblique images for observation.
2. Set Cut Type.
3. Draw a straight or curved line in a reference image by using the trackball and the Set button. An
oblique image will appear with the start (S) and end (E) points shown.
XX
If the trackball is in Move Mode, the position of the line can be changed.
4. Optimize the image for observation by using other buttons on the touch screen
NOTE:
XX
Functions such as Text and Indicator can be used.
XX
When Display Format is 2*1, measurement functions such as Calculator and Caliper can be
used.
4-84
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
[Figure 4.43 Oblique View]
Oblique View Screen
The reference image that is selected in MSV Mode is displayed on the screen. The reference image is
highlighted with orange borders and always placed in the upper left corner of the screen.
When more than one line is used for observation, each line is indicated by a different color and number.
The image information displays the current mode, Ref.Image, Oblique Cut Type, and Plumb Size (or
Slice Thick.).
NOTE: When OVIX is used, the image information also displays OVIX Line Offset, Mix, Threshold
Low, and Render Mode 1,2.
4-85
Operation Manual
Direction of View of Oblique Image
Tips!
The observer is located perpendicular to the section of a reference image. Please see the view
direction below:
Display Format
Set the layout of oblique images. Select from 2x1, 3x2 or 3x3 by clicking the corresponding button on
the touch screen. Depending on this setting, the number of oblique images and the Oblique Cut Type
will vary.
Cut Type
Specify how images are cut by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen.
■■Line
The oblique image of a straight line can be observed.
■■Contour
The oblique image of a curved line or contour line can be observed.
Tips!
Multi Line & Multi Contour
If Display Format is set to 3x2 or 3x3, enable Auto Increase to draw more than one line.
■■Parallel
NOTE: This option is not available when Display Format is set to 2x1.
4-86
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
The oblique image of a straight line and its parallel lines can be observed. If a straight line is drawn,
its parallel lines are automatically shown on the screen.
■■Plumb
NOTE: This option is not available when Display Format is set to 2x1.
The oblique image of a straight line and its perpendicular lines can be observed. If a straight line is
drawn, its perpendicular lines are automatically shown on the screen.
Image Rotation
Specify the direction of an oblique image. Select 90˚, 180˚ or -90˚, by tapping the button on the screen.
Select the oblique image for which the direction is to be changed from Select Line.
Clear Line
Click the touch screen to delete an oblique image.
Selected Slice
NOTE: This cannot be used when Display Format is 2*1.
Select a line by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dial-button. The oblique image of
the selected line is indicated by blue contour.
Plumb Size
NOTE: This is used only when Cut Type is Plumb.
Adjust the length of the vertical line by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dialbutton. You can adjust in 1 mm units from the center line, and the current length is displayed in the
image information.
4-87
Operation Manual
Slice Thick.
NOTE: This is used only when Cut Type is Plumb.
Adjust the interval of the vertical lines by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dialbutton. You can adjust in 1 mm units from the center line, and the current interval is displayed in the
image information.
Rotate Line
NOTE: This cannot be used when:
XX
Cut Type is Contour or
XX
Cut Type is Line and Selected Slice is Select All.
Rotate a straight line by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dial-button. When the
line is rotated, the oblique image is also changed accordingly.
OVIX
NOTE: This cannot be used when Cut Type is Contour.
OVIX is the abbreviation for Oblique View eXtended which sets the cross-sectional thickness of an
oblique image and shows the image in 3D.
Tap this button on the touch screen to switch this function on or off. When this is on, an OVIX Line
appears in the reference image which indicates the cross-sectional thickness of the oblique image of
the reference image. OVIX Post Curve is also displayed at the left of the monitor screen.
The thickness of the OVIX Line can be adjusted by OVIX Thick. To change the 3D image settings, select
and adjust Render Setup or OVIX Post Curve from the 3D Utility Menu.
4-88
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
OVIX Thick.
Adjust the thickness of OVIX by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dial-button. The
3D image for the set thickness appears.
Init
When you tap this button on the touch screen, the oblique image is deleted and the position
information of Ref. Image is initialized.
NOTE: The following 3D utility menu items are enabled in Oblique View mode: Render Setup,
Chroma, Orientation Dot, 4D Cine, Volume CT, Post Processing, Preset
For more information on 3D Utility, see the 3D Utility Menu.
[Figure 4.44 Oblique View - Touch Screen]
4-89
Operation Manual
XI VOCAL
NOTE: XI VOCAL is one of the 3D XI features. It is available as an optional feature of this product.
Measure the volume of tissues in 3D XI Mode.
[Figure 4.45 XI VOCAL]
VOCAL vs XI VOCAL
Tips!
XX
VOCAL: Measures the volume of an object in a standard 3D image by using rotational slices.
XX
XI VOCAL: Measures the volume of an object in the selected reference image in MSV Mode by
using parallel slices. For volume calculation, an object is cut into multiple slices.
XI VOCAL can be performed in the following order: XI VOCAL Define→ XI VOCAL Edit → XI VOCAL.
4-90
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
XI VOCAL Define
Specify how slice and contour lines are retrieved.
In the left side of the screen, reference images and slice lines are displayed. In the right side of the screen,
slice images with the start (S) and end (E) points of a slice line are displayed. Information on the current
mode, Ref. Image, Contour Type, and Images is shown in the 3D image information area.
[Figure 4.46 XI VOCAL Define]
4-91
Operation Manual
Contour Type
Select the contour line type. A contour line is automatically created for all types but Manual.
■■Solid
Used for object data with many echoes.
■■Cystic
Used for object data with fewer echoes.
■■General
Draw a contour line based on a typical object. It is faster than other automatic contour types but
less accurate.
■■Manual
Create the desired shape of an object manually. A contour line can be specified in the XI VOCAL
Edit screen.
Ref. Image
Select a reference image from A, B or C by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen. The
selected image will be highlighted with orange borders.
■■Ref. Contour
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, a contour
line can be drawn by using the trackball and the Set button.
Slice Direction
Set the direction of a slice line. Select from Vertical or Horizontal by clicking the corresponding button
on the touch screen. Changing the direction of a slice line also changes the slice image displayed on
the screen.
Init
Click the touch screen to initialize the position of a 3D image.
4-92
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Start
Click the touch screen to switch to the XI VOCAL Edit screen.
NOTE: If Contour Type is set to Manual, the system switches to the XI VOCAL screen when Start
is pressed.
# of Slice
Specify the number of slice images. Select a value from 5, 10, 15 and 20 by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. Depending on the selected number of images,
the interval between slices will vary.
[Figure 4.47 XI VOCAL Define – Touch Screen]
4-93
Operation Manual
XI VOCAL Edit
Specify the contour extraction range or run XI VOCAL.
Based on slice lines, slice images and pole points will be displayed on the screen. A pole point is a reference
point against which object contour is extracted. Two pole points appear in each slice image.
The selected slice image is highlighted with orange borders. ‘The image number / the total number of slice
images’ is shown at the bottom of each image. The current mode is shown in the 3D image information
area.
Reference Image and Slice Line
Tips!
They always appear in the lower right corner of the XI VOCAL Edit screen. They can be useful when
the position of a slice image is to be considered.
[Figure 4.48 XI VOCAL Edit]
4-94
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Ref. Page
Change the page by clicking the corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
New Contour
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to delete the current data and return to the XI
VOCAL Define stage.
Accept Contour
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to apply changes and run XI VOCAL. The system
will switch to the XI VOCAL screen.
When Contour Type is set to Manual
Tips!
Use the Set button and the trackball to draw a contour line before clicking Accept Contour.
Clicking Accept Contour without drawing a contour line extracts the standard contour line.
[Figure 4.49 XI VOCAL Edit – Touch Screen]
4-95
Operation Manual
XI VOCAL
Optimize XI VOCAL data for review.
Slice images with their contour line shown and 3D reference images are displayed. The 3D reference
image is highlighted with orange borders, and the calculated volume is shown at the bottom of the
image. The current mode is shown in the 3D image information area.
3D Reference Image
Tips!
Use XI VOCAL to display an object for which volume has been obtained in 3D. Press the Zoom, M /
x, PW / y or Color / z button on the control panel to zoom or rotate for observation.
View All Slice
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, all XI VOCAL
data - including reference image, slice line and slice image - will be displayed simultaneously on the
screen.
Edit Contour
Tap the touch screen to return to the XI VOCAL Edit screen. You can use the trackball and the Set button
to modify the contour.
[Figure 4.50 XI VOCAL – Touch Screen]
4-96
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
4D
NOTE:
XX
4D Mode is an optional feature of this product.
XX
4D Mode is available only when 3D probes are used.
In 4D Mode, 3D images can be obtained in real time with 3D probes. This mode is also called Live 3D
Mode.
Images can be acquired in the same way as for standard 3D images.
4D Mode Screen
Under the current mode in the image information area, ‘Live’ appears indicating 4D.
Press the Freeze button on the control panel to switch to the 4D CINE screen.
NOTE: In 4D state, only MPR, MSV, and Oblique View modes are available. For more information,
see 3D View-MPR and 3D XI
4-97
Operation Manual
XI STIC
NOTE:
XX
XI STIC is an optional feature of this product.
XX
XI STIC is available only when 3D probes are used.
XX
This appears only when Application is set to OB.
This option can be used to obtain the fetal cardiac cycle with volume data on fetal cardiac area and to
recompile the volume data for display. STIC is an abbreviation for Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation.
[Figure 4.51 XI STIC]
4-98
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Acquiring XI STIC Image
NOTE:
XX
When a heart rate cannot be calculated because motion artifact is severe or a cardiac cycle is
not present, the system returns to the initial XI STIC screen.
XX
In Color STIC, the cardiac cycle can be measured only when the frame rate is 20 or above.
1. Select the XI STIC tab in the 3D Stand By screen on the touch screen.
2. Set various parameters as you would for acquisition of standard 3D images.
3. Press the Freeze or Set button on the control panel. The system will start acquiring 3D images.
4. When image acquisition is complete, XI STIC is displayed on the monitor screen and the XI STIC
Confirm screen appears on the touch screen. Check the fetal cardiac cycle calculated.
5. Tap Yes on the touch screen to continue. Tap No to cancel and acquire images again.
6. Optimize and diagnose the acquired images.
How to Improve STIC Volume Data
Tips!
XX
Scan Angle: Specify a small scan angle for small fetal hearts.
XX
Scan Position: Adjust the scan position so that the center of the scan angle and the fetal heart
are aligned properly.
XX
ROI Box: Adjust the size of the volume box so that it nearly fits the size of the fetal heart.
Scan Angle
Set the scan angle. Select between 15 and 60˚by clicking the corresponding button or using the dialbutton on the touch screen.
Scan Time
Set the image acquisition time. Select a value between 7s and 15s by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
4-99
Operation Manual
Trimester
Set the pregnancy trimester. Select from 1st, 2nd and 3rd by clicking the corresponding button or using
the dial-button on the touch screen.
Trimester
Tips!
If 1st - 3rd are set, the recommended scan time and STIC angle are automatically set for the
specified trimester. Please see the following table:
Trimester
1st
2nd
3rd
ScanTime
10 seconds
12 seconds
15 seconds
STIC Angle
20˚
25˚
30˚
If a scan time and STIC angle other than the ones in the above table are set, the trimester is
displayed as user set.
NOTE: For information on other usage, please refer to “3D Stand By”.
Reviewing XI STIC Image
XI STIC images are played as Volume Cine. Under XI STIC images, XI STIC information, including Img
Angle, Vol. Angle, Scan Time, HR, Volume Pos., are shown.
NOTE: The only available modes with Volume Cine are MPR, MSV and Oblique View.
Press the Freeze button on the control panel to stop Volume CINE playback.
Speed (%)
NOTE: This option is available only in MPR or MSV Mode during Volume Cine playback.
Set the playback speed for XI STIC images. Select between 25 and 400% by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. This rate is based on the fetal heart rate (100%).
4-100
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Volume Pos.
NOTE: This option is available only in MPR or MSV Mode when Freeze is enabled.
Select an index by clicking the corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. The
selected index will be highlighted with orange borders.
NOTE: For information on other usage, please refer to “3D View-MPR” and “3D XI”.
[Figure 4.52 XI STIC – Touch Screen]
4-101
Operation Manual
3D Utility Menu
This menu is always displayed on the touch screen in view mode. Only the buttons that are available in
the current mode are enabled. If the 3D Utility Menu has more than 2 pages, you can move to a different
page by tapping the Next and Previous buttons on the touch screen.
The current page number / total page count are displayed below the 3D Utility Menu. If there are more
than two pages, you can change the page by using the dial-button on the touch screen.
NOTE: The following are common functions available in all modes. For information on functions
that are available in certain modes only, such as OVIX and Auto Increment, please refer to the
description for the corresponding mode.
Mirror View
3D images can be viewed in multiple directions. The Mirror View screen is displayed on the touch
screen.
NOTE: If Mirror View is clicked in modes other than 3D / 4D, Mirror View will start after the system
switches to 3D / 4D Mode. Therefore, Mirror View images are displayed with the settings of 3D /
4D.
■■Mirror View Screen
The front, top, left and right images of a 3D image are displayed on the screen. In addition, a
reference image is shown in the upper right corner of the screen, indicating the direction of images.
Item
4-102
Descriptions
1
A reference image for Mirror View.
2
The left view image of the reference object.
3
The top view image of the reference object.
4
The right view image of the reference object.
5
A reference image indicating the direction of each image.
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
y
w
u
x
v
[Figure 4.53 Mirror View]
■■Trackball State
The current trackball state is displayed at the bottom of the monitor screen. You can select Pointer,
Move, or ROI for trackball. Press the Change button on the control panel to change the trackball
state. The trackball state changes sequentially each time the button is pressed.
XX
Move: You can move 3D images with the trackball. The acquired 3D image moves as you move
the trackball.
XX
ROI: You can resize the ROI box with the trackball. The ROI box on the 3D image is resized as you
move the trackball.
XX
Pointer: You can reposition the ROI box. Pressing the Pointer button on the control panel
switches to Pointer state. You can resize an image or the ROI box in this state. Press the Change
button again to switch to another state.
■■Center View
4-103
Operation Manual
Select an image by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen. The selected image will
be displayed as the front image. Select Top, Left, or Right.
■■Display Format
NOTE: Center View Change cannot be used when Display Format is Single.
When you tap this button on the touch screen, the front image is displayed in full screen.
■■Position
Set the position of the post curve. Select a value between 0 and 100 by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Bias
Set the bias of the post curve. Select a value between -100 and 100 by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
Initializing Post Curve
Tips!
When you double-click Post Curve at the left side of the screen with the trackball when the
trackball is in Pointer state, the Post Curve is initialized.
■■Transparency
Set the transparency of a 3D image. Select a value between 20 and 250 by clicking the corresponding
button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
The lowest value (20) is for complete transparency, and the highest value (250) is for complete
opacity.
■■Mix
Set the combination of Render Mode 1 and 2. Select a value between 0 and 100 by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Th.Low
Specify the minimum range of threshold. Select a value between 0 and 254 by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Init
4-104
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
The position information of the image is initialized.
NOTE: Use Preset to initialize settings other than the position information.
■■Auto Run
NOTE: Auto Run is supported only for Mirror View and Volume Slice.
Tap this button on the touch screen to switch it on or off. When this is on, the image rotates 360˚
around the Y-axis. You can also turn the image around the desired rotational axis from among X, Y,
and Z axes.
Performing Mirror View Again
Tips!
To perform Mirror View again based on a certain Mirror View image:
1. While the trackball is in Pointer mode, use the trackball and the Set button to select a Mirror View
image.
2. Double-click the selected Mirror View image. Mirror View will be performed again based on the
selected image. The selected image will be displayed as the front image.
[Figure 4.54 Mirror View – Touch Screen]
4-105
Operation Manual
3D Cine
The 3D images saved temporarily in the system can be reviewed. The 3D Cine Define screen is displayed
on the touch screen.
3D Cine Define
Specify the settings needed for creation of a Cine image.
■■Rotation Angle
Set the overall rotation angle by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen. Select a
value from 30, 45, 60, 90, 180 or 360˚.
■■Step Angle
Set the rotation angle for a single step in an image by clicking the corresponding button on the
touch screen. Select a value from 1, 3, 5, or 15˚.
The Difference between Rotation Angle and Step Angle
Tips!
A Cine image rotates to the angle specified under Rotation Angle. During this process, each
rotational step is equivalent to the angle specified under Step Angle. For example, if Rotation
Angle is set to 360˚ and Step Angle is set to 15˚, a 3D Cine image rotates to 360˚in 25 steps, each
of which requires a rotation of 15˚.
■■Rotate Axis
Set the rotational axis by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen.
■■Generate Cine
Cine images are generated by applying the current settings. Once the images are generated, the
touch screen switches to 3D Cine Review.
■■Review Cine
Review Cine images generated previously. The touch screen switches to 3D Cine Review.
■■Start Angle
Set the start angle of a Cine image by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dialbutton. When Start Angle is set, Rotation Angle is cancelled.
4-106
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■End Angle
Set the end angle of a Cine image by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dialbutton. When End Angle is set, Rotation Angle is cancelled.
■■Play Mode
Specify how a Cine image is played. Select from Loop or Yoyo by clicking the corresponding button
or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
XX
Loop: Repeats playback in one direction.
XX
Yoyo: Play until the end in one direction and then play in the reverse direction.
[Figure 4.55 3D CINE Define – Touch Screen]
4-107
Operation Manual
3D Cine Review
Specify the settings needed for review of a Cine image. The Cine bar appears on the screen, showing ‘The
current Cine frame number / the total number of Cine frames.’
[Figure 4.56 3D CINE Review]
■■Play Mode
Set the play mode for Cine images. Select Loop or Yoyo by tapping the button on the touch screen.
XX
Loop: Repeats playback in one direction.
XX
Yoyo: Play until the end in one direction and then play in the reverse direction.
■■Cine Play
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, a Cine
image will be played. If it is turned off, Cine Frame will appear on the touch screen.
4-108
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■New Cine
Clears the current Cine image and creates new one. The system switches to the 3D Cine Define
screen.
■■Cine Speed
Set the playback speed for a Cine image by clicking the corresponding button or using the dialbutton on the touch screen. Select a value from 25, 50,100, 200, 300 or 400%.
■■Cine Frame
NOTE: This option is available when Play is turned off. ‘The current Cine frame number / the total
number of Cine frames’ will be shown.
Select a Cine frame to review. To do this, click the corresponding button or use the dial-button on
the touch screen. Or, move the trackball to the left or right.
[Figure 4.57 3D CINE Review – Touch Screen]
4-109
Operation Manual
MagiCut
NOTE:
XX
Select this in MPR mode.
XX
If MagiCut is enabled, Accept ROI is turned on automatically.
XX
After MagiCut is enabled, if the system is switched to a mode other than MPR Mode, MagiCut
is disabled.
The MagiCut screen is displayed on the touch screen. Cut the parts that are not relevant to diagnosis
from 3D images. Set the area to cut by using the trackball and the Set button.
■■Mode
Set how parts are cut by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen.
XX
Inside Contour: Cuts the inside of the selected area.
XX
Outside Contour: Cuts the outside of the selected area.
XX
Inside Box: Cuts the inside of the box.
XX
Outside Box: Cuts the outside of the box.
XX
Small Eraser: Cuts the selected contour line.
XX
Big Eraser: Cuts the selected contour line (thicker than Small Eraser).
■■Full Depth
Click the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the entire area will be cut. If it is turned
off, Depth will appear on the touch screen.
■■Depth
Set the cut depth. Select a value between 1 and 100 by clicking the corresponding button or using
the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Undo
Cancel the previous task(s).
XX
Undo: Cancel the last task.
XX
Undo All: Cancel all tasks that have been done so far.
4-110
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■SmoothCut Mode
XX
Erase Small: Erases a portion by rubbing it with the trackball.
XX
Erase Big: Used to erase a larger area.
XX
Recovery Small: Restores the volume image for a selected area.
XX
Recovery Big: Restores the image for a larger area.
■■Mix
Set the combination of Render Mode 1 and 2. Select a value between 0:100(5) and 100:0(%) by
tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
■■Th.Low
Set the lowest threshold. Select a value between 0 and 254 by tapping the button on the touch
screen or using the dial-button.
[Figure 4.58 MagiCut – Touch Screen]
4-111
Operation Manual
Orientation Dot
Tap the button on the touch screen to switch this function on or off. When this is on, a dot appears at
the center of the reference image.
3D CI
Tap this button on the touch screen to switch this function on or off. 3D CI is an abbreviation for 3D
Compound Imaging.
When this is on, images are combined to remove noise and improve image quality. Select the distance
between images used for 3D CI by using the 3D CI Offset dial-button.
NOTE: When 3D CI in Post Processing under the 3D Utility Menu is set to On, the 3D CI Offset
button is created which can be used to adjust the distance between images.
VCE
NOTE:
XX
Select this in MPR mode.
XX
This function can be used only in 3D / 4D mode.
Click the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the contrast of a 3D image will be enhanced.
VCE is an abbreviation for Volume Contrast Enhancement.
Auto Contour
NOTE:
XX
Select this in MPR mode.
XX
This function is supported only in 3D / 4D + Quad mode where the Render Direction of Render
Setup is ‘C+.’
XX
You cannot use this function together with Accept ROI.
XX
This appears only when Application is set to OB.
Click the touch screen to turn it on or off. Auto Contour automatically locates the facial area in a fetal
image scanned for Sagittal. If it is turned on, a contour line will appear in the ROI box on A Plane and
Contour Edit will appear in 3D Utility Menu.
4-112
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Contour Edit
NOTE: This option is available only when Auto Contour is turned on.
Click the touch screen to turn it on or off. When it is on, use the trackball and the Set button to modify
a contour line.
Render Setup
NOTE: In Oblique View Mode, this option is available only when OVIX is On.
The Rendering Setup screen is displayed on the touch screen. Specify the image rendering method.
After selecting the rendering mode tab on the touch screen, specify the required settings including
Render Direction and Render Mode. The specified settings will be displayed in the image information
area.
This product provides 4 rendering modes: Gray, Color, See Thru. Inversion.
NOTE: The Color and See Thru. tabs are available with color 3D images only.
[Figure 4.59 Render Setup –Touch Screen]
4-113
Operation Manual
Gray
Specify how volume data acquired with the gray method can be rendered into 3D images.
■■Render Direction
Set the rendering direction by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen. ‘+’ indicates
the facing direction and ‘-’ indicates the opposite of the facing direction.
■■Render Mode 1, 2
Enter Render Mode 1 and 2 by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen.
XX
Surface: Represents 3D images in the Ray-Casting method, which shows the shell of an image
with curved surfaces.
XX
Surface Smooth: Represents 3D images that are smoother than Surface.
XX
Max: Represents 3D images at maximum intensity. It can be useful for the observation of bone
structures in a human body.
XX
Min: Represents 3D images at minimum intensity. It can be useful for observation of vessels or
hollow parts in a human body.
XX
Light: Represents the depth of 3D images in terms of brightness.
XX
X-Ray: Represents 3D images in terms of average intensity. It shows images similar to X-ray
images.
XX
VSI: Displays a realistic image by using depth and intensity information. When Surface or Surface
Smooth is enabled in Render Mode 1, VSI is enabled in Render Mode 2. VSI stands for Volume
Shading Imaging.
NOTE: For descriptions on other menu items, see Render Setup.
■■Mix
Set a combination of Render Mode 1 and 2. Select a value between 0 and 100 by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Th.High
Specify the maximum range of threshold. Select a value between 1 and 255 by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
4-114
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■Th.Low
Specify the minimum range of threshold. Select a value between 0 and 254 by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
Threshold
Tips!
This option allows you to adjust the threshold value in order to eliminate unnecessary data from
images. As the number increases, cyst elements become more apparent. As the number decreases,
bone elements become more apparent.
■■Th.Power
NOTE: Th.Power is available with color 3D images only.
Specify the threshold for color portion. Select a value between 0 and 255 by clicking the
corresponding button or using the dial-button on the touch screen. As this value increases, more
color is removed from an image.
Color
Specify how the volume data acquired with the Angio/CFM method can be rendered into 3D images.
Other settings can be specified in the same way as with Gray Render Mode.
See Thru
Specify how the combined data of Gray+Angio or Gray+CFM can be rendered into 3D images. Except for
Render Mode 1 and 2, it can be set in the same way as with Gray Render Mode.
■■Transparent-Transparent
Adjust the transparency of both gray and color data to view color data as gray data. The parts
hidden by gray data may appear slightly darker.
■■Transparent-Surface
Adjust the transparency of gray data to view color data as gray data. The parts hidden by gray data
may appear slightly darker.
4-115
Operation Manual
■■Max-Transparent
Set gray data to Max and color data to Transp in order to view color data. The parts hidden by gray
data may appear slightly brighter.
■■Max-Surface
Set gray data to Max and color data to Surface in order to view color data. The parts hidden by gray
data may appear slightly brighter.
NOTE: Other settings can be specified in the same way as with Gray Render Mode.
■■Inversion
This option shows inverted images when the volume data acquired by the gray method is rendered
into 3D images. Other settings can be specified in the same way as with Gray Render Mode.
Chroma
The Chroma Map screen is displayed on the touch screen. Set the color of 2D and 3D images by clicking
the corresponding button on the touch screen.
[Figure 4.60 Chroma Map – Touch Screen]
4-116
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Post Processing
The Post Processing screen is displayed on the touch screen.
[Figure 4.61 Post Processing – Touch Screen]
Gradient Mask
Adjust the brightness of a specific area in an image. Make a selection by clicking the corresponding
button on the touch screen.
Flip Image
Flip the orientation of an image.
NOTE: This option is available only in MSV Mode.
Tap the image on the touch screen and flip the image left and right or up and down.
4-117
Operation Manual
Processing
■■Clear SFVI
Tap this button on the touch screen to turn this feature on or off. Reduces speckle noise if turned on.
SFVI stands for Smart Filter Volume Imaging.
■■Detailed SFVI
Tap this button on the touch screen to turn this feature on or off. If turned on, you can adjust the
image effect to a value between 0 and 100 by using the activated Strength Knob button.
■■Negative
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the
brightness of an image will be inverted.
■■Auto Contrast
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the contrast
of an image will be adjusted automatically.
■■Thres.
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the Th. Low
or Th. High dial-button can be used to adjust the threshold.
■■Sharpen
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the
boundary of an image will become more apparent. Select a value between 100 and 400 by using
the Sharp dial-button.
■■3D CI
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. 3D CI is an abbreviation for
3D Compound Imaging.
If it is turned on, images will be compounded to eliminate noise and enhance image quality. Set
the distance between images for 3D CI to between 1 and 10 by using the 3D CI Offset dial-button.
4-118
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Preset
The Preset screen appears on the touch screen. You can set the currently selected Preset or rename the
Rendering Preset. Default is the default value of the system.
[Figure 4.62 Preset – Touch Screen]
■■Load Preset
When you press this button on the touch screen, the currently selected Preset is applied to the
system. Then the Preset screen is closed.
■■Save Preset
Press Save Preset. When you tap this button on the touch screen, the current Preset is saved.
■■Rename Preset
Change the name of the selected Rendering Preset. When you press this button on the touch
screen, the Name screen appears. After changing the name, tap OK to save the changed name. Tap
Cancel to cancel the change.
■■Reset
When you tap this button on the touch screen, the Preset is reset to its default value.
4-119
Operation Manual
4D Cine
The 4D images saved temporarily in the system can be reviewed. The 4D Cine screen is displayed on
the touch screen.
NOTE: You can also press the Freeze button in 4D Mode to execute 4D Cine.
The Cine bar will appear on the screen, showing ‘The current Cine frame number / the total number
of Cine frames.’
■■Play Mode
Specify how a Cine image is played. Select from Loop or Yoyo by clicking the corresponding button
or using the dial-button on the touch screen.
XX
Loop: Repeats playback in one direction.
XX
Yoyo: Play until the end in one direction and then play in the reverse direction.
■■Cine Type
Select the Cine image type by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen.
XX
Volume: This button appears when Cine images are played. The MPR, MSV, or Oblique buttons
are enabled depending on the state before the beginning of 4D Cine. Cine images can be played
by changing Display Format, etc. The Volume Pos. button appears on the touch screen.
XX
Image: This is the general Cine playing method. The Image Pos. button appears on the touch
screen.
■■Cine Play
Tap this button on the touch screen to switch this function on or off. Cine images are played when
this is on.
■■Cine Speed
Set the speed at which Cine images are played. Select a value between 25 and 400% by tapping this
button on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
■■Image Pos.
4-120
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
NOTE: This can be used when Cine Type is Image.
Select a Cine image to examine. “The number of the present Cine frame number / Total number of
Cine frames” is displayed.
■■Volume Pos.
NOTE:
XX
This can be used when Cine Type is Volume.
XX
This cannot be used while Cine images are being played.
Select the volume data to examine. “The present volume data number / Total number of volume
data” is displayed.
[Figure 4.63 4D CINE – Touch Screen]
4-121
Operation Manual
Volume Slice
Volume data can be viewed in multiple slices. The Volume Slice screen is displayed on the touch
screen.
NOTE: If Volume Slice is clicked in modes other than 3D/4D, Volume Slice will start after the
system switches to 3D/4D Mode. Therefore, Volume Slice images are displayed with the settings of
3D/4D.
MSV vs Volume Slice
Tips!
MSV allows you to divide a 3D image into multiple slices which can then be viewed in 2D images.
On the other hand, Volume Slice allows you to view slice images in 3D. It also allows you to adjust
the settings of each slice image separately.
■■Volume Slice Screen
9 images are displayed on the screen. At the center, reference images are displayed in the order of
2D, 3D and OH. On the other rows, Volume Slice images created based on those reference images
are displayed.
The ROI position and the Slice number are shown for 3D reference images and Volume Slice images.
The ROI box and the slice line are shown for 2D reference images.
The ROI position and Index number are displayed in the 3D Reference and Volume Slice images.
[Figure 4.64 Volume Slice]
4-122
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
Slice Number
Tips!
Because 3 images are divided before and after a reference image, respectively, the Slice number is
shown as a number between -3 and 3.
■■Ref. Image
Choose a reference image from among A, B, and C by tapping the button on the touch screen. The
selected image is displayed in 2D Image.
XX
A: Axial Section
XX
B: Sagittal Section
XX
C: Coronal Section
■■3D Rotation
Set the orientation of a Volume Slice image. Select -90, 90 or 180 by tapping the button on the
touch screen.
■■Slice Thick.
Set the spacing between slice lines from between 1 and 7 mm. Select a value by tapping the button
on the touch screen or using the dial-button. The Volume Slice images are updated accordingly.
■■Selected Slice
Select a slice line. Select a value between -3 and 3 by tapping a button on the touch screen or using
the dial-button. The selected slice line also appears in 2D Reference Image. In addition, the Volume
Slice image for the selected slice line is indicated by an orange contour.
NOTE: For descriptions of other menu items, see the menu of 3D Mode.
Performing Volume Slice Again
Tips!
To perform Volume Slice again based on a certain Volume Slice image:
1. While the trackball is in Pointer mode, use the trackball and the Set button to select a Volume
Slice image.
2. Double-click the selected Volume Slice image. Volume Slice will be performed again based on the
selected image. The result will be reflected in reference images.
4-123
Operation Manual
[Figure 4.65 Volume Slice – Touch Screen]
VolumeNT
NOTE: VolumeNT is an optional feature of this product.
Use the VolumeNT feature to locate the mid-sagittal view and measure the nuchal translucency (NT)
of the fetus. The VolumeNT window appears on the touch screen. Use the trackball to position the NT
Seed in the NT area and press the Set button to display the NT measurement in plane A.
How to get good results
Tips!
XX
Obtain the fetus’s sagittal view as precisely as possible.
XX
A higher contrast between the fetus’s palate and nasal bone will yield better results.
XX
Preferably, the lateral orientation of the probe should be parallel to the orientation of the fetus’s
body.
XX
For optimal results, make sure that the angle between the probe and the fetus’s nasal bone is as
close to 30 degrees as possible.
■■Display Format
Press the touch screen and select a button to choose an image display method. When Full Screen is
selected, the image in plane A will be displayed in full screen mode.
4-124
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■NT Caliper Placement
Press the touch screen to select an NT measurement type.
XX
On to On: Measures NT by positioning the cursor on the NT’s inner-inner.
Cursor
XX
On to Max Brightness: Positions one side of the cursor on the outside of the NT to measure innerouter. This measurement method is used when harmonic methods were used and one side of
the nuchal translucency was blurred.
Cursor
XX
In to In: This measurement method is similar to On to On as it takes a measurement by innerinner; however, it uses a narrower cursor interval.
Cursor
■■Items
XX
NT: The acquired A, B, and C plane images and the automatically measured NT are displayed in
the 3D View screen.
XX
IT: Locates mid-sagittal view and detects spina bifida in the fetus.
4-125
Operation Manual
■■Assign
Press the touch screen to include the result in the OB report.
■■Init
The image’s position information will be initialized.
■■Hide All
Tapping this button hides the marker, NT, and IT measurements on the screen.
■■Auto
Press the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is on, the mid-sagittal view will be located automatically.
To calculate the NT value, position the cursor in the NT area and press the Set button in the control
panel.
■■Edit
Edit the marker for each item shown as a result.
If the trackball is in cursor state, the marker's color will change from green to orange as you move
the cursor near the + marker.
You can freely edit the marker by pressing the Set button and moving the trackball.
■■Marker Size
You can select Small, Medium or Large for the marker size by tapping the button on the screen or
using the dial-button.
NOTE:
XX
Select this in MPR mode.
XX
This function can be used only in 3D / 4D mode.
4-126
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
[Figure 4.66 VolumeNT Touch Screen]
4-127
Operation Manual
Volume CT
A 3D image is divided into Axial, Sagittal and Coronal images and then recompiled for display. In this way,
information on slice images can be obtained. The current mode and the display format are shown in the
image information area.
NOTE: While Calculator and Caliper are not available, Text and Indicator are.
Display Format
Specify how Volume CT images are presented. Select from Cube or Cross by clicking the corresponding
button on the touch screen. Depending on this setting, the touch screen menu will vary.
Cube Volume CT
Show the external slice image of a cube.
[Figure 4.67 Cube Volume CT]
4-128
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
■■View Direction
Set the view direction for the external slice of a cube. Select from Front, Back, Left, Right, Up or
Down by clicking the corresponding button on the touch screen.
■■Offset
Adjust the position of the external slice by clicking the corresponding button or using the dialbutton on the touch screen.
[Figure 4.68 Cube VolumeCT – Touch Screen]
Cross Volume CT
The internal cross-sectional images where the Coronal, Sagittal, and Axial Planes meet are shown.
XX
A Plane Offset: Adjust the position of the Front Surface from between -81 and 81. It is indicated
by a blue contour on the screen.
XX
B Plane Offset: Adjust the position of the Up Surface from between -81 and 81. It is indicated by
a red contour on the screen.
XX
C Plane Offset: Adjust the position of the Left Surface from between -81 and 81. It is indicated by
a yellow contour in the screen.
■■Offset
Adjust the position of the plane by tapping the button on the touch screen or using the dial-button.
4-129
Operation Manual
Init
NOTE: Use Preset in 3D Utility Menu to initialize settings other than position.
Initialize the position of images.
Boundary
Click the corresponding button on the touch screen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the boundary
lines of a cube will be shown. Boundary lines indicate the external boundary for the entire volume
data.
[Figure 4.69 Cross VolumeCT]
4-130
Chapter 4 Diagnosis Modes
[Figure 4.70 Cross Volume CT – Touch Screen]
4-131
Chapter
5
Measurements and
Calculations
‹‹Measurement Accuracy................................. 5-3
Causes of Measurement Errors............................................5-3
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy........................5-5
Measurement Accuracy Table..............................................5-7
‹‹Basic Measurements....................................... 5-8
Distance Measurement........................................................5-11
Circumference and Area Measurement.........................5-16
Volume Measurement..........................................................5-18
‹‹Calculations by Application........................5-21
Things to note..........................................................................5-21
Common Measurement Methods...................................5-24
OB Calculations.......................................................................5-29
Gynecology Calculations.....................................................5-39
Cardiac Calculations..............................................................5-42
Vascular Calculations............................................................5-60
Fetal Heart Calculations.......................................................5-84
Urology Calculations.............................................................5-89
Abdomen Calculations ........................................................5-94
Small Parts Calculations ......................................................5-98
TCD Calculations .................................................................5-105
Pediatric Hips Calculations..............................................5-109
Musculoskeletal Calculations.........................................5-111
Chapter
5
‹‹Report............................................................5-112
Viewing Report.....................................................................5-112
Editing Report.......................................................................5-114
Adding Comment...............................................................5-116
Printing Report.....................................................................5-118
Saving Report.......................................................................5-118
Transferring Report.............................................................5-119
Store SR...................................................................................5-119
Edit Template .......................................................................5-120
Insert Image...........................................................................5-122
Graph.......................................................................................5-123
History.....................................................................................5-125
Fetal Description..................................................................5-128
Closing Report......................................................................5-128
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Accuracy
Measurement values can vary, depending on the nature of the ultrasound, the body’s response to
ultrasound, the measurement tools, algorithms, product settings, probe type and user operation.
Before using this product, make sure to read and understand the following information regarding the
causes of measurement errors, and measurement optimization.
Causes of Measurement Errors
Image Resolution
The resolution of ultrasound images may be limited by the available space.
XX
Errors due to a signal range may be minimized by adjusting focus settings. Optimizing focus
settings increases the resolution of the measurement area.
XX
In general, lateral resolution is lower than axial resolution. Therefore, measurements should be
performed along the axis of the ultrasound beam to obtain accurate values.
XX
Gain has a direct impact on resolution. Gain can be adjusted by using the Gain button for each
mode.
XX
In general, increasing the frequency of ultrasound enhances resolution.
Pixel Size
XX
An ultrasound images in the product consist of pixels.
XX
Since a single pixel represents the basic unit of an image, a measurement error may result in the
displacement of approximately ±1 pixel when compared to the original image size.
XX
However, this error becomes significant only when a narrow area in an image is measured.
5-3
Operation Manual
Ultrasound Velocity
XX
The velocity of ultrasound used during measurement is usually 1,540 m/s on average.
XX
The velocity of ultrasound may vary depending on the cell type.
XX
The possible range of error is between approximately 2-5% depending on the structure of cells
(about 2% for typical cells and about 5% for fatty cells).
Doppler Signal Adjustment
XX
During velocity measurement, an error may occur depending on the cosine angle between the
blood flow and the ultrasound beam.
XX
For Doppler velocity measurements, the most accurate results can be ensured when the
ultrasound beam is aligned in parallel with the blood flow.
XX
If that is not possible, the angle between them should be adjusted by using the Angle option.
Aliasing
XX
PW Spectral Doppler Mode uses a signal sampling technique to calculate the frequency (or
velocity) spectrum.
XX
Adjust the baseline or the velocity scale to minimize aliasing. A lower frequency probe can also
be used to reduce aliasing.
XX
Aliasing is dramatically reduced in CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Calculation Equation
XX
Some of the calculation equations used for clinical purposes originate from hypotheses and
approximation.
XX
All calculation equations are based on medical reports and articles.
Human Error
XX
Human error may occur due to inappropriate use or lack of experience.
XX
This can be minimized through compliance with and thorough understanding of the manuals.
5-4
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy
2D Mode
XX
Resolution is in proportion to the frequency of the probe.
XX
Penetration is in inverse proportion to the frequency of the probe.
XX
The highest resolution can be obtained at the focus of the probe where the ultrasound beam is
narrowest.
XX
The most accurate measurements can be obtained at the focus depth. The accuracy decreases
as the distance from the focus increases, widening the beam width.
XX
Using the zoom function or minimizing the depth display makes distance or area measurements
more accurate.
M Mode
XX
The accuracy of time measurements can be increased when the sweep velocity and the display
format are set to high values.
XX
The accuracy of distance measurements can be increased when the display format is set to
higher values.
Doppler Mode
XX
It is recommended to use lower frequency ultrasound for measurement of faster blood flows.
XX
The size of the sample volume is limited by the axial direction of the ultrasound.
XX
Using lower frequency ultrasound increases penetration.
XX
The accuracy of time measurements can be increased when the sweep velocity is increased.
XX
The accuracy of velocity measurements can be increased when the vertical scale is set to smaller
values.
XX
It is most important to use an optimal Doppler angle to enhance the accuracy of velocity
measurements.
5-5
Operation Manual
Color/Power Doppler Mode
XX
A protocol is not specified for images in Color Doppler Mode or Power Doppler Mode. Therefore,
the same limitations imposed when measurements are taken in B/W images apply to the
accuracy of the measurements taken in these modes.
XX
It is not recommended to use images in Color/Power Doppler Mode for measurement of
accurate blood flow velocity.
XX
The amount of blood flow is calculated based on the average velocity rather than the peak
velocity.
XX
In all applications, the amount of blood flow is measured in PW/CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Cursor Position
XX
All measurements are affected by input data.
XX
To ensure accurate positioning of the cursor:
Adjust the images on the screen so that they are displayed at maximum granularity.
Use the front edge or boundary point of a probe to make the start and end points of a
measurement object more distinct.
Make sure that the probe direction is always aligned during measurement.
5-6
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Accuracy Table
The following tables show the accuracy of the measurements available using the product. Ensure that
the results of measurement accuracy checks are kept within the ranges specified in the table. Except for
certain applications or probes, the following accuracy ranges should be maintained for measurement of
a straight distance.
NOTE: To ensure accurate measurements, an accuracy check should be performed at least once
per year. If the measurement accuracy falls outside the ranges specified in the following table,
contact Samsung Medison Customer Service.
2D Mode
Measurements
System Tolerance
(Whichever is greater)
Test
Methodology
Accuracy
Based on
Range
Axial Distance
< ± 4% or 2mm
Phantom
Acquisition
0.01 – 25 cm
Lateral Distance
< ± 4% or 2mm
Phantom
Acquisition
0.01 – 35 cm
Axial Resolution
< ± 4% or 3mm
Phantom
Acquisition
0.01 – 25 cm
Lateral Resolution
< ± 4% or 3mm
Phantom
Acquisition
0.01 – 35 cm
M Mode
Measurements
System Tolerance:
(whichever is greater)
Test
Methodology
Accuracy
Based on
Range
Depth
< ± 5% or 3 mm
Phantom
Acquisition
1 ~ 25 cm
Time
< ± 5%
Signal generator
Acquisition
0.01 - 11.3 sec
Spectral Doppler Mode
Doppler
Measurement
System Tolerance
(whichever is greater)
Methodology
Range
Velocity
< ± 15%
Acquisition
PW:0.1cm/s - 8.8 m/s
CW:0.1cm/s - 19.3 m/s
Time
< ± 5%
Acquisition
10 ms - 9.44 s
5-7
Operation Manual
Basic Measurements
Press the Caliper button on the control panel.
NOTE: Take basic measurements of distance and area regardless of the application. For
information on measurements for each application, please refer to “Measurements by Application”
in this chapter.
The available measurement methods vary depending on the current diagnosis mode. Please refer to the
following table:
Measurement
Distance Measurement
Circumference and Area
Measurement
Volume Measurement
Diagnosis Mode
Measurement Method
2D, M, D
Distance
Line Trace
Angle
%StD
M
M Distance
D
D Velocity
D A/B
D Trace
D Time
2D, M, D
Ellipse
Area Trace
%StA
2D, M, D
3 Distance Vol.
MOD Vol.
1 Distance Vol.
Ellipse Vol.
Dist. + Ellipse Vol.
[Table 5.1 Basic Measurements by Diagnosis Mode]
5-8
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Basic Measurement Operations
The following is the information on common button operations for basic measurements:
■■Changing/selecting measurement method
Select a measurement method on the touch screen. The menu items that can be selected on the
touch screen vary according to diagnosis mode. The selected measurement method is displayed in
the User Information area.
■■Adjusting font size
Adjust the font size by tapping Font Size on the touch screen or rotating the [4] dial-button.
Select a font size for the measurement results from between 10 and 30 using the dial-button.
■■Canceling measurement results
XX
Undo: Tap Undo on the touch screen. The current measurement is canceled and you can
measure it again.
NOTE: Undo can be used only for [3 Distance Vol.] and [Dis.+ Ellipse Vol.] among the volume
measurement items.
XX
Delete: When you tap Delete on the touch screen or rotate the [5] dial-button , part of the curve
being traced is deleted.
NOTE: The back trace function can be used only for [Line Trace], [Area Trace], and [MOD Vol.]
among the distance measurement items.
■■Setting the display position of the measurement results
Select Move or Reset by tapping Result Action on the touch screen or pressing the [6] dial-button .
XX
[Move]: Change the display position of the measurement results. Change the position with the
trackball and then press the Set button.
XX
[Reset]: When you press the dial-button, the display position of the measurement results is reset.
NOTE: When there are multiple pages of measurement results, you can find the desired result
using Move.
5-9
Operation Manual
■■Deleting measurement results
Press the Clear button on the control panel.
■■Printing measurement results
Press the Print button on the control panel.
■■Exiting basic measurements
Press the Caliper button again on the control panel. Or press the Exit button.
NOTE: To change settings such as measurement units, tap Utility on the touch screen and select
Measure Setup > General. For more information, please refer to Chapter 7 “Utilities”.
[Figure 5.1 Caliper]
NOTE: The displayed measurement results vary depending on the settings in Utility > Measure
Setup > General > Caliper.
5-10
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Distance Measurement
Distance
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can specify two points in a 2D
image and measure the straight distance between them.
1. Press the Distance button on the touch screen. “Distance” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify both end points of the
measurement area.
XX
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button.
Tips!
Repositioning Point
Pressing the Update button before pressing the Set button to complete positioning resets the
position of a point just set.
3. Specify both end points and then the distance between them will be measured.
4. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen.
Line Trace
It is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can specify a point in a 2D image
and trace a curve from that point to measure the distance between them.
1. Press the Line Trace button on the touch screen. “Line Trace” is displayed in the user information
area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the start point of the
measurement area.
XX
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button.
3. Use the trackball to draw the desired curve and then press the Set button to set the end point.
Tips!
Editing Curve
Before pressing the Set button to specify the end point, you can rotate the [5] Delete dial-button
on the softmenu to delete a part of the curve being traced.
4. Specify both end points and then the length of the curve will be automatically measured.
5-11
Operation Manual
Angle
A basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. Specify two straight lines in a 2D image
and measure the angle between them.
1. Tap the Angle button on the touch screen. “Angle” will appear in the user information area.
2. Draw two straight lines. For information on drawing a straight line, please refer to ‘Distance.’
3. The angle between two lines will be calculated and displayed on the screen.
XX
When two angles are calculated, the smaller angle is displayed.
NOTE: You can select and measure 3 point angle or 2 line angle.
%StD
StD stands for Stenosis Distance, which is a basic measurement available in all diagnosis modes. In a
2D image, the diameter of a vessel is measured and the stenosis ratio calculated.
1. Tap the %StD button on the touch screen. “%StD” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Measure the total diameter of a vessel using the Distance measurement method.
3. When a new cursor appears, measure the inner wall diameter of the vessel under stenosis.
4. Calculate %StD with the following equation:
%StD = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance x 100
M Distance
This is a basic measurement that is available in M Mode only. You can specify two points in an M image
and measure the distance, elapsed time and velocity between them.
1. Press the M Distance button on the touch screen. “M Distance” is displayed in the user information
area.
2. Specify two points and then measure the shortest distance between them. The way that it is
measured is the same as in ‘Distance.’
3. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen.
5-12
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
D Velocity
This is a basic measurement that is available in Spectral Doppler Mode only. You can specify two points
in a Spectral Doppler image and measure the distance between them, and the velocity at each point
to calculate the velocity change, time change and acceleration.
NOTE: In a Spectral Doppler image, the X- and Y-axes represent time and velocity, respectively.
1. Press the D Velocity button on the touch screen. “D Velocity” is displayed in the user information
area.
2. Specify two points and then measure the shortest distance between them. The way that it is
measured is the same as in ‘Distance.’
3. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen. The displayed measurement
results vary depending on the settings in Utility > Measure Setup > General > Caliper.
XX
V1: Velocity at Point 1
XX
Time: Change in Time
XX
V2: Velocity at Point 2
XX
Acc: Acceleration
XX
PGmax: Max Pressure Gradient
XX
RI: Resistivity Index
XX
V2-V1: Change in Velocity
XX
S/D: Systolic to Diastolic Ratio
The equations used for D Velocity measurement are as follows:
5-13
Operation Manual
D A/B
This is a basic measurement that is available in Spectral Doppler Mode only. You can specify two points
in a Spectral Doppler image and measure the velocity at each point to calculate the ratio of the velocity
between them.
1. Press the D A/B button on the touch screen. “D A/B” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Specify two points for which to measure velocity.
XX
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button.
3. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen. The displayed measurement
results vary depending on the settings in Utility > Measure Setup > General > Caliper.
XX
V1: Velocity at Point 1
XX
PGmax: Max Pressure Gradient
XX
V2: Velocity at Point 2
XX
V1/V2: The Ratio of Velocity
D Trace
This is a basic measurement that is available in Spectral Doppler Mode only. You can specify a point in
a Spectral Doppler image and trace a curve from that point to calculate the velocity, integral value and
average velocity of blood flow.
1. Press the D Trace button on the touch screen. “D Trace” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Trace a curve. The method for measuring a curve is the same as in “Line Trace.”
3. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The displayed measurement
results vary depending on the settings in Utility >Measure Setup > General > Caliper.
5-14
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
XX
PSV: Peak Systolic Velocity
XX
PGmean: Mean Pressure Gradient
XX
EDV: Edn Diastolic Velocity
XX
VTI: Velocity Time Integral
XX
PI: Pulsatility Index
XX
PHT: Pressure Half Time
XX
RI: Resistivity Index
XX
Acc: Acceleration
XX
S/D: Ratio of PSV to EDV
XX
AccT: Acceleration Time
XX
Vmax: Max Velocity
XX
Dec: Deceleration
XX
Vmean: Mean Velocity
XX
DecT: Deceleration Time
XX
PGmax: Max Pressure Gradient
The equations used for D Trace measurement are as follows:
NOTE: The display of measurement results for D Velocity, D A/B, or D Trace varies according to
application (General, Cardiac).
D Time
This is a basic measurement that is available in Spectral Doppler Mode only. You can specify two bars
on a Spectral Doppler image and calculate the time between them.
1. Tap D Time on the touch screen. “Time” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Set two bars on the spectrum with trackball and the Set button.
3. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen.
5-15
Operation Manual
Circumference and Area Measurement
Ellipse
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the circumference
and area of a circular (elliptical) object in a 2D image.
1. Press the Ellipse button on the touch screen. “Ellipse” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the diameter (axis) of the
measurement area.
XX
Place the cursor at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.
Tips!
Repositioning Point
Pressing the Change button before pressing the Set button to complete positioning resets the
position of a point just set.
3. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse).
XX
Adjust the size using the trackball, and press the Set button.
4. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen.
The equations used for ellipse measurement are as follows:
Area Trace
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the circumference
and area of an irregular object in a 2D image.
1. Press the Area Trace button on the touch screen. “Trace” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the start point for tracing over
the contour of the measurement area.
XX
Place the cursor at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.
5-16
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
3. Trace the curve so that the measurement cursor returns to the start point, and then press the Set
button.
NOTE: Trace lines must be closed. If you press the Set button before tracing is complete, tracing
may be done over a straight line between the current point and the start point, resulting in a
significant error.
4. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen.
The equations used for Trace measurement are as follows:
%StA
StA stands for Stenosis Area, which is a basic measurement available in all diagnosis modes. In a 2D
image, the area of a vessel is measured and the stenosis ratio (%) calculated.
1. Press the %StA button on the touch screen.. “%StA” is displayed in the user information area.
2. Measure the area of the vessel outer wall using the Area measurement method.
3. When a new cursor appears, measure the inner wall area of the vessel under stenosis.
4. Calculate %StA with the following equation:
%StA = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area ´ 100
5-17
Operation Manual
Volume Measurement
NOTE: Since Dual Mode simultaneously displays two images on the screen, you don’t have to
return to the diagnosis mode to measure volume in Dual Mode.
3 Distance Vol.
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the volume of an
object in a 2D image by using 3 straight lines.
1. Press the 3 Distance Vol. button on the touch screen. “3 Distance” is displayed in the user
information area.
2. Specify two points and measure the straight distance between them. The method for measuring a
line is the same as in “Distance.”
3. Measure the length of the remaining two straight lines as in the above. Measure other two distance
using the same method with 2.
4. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The volume of the object
along with the length of each straight line are calculated.
XX
Press the Undo button on the touch screen to cancel the current measurement and take it again.
The equations used for 3 Distance measurement are as follows:
MOD Vol.
A basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. In a 2D image, the area of an irregular
object and the length of its long axis are obtained to calculate its volume. MOD is an abbreviation for
‘Method of Disk.’
1. Tap the MOD Vol. on the touch screen. ‘MOD’ will appear in the user information area.
2. Draw a contour to measure. The way it is measured is the same as in ‘Trace.’
3. Measure the length of the long axis. The way it is measured is the same as in ‘Distance.’
5-18
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
4. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen.
Tips!
Editing Curves
Before specifying the end point by pressing the Set button, you can delete part of the curve being
traced by rotating the [5] Delete dial-button on the softmenu.
1 Distance Vol.
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the volume of an
object in a 2D image by using only one straight line.
1. Press the 1 Distance Vol. button on the touch screen. “1 Distance” is displayed in the user
information area.
2. Specify two points and measure the straight distance between them. The method for measuring a
line is the same as in “Distance.”
3. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The volume of the object
along with the length of the straight line are calculated.
The equations used for 1 Distance measurement are as follows:
Ellipse Vol.
A basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. In a 2D image, the volume of a conical
object is measured using an ellipse.
1. Tap the Ellipse Vol. on the touch screen. ‘Ellipse’ will appear in the user information area.
2. Set the size of the ellipse. The way it is measured is the same as in ‘Ellipse.’
3. Once measurement is done, the result is displayed on the screen.
The following equation is used for ‘Ellipse’ measurement:
5-19
Operation Manual
Dist. + Ellipse Vol.
This is a basic measurement that is available in all diagnosis modes. You can measure the volume of an
object in a 2D image by using one straight line and one circle (ellipse).
1. Tap the Dist. + Ellipse Vol. button on the touch screen. “Distance + Ellipse” is displayed in the user
information area.
2. Specify two points and measure the straight distance between them. The method for measuring a
line is the same as in “ Distance.”
3. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse). The method for measuring a circle (ellipse) is the same as in
“Ellipse.”
4. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen.
XX
D: The length of a straight line
XX
Area: The area of a circle
XX
Long: The length of the long axis in an ellipse
XX
Vol.: Volume
XX
Short: The length of the short axis in an ellipse
XX
Press the Undo button on the touch screen to cancel the current measurement and take it again.
The equations used for Distance + Ellipse measurement are as follows:
5-20
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Calculations by Application
Press the Calculator button on the control panel.
Things to note
Before Taking Measurements
■■Register Patient
Make sure that the currently registered patient information is correct. If the patient is not registered,
press the Patient button on the control panel.
Use the Study Information tab to enter or change a patient’s information per diagnosis item.
For the Patient Information menu and entry method, refer to ‘Patient Information’ in Chapter 3.
“Starting Diagnosis”.
■■Check Probe, Application & Preset
XX
Check the probe name and application that are displayed in the title bar. Press the Probe button
on the control panel to use another probe or application.
XX
Check the preset settings in the Probe Selection screen.
■■Measurement Menu Settings
Set the related menus for convenient measurement. You can specify how an area and volume can
be calculated. Please refer to the “Setting Measurements” section in Chapter 7 “Utilities” for more
information on measurement menus and settings.
Measurement Operations
The following gives information on the common button operations for measurements:
■■Select Measurement Item
Select a measurement item from the menu on the touch screen.
5-21
Operation Manual
■■Change Measurement Method
Press the Change button on the control panel. If the current measurement item can be measured
in more than one way, the measurement method is changed. The current measurement method is
displayed in the user information area. Once measurement is started, it cannot be changed.
■■Delete Trace Line
Delete a trace line by moving the trackball in the opposite direction. You can use this function only
when the doppler spectrum is traced
■■Delete Measurement Result
Press the Clear button on the control panel.
NOTE: The measurement results are deleted from the screen but still shown on the report for the
corresponding application.
■■Print Measurement Result
Press the Print button on the control panel.
■■Exit Measurement
Press the Calculator button again. Or press the Exit button.
■■End Diagnosis
Press the End Exam button on the control panel. The diagnosis for the current patient ends and all
measurement results are saved.
■■Package
Select a measurement package by tapping Package on the touch screen or rotating the [1] dialbutton.
■■Laterality
Select left (Lt) or right (Rt) for the position of the measurement item by tapping Laterality on
the touch screen or rotating the [2] dial-button . This appears on the soft menu only for specific
packages.
5-22
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
■■Trace Direction
Set the trace direction of the doppler spectrum by tapping Trace Direction on the touch screen
or rotating the [3] dial-button . This is enabled only after Auto or Limited Trace is carried out in
Spectral Doppler Mode.
XX
Up: Only the + part of the doppler waveform is traced.
XX
Down: Only the - part of the doppler waveform is traced.
XX
All: All parts of the doppler waveform are traced.
■■Threshold
Set threshold by tapping Threshold on the touch screen or rotating the [4] dial-button . This is
enabled only after Auto or Limited Trace is carried out in Spectral Doppler Mode. Adjusting the
threshold facilitates contouring of the doppler spectrum.
■■HR Cycle
Set the heart rate (HR) cycle by tapping HR Cycle on the touch screen or rotating the [5] dial-button.
This is enabled only when ‘HR’ is selected for the measurement item.
■■Result Action
Set the position of the measurement result by tapping Result Action on the touch screen or
rotating the [6] dial-button .
XX
Move: Changes the location where measurement result values are displayed. Change the
location using the trackball and press the Set button.
XX
Reset: Resets the location where measurement result values are displayed.
Tips!
When there are too many measurement data and they cannot all be displayed on the screen at one
time, the Move button can be used to navigate through the measurement data.
■■Undo
Cancel the last measurement by tapping Undo on the touch screen.
■■Report
Tapping Report on the touch screen switches to the Report screen.
5-23
Operation Manual
Common Measurement Methods
This section provides information on the common measurement methods used for applications.
Measurements in Spectral Doppler Mode
In general, if you trace a Doppler spectrum, you can obtain results for various measurement items
automatically. There are 3 ways to trace a Doppler spectrum.
ACCUVIX XG also allows you to select a specific item under the measurement menu and take
measurements individually without tracing a Doppler spectrum.
■■Auto Trace
A spectrum is traced automatically. It is enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral Doppler
Mode.
1. Press Auto Trace in the measurement menu.
2. The system traces a spectrum automatically.
3. When Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.
5-24
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Tips!
Things to consider for Doppler Spectrum Auto Trace
The state of a Doppler spectrum may affect measurement results. Please see the following:
Causes for Trace Failure
If Gain is changed for a Doppler image in the Freeze state, Contour Trace and Peak Trace will not
XX
work.
If there is little or no noise in an image without a spectrum, Contour Trace will not work.
XX
If there is severe noise in an image, Contour Trace will not work.
XX
If the Clutter filter is set too high, Auto Trace or Limited Trace may not work.
XX
Causes for Inaccurate Peak Trace
If PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) is lower than the velocity of the observation area, aliasing
XX
may occur. If the original signals are separated from aliasing, Trace can be done but the peak
measurement may not be accurate.
If the peak of a spectral waveform is not clear or occurs intermittently, Trace can be done but the
XX
peak measurement may not be accurate.
If the Doppler Gain is set to high or low, it becomes difficult to distinguish spectrums. This may
XX
result in measurement error(s).
If the Wall Filter is set too high, only part of the spectrum is displayed. In this case, Trace can be
XX
done but Peak measurement may not be accurate.
If abnormal noise or artifact occurs, Trace can be done but Peak measurement may not be
XX
accurate.
Misc.
Use of the CW Probe may result in measurement error(s).
XX
Limited Trace is supported only for two-peak spectrums such as Mitral Valve Inflow and Tricuspid
XX
Valve Inflow in the cardiology application.
■■Limited Trace
If you specify a measurement range, a spectrum is traced automatically. It is enabled in the menu
in Spectral Doppler Mode.
1. Press Limited Trace in the Measurement menu. A bar appears allowing you to specify a
measurement area.
2. Specify the measurement range.
XX
Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.
3. The system traces spectrums within the specified range automatically.
4. When Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.
5-25
Operation Manual
■■Manual Trace
A spectrum is traced manually. It is enabled in the menu in Spectral Doppler Mode.
1. Press Manual Trace in the Measurement menu. A measurement cursor appears over a spectrum.
2. Trace the spectrum. The measuring method is the same as in “D Trace.”
3. When Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.
■■Itemized Measurement
In the Measurement menu, select an individual item and take a measurement.
1. Press the Calculator button on the control panel after obtaining a desired image.
2. Select a desired item in the Measurement menu. The “+” cursor appears over a spectral
waveform.
3. Position the “+” cursor and press the Set button.
4. The measurement results for the selected item are displayed on the screen.
5-26
Item
Type
Unit
Equation
PSV (Peak Systolic Velocity)
Velocity
cm/s or m/s
EDV (End Diastolic Velocity)
Velocity
cm/s or m/s
TAMV (Time Average Mean Velocity)
Velocity
cm/s or m/s
TAPV (Time Average Peak Velocity)
Velocity
cm/s or m/s
PGmean (Mean Pressure Gradient)
Calculation
mmHg
PGmax (Max Pressure Gradient)
Calculation
mmHg
4 × PSV 2
S/D (Ratio of PSV to EDV)
Calculation
Ratio
(PSV / EDV)
D/S (Ratio of EDV to PSV)
Calculation
Ratio
EDV /PSV
RI (Resistivity Index)
Calculation
Ratio
(PSV – EDV) / PSV
PI (Pulsatility Index)
Calculation
Ratio
(PSV – EDV) / TAPV
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
NOTE: If the measurement item is OB or Vascular, you can select the measurement item in
doppler spectrum.
You can select this from Measure Setup > OB > General > OB Doppler Results or Measure setup >
Vascular > Doppler Results.
Tips!
Taking measurements via Auto Calc
You can use Auto Calc to take measurements on predetermined item(s).
Items measured are as follows. For information on setting measurement item(s), please refer to “Auto
Calc” in Chapter 7 ‘Utilities.’
Peak Systolic Velocity (PSV)
XX
Time Averaged Mean Velocity (TAMV)
XX
End Diastolic Velocity (EDV)
XX
Diastole / Systole Ratio (D/S)
XX
Time Averaged Peak Velocity (TAPV)
XX
Max Pressure Gradient (PGmax)
XX
Resistive Index (RI)
XX
Mean Pressure Gradient (PGmean)
XX
Pulsatility Index (PI)
XX
Velocity Time Integral (VTI)
XX
Systole / Diastole Ratio (S/D)
XX
PeakA
XX
Volume Flow Measurement
Select Volume Flow in the measurement menu.
Volume Flow allows you to measure and calculate an area or distance. For information on distance or
area measurements, please refer to “Basic Measurements.” The TAMV (Time Avg. Mean Velocity) value
is automatically measured.
■■Vesl. Area (Vessel Area)
Measure the area of a blood vessel and calculate TAMV and Volume Flow.
■■Vesl. Dist. (Vessel Distance)
Measure the width of a blood vessel and calculate TAMV and Volume Flow.
5-27
Operation Manual
Stenosis Measurement
You can measure the stenosis of each blood vessel system by measuring and calculating an area or
distance.
■■% StA
Measure the area of the inner and outer walls of a blood vessel. StA stands for Stenosis Area.
1. Select the %StA menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the area of the vessel’s outer wall using the Circ/Area measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the area of the vessel’s inner wall under stenosis.
%Stenosis Area. = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area ´ 100
■■% StD
Measure the diameter of a blood vessel. StD stands for Stenosis Distance.
1. Select the %StD menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the total diameter of a blood vessel using the Distance measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the diameter of the vessel’s inner wall under stenosis.
%Stenosis Dist. = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance ´ 100
Heart Rate Measurement
■■HR (Heart Rate)
You can calculate heart rates for a certain period of time.
1. Select HR in the measurement menu. A bar appears allowing you to specify a measurement
area.
2. Specify the measurement range.
XX
Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.
3. The system measures the heart rate within the specified range automatically. The measurement
results are displayed on the screen.
5-28
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
OB Calculations
NOTE:
Ductus Venosus, Fetal HR can only be measured in Doppler Mode.
XX
For information on basic measurements, please refer to “Basic Measurements” in this chapter.
XX
For references on measurement items, please refer to “Reference Manual – Part 1.”
XX
Before Taking OB Measurements
■■OB Basic Information
Enter the information required for OB diagnosis in the Patient Information window. The basic OB
information includes LMP (Last Menstrual Period) and Gestations.
Once LMP is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) and GA (Gestational Age) are calculated
automatically. LMP is required for the calculation of values such as EDD and SD in obstetrics
measurement.
XX
EDD(LMP) = LMP + 280 days
XX
GA(LMP) = Current System Date - LMP
When you input Ovulation Date, it creates LMP and GA(LMP), EDD(LMP) automatically.
LMP=Ovul.Date-14
Regardless of LMP, enter the EDD with a physician’s opinion into Estab. Due Date. If LMP is not
available, when Estab. Due Date is modified, LMP is automatically calculated and the “C” mark is
displayed next to the LMP information.
A maximum of four fetuses can be entered in the Gestations menu. The default value is ‘1’. In the
case of twins, enter ‘2’.
For further information about patient information menus and how to input patient information,
refer to “Entering Patient Data” in Chapter 3 “Setting”.
■■OB Measurement Menu Settings
Set up the GA Equation, GA Table and OB measurement menus that are used in obstetrics
measurements. The user can manually write, back up or restore GA Tables. For more information on
the GA Equation and Table, refer to the Reference Manual.
5-29
Operation Manual
NOTE:
It will be convenient to set the function of the User Key 1 and User Key 2 buttons on the
XX
control panel to the two obstetrics measurement items you want to use. Set their functions in
Utility > Setup > User Defined key > User Key Setup.
For twins, distinguish fetuses by specifying them as Fetus A and Fetus B in the Measurement
XX
menu. To change between the fetuses for measurement, press the Change button on the
control panel or the [2] dial-button on the softmenu, or tap Select Fetus on the touch screen.
Refer to the “Setting Measurements” section in Chapter 7 “Utility” for additional information.
Early OB Measurement Menu
When the measurements for the selected items are complete, the measurements and gestational
age are displayed on the screen. The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic
measurement.
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.
[Figure 5.2 Early OB Measurement Menu]
5-30
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement
Menu
Fetal Biometry
Ductus Venosus
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
GS(Hellman)
All
Distance
cm, mm
YS
All
Distance
cm, mm
CRL (Hadlock)
All
Distance
cm, mm
NT
All
Distance
cm, mm
NB
All
Distance
cm, mm
BPD (Hadlock)
All
Distance
cm, mm
FL (Hadlock)
All
Distance
cm, mm
AC (Hadlock)
All
Circumference or automatic
calculation
cm, mm
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
EFW (Hadlock)
All
V All
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
V S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
V D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
V A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Fetal HR
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
5-31
Operation Manual
Automatic Calculation
Some items in the measurement menu are automatically calculated based on measurements of other items.
■■HC
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured BPD and OFD
values.
Exception: when you use Merz reference,
■■AC
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured APD and TAD
values.
Exception: when you use Merz reference,
■■FTA
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured APD and TAD
values.
■■ThC
This is automatically calculated using the following formula, provided there are measured APTD and TTD
values.
NOTE: For reference, the Osaka University /Tokyo University methods are mainly used in Asia, the
Merz method in Europe, and the Shepard/ Hadlock methods on the American continent.
5-32
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
General OB Measurement Menu
When the measurements for the selected items are complete, the measurements and gestational
age are displayed on the screen. The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic
measurement.
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.
[Figure 5.3 General OB Measurement Menu]
5-33
Operation Manual
Measurement
Menu
Fetal Biometry
Fetal Long Bones
5-34
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
BPD (Hadlock)
All
Distance
cm, mm
OFD (Hansmann)
All
Distance
cm, mm
HC (Hadlock)
All
Circumference or automatic
calculation
cm, mm
APD (Bessis)
All
Distance
cm, mm
TAD (CFEF)
All
Distance
cm, mm
AC (Hadlock)
All
Circumference or automatic
calculation
cm, mm
FL (Hadlock)
All
Distance
cm, mm
HUM (Jeanty)
All
Distance
cm, mm
CM
All
Distance
cm, mm
Lat Vent
All
Distance
cm, mm
CEREB (Hill)
All
Distance
cm, mm
NF
All
Distance
cm, mm
Cervix L
All
Distance
cm, mm
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
EFW (Hadlock)
All
HUM
All
Distance
cm, mm
ULNA
All
Distance
cm, mm
TIB
All
Distance
cm, mm
RAD
All
Distance
cm, mm
FIB
All
Distance
cm, mm
CLAV
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vertebral
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement
Menu
Fetal Cranium
AFI
Mid Cereb Artery
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
CEREB
All
Distance
cm, mm
CM
All
Distance
cm, mm
NF
All
Distance
cm, mm
NT
All
Distance
cm, mm
OOD
All
Distance
cm, mm
IOD
All
Distance
cm, mm
NB
All
Distance
cm, mm
Lat Vent
All
Distance
cm, mm
HW
All
Distance
cm, mm
FMF angle
All
Angle
degree
All
All
Distance
cm, mm
Q1
All
Distance
cm, mm
Q2
All
Distance
cm, mm
Q3
All
Distance
cm, mm
Q4
All
Distance
cm, mm
MVP
All
Circumference
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Calculated after area
measurement
%
%StD
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-35
Operation Manual
Measurement
Menu
Umbilical Artery
Rt. / Lt.
Uterine A
5-36
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Calculated after area
measurement
%
%StD
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Calculated after area
measurement
%
%StD
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
AFI (Amniotic Fluid Index)
Measure the amniotic fluid index. Measurements are performed by dividing the pregnant woman’s
abdomen into four parts. The distance between the fetus and the farthest point of each area
is measured. To obtain a specific image from each quadrant plane, press the Freeze button to go
to the diagnosis mode. After obtaining the image, press the Freeze button again to return to the
measurement mode.
Calculating Estimated Fetal Weight (EFW)
When measurements for the following items are complete, the system uses the results to calculate
the estimated fetal weight automatically. For an equation for calculating fetal weight, please refer to
“Estimated Fetal Weight Formula” in the Reference Manual Part 1.
XX
BPD and AC
XX
AC and FL
XX
BPD, FL and FTA
XX
BPD, AC and FL
XX
BPD, APTD, TTD and FL
XX
HC, AC and FL
XX
BPD, APTD, TTD and SL
XX
BPD,HC, AC and FL
XX
BPD and TTD
XX
AC
Continuous Measurement / Review for EFW Calculation
You can measure OB item(s) continuously for EFW calculation.
Tips!
Before starting measurement:
1. Make sure that the User Key has been set for EFW continuous measurements. You can set EFW
continuous measurements by User Key from [Utility] > [Setup] > [User Defined key] > [User Key
Setup] > [User Key]. For more information, see ‘Peripheral Device Settings’ in Chapter 3 “Setup”.
2. Check EFW Reference. You can select or change it from [Utility] > [Measure Setup] > [OB] > [Tables]
> [Fetal weight] > [EFW Equation].
NOTE: This function is not available in 3D mode. .
■■How to measure
1. Press the User Key1 (or User Key 2) on the control panel. OB menu and measure items are
5-37
Operation Manual
displayed on the screen.
2. Measure the items for EFW calculation using trackball and the Set button.
3. Press the Freeze button to finish the first measurement.
4. Press the Freeze button to measure the next items.
5. When you finish the measurement for all items, the result will be displayed on the monitor.
5-38
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
See following table;
Reference
Measure Item (by Order)
Campbell
AC
Hadlock
BPD→AC
Hadlock1
AC→FL
Hadlock2
BPD→AC→FL
Hadlock3
AC→FL→HC
Hadlock4
BPD, HC→AC→FL
Hansmann
BPD→TTD
Merz
BPD→AC
Osaka
BPD→FTA→FL
Shepard
BPD→AC
Shinozuka1
BPD→AC→FL
Shinozuka2
BPD→APTD, TTD→SL
Shinozuka3
BPD→APTD, TTD→FL
Ferrero
AC→FL
Higginbottom
AC
Thurnau
BPD→AC
Warsof
BPD→AC
Weiner1
AC→HC
Weiner2
AC→F→HC
Woo
BPD→AC→FL
■■Review the Result of EFW Calculation
1. Press the User Key 1 (or User Key 2) on the control panel. Measured items of EFW Calculation
and its results are displayed on the screen.
2. To remove the results, press the Clear button on the control panel.
5-39
Operation Manual
Gynecology Calculations
NOTE:
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
XX
Measurement Methods’.
For references on measurement items, see the Reference Manual – Part 2.
XX
Before Taking GYN Measurements
Enter the information required for GYN diagnosis in the Patient Information screen. Basic Information
for gynecology includes Gravida, Para, Aborta, Ovul.Date, Day of Cycle and Ectopic.
Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.
[Figure 5.4 GYN Measurement Menu]
5-40
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Uterus
Rt. / Lt. Uterine A
Rt. / Lt. Ovary
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Endo. Thick
All
Distance
cm, mm
Uterine Tumor 1 All
All
Distance
cm, mm
Uterine Tumor 1 L
All
Distance
cm, mm
Uterine Tumor 1 H
All
Distance
cm, mm
Uterine Tumor 1 W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Cervix All
All
Volume
ml
Cervix L
All
Distance
cm, mm
Cervix H
All
Distance
cm, mm
Cervix W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Cervical Tumor All
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
ml
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
All
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
5-41
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Rt. / Lt. Ovary
Rt. / Lt. Follicles
Endometrial
Rt. / Lt. Cyst
Pericystic
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Ovarian Mass All
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
ml
Ovarian Mass L
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ovarian Mass H
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ovarian Mass W
All
Distance
cm, mm
1 ~ 12
All
Volume calculated after
distance measurement
cm, mm and
ml
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
All
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Most of the gynecology measurements are distance measurements and volume measurements based
on the distance measurement results. If multiple images, such as long axis images and transverse axis
images are needed, press the Freeze button to switch to Scan Mode and obtain images from another
perspective.
5-42
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Cardiac Calculations
NOTE: Cardiac measurement is an optional item.
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.
NOTE:
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
XX
Measurement Methods’.
For references on measurement items, see the Reference Manual – Part 1.
XX
■■Dist20
Traces the cardiac circumference and then draw the cardiac axis. The system automatically draws 20
straight lines perpendicular to the axis and calculates its volume.
NOTE:
In Dual 2D Mode, two images can be viewed simultaneously.
XX
For RVAWd, RVIDd, RVAWs, and RVIDs, see the LV measurement method.
XX
MPA Diam, RPA Diam, and LPA Diam are measured under Aortic Valve Level in Parasternal
XX
Short Axis.
C Mode is mainly used for measuring reverse cardiac blood flow.
XX
As PISA-Radius or PISA-Alias Vel. measurements require Velocity values, you have to select
XX
color display for Velocity or Vel + Var in C Mode. For more information, see the ‘Color Doppler
Mode’ section in Chapter 4. “Diagnosis Mode”.
Tissue Doppler can be measured in TDI Mode.
XX
5-43
Operation Manual
Adult Echo - Chamber Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.5 Adult Echo - Chamb Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
LV (2D)
LV (M)
5-44
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All LVd (2D)
All
Continuous
measurement
IVSd
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDd
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWd
All
Distance
cm, mm
All LVs (2D)
All
Continuous
measurement
IVSs
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDs
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWs
All
Distance
cm, mm
All LV (M)
M
Continuous
measurement
IVSd
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDd
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWd
M
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
LV (M)
LV Vol. (Simpson)
LV Mass
LA
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
IVSs
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDs
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWs
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVET
M
Time
ms
LVPEP
M
Time
ms
LVEDV A4C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVESV A4C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVEDV A2C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVESV A2C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVEDV A4C AL
All
Dist 20
ml
LVESV A4C AL
All
Dist 20
ml
LVEDV A2C AL
All
Dist 20
ml
LVESV A2C AL
All
Dist 20
ml
All
All
Continuous
measurement
LVAd SAX PM Epi
All
Area
cm2, mm2
LVAd SAX PM
All
Area
cm2, mm2
LVLd Apical
All
Distance
cm, mm
LV TE a
All
Distance
cm, mm
LV TE d
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Calculated after distance
measurement
ml
LA Major
All
Distance
cm, mm
LA Minor
All
Distance
cm, mm
LA Diam (2D)
All
Distance
cm, mm
LA / Ao (2D)
All
Distance
cm, mm
LA / Ao (M)
M
Distance
cm, mm
5-45
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
LA
RV (2D)
RV (M)
RV (M)
RA
5-46
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
LA Diam (M)
M
Distance
cm, mm
LAAd A2C
All
Area
cm2, mm2
LAAs A2C
All
Area
cm2, mm2
LAAd A4C
All
Area
cm2, mm2
LAAs A4C
All
Area
cm2, mm2
RVAWd
All
Distance
cm, mm
RVIDd
All
Distance
cm, mm
RVAd
All
Area
cm2, mm2
RVAWs
All
Distance
cm, mm
RVIDs
All
Distance
cm, mm
RVAs
All
Area
cm2, mm2
RV Major
All
Distance
cm, mm
RV Minor
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Continuous
measurement
RVAWd
M
Distance
cm, mm
RVIDd
M
Distance
cm, mm
RVAWs
M
Distance
cm, mm
RVIDs
M
Distance
cm, mm
RVPEP
M
Time
ms
RVET
M
Time
ms
RA Major
All
Distance
cm, mm
RA Minor
All
Distance
cm, mm
RAAd
All
Area
cm2, mm2
RAAs
All
Area
cm2, mm2
RAEDV
All
Dist 20
Ml
RAESV
All
Dist 20
Ml
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Aorta
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Ao Diam (2D)
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao Diam (M)
M
Distance
cm, mm
Asc Ao Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Desc Ao Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao Arch Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao Isth Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao ST Junct Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao Sinus Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-47
Operation Manual
Adult Echo-Valve Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.6 Adult Echo-Valve Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
LVOT
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
HR
PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Cusp
All
Distance
cm, mm
Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
AVA Planimetry
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
PHT
PW
Time
ms
VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
AccT / ET
All
Continuous measurement
Cusp (M)
AV
5-48
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
AV
AR
MV
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
AccT
PW
Time
ms
ET
PW
Time
ms
DecT
PW
Time
ms
R-R Interval
M, PW
Heart Rate
Bpm
VCW
PW
Distance
cm, mm
PISA Rad
C
PISA-Radius
cm, mm
Alias Vel.
C
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
ed Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
PHT
PW
Time
ms
VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
AccT
PW
Time
ms
DecT
PW
Time
ms
HR
PW
Heart Rate
bpm
All MV (M)
All MV (M)
All MV (M)
All MV (M)
Vp
Vp
Vp
Vp
Diam 1
MV Diam 1
MV Diam 1
MV Diam 1
Diam 2
MV Diam 2
MV Diam 2
MV Diam 2
MVA Planimetry
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
E-DT-A
PW
Time-Velocity-Time
Measurement
ms and m/s
E/A
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
PHT
PW
Time
ms
5-49
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
MV
MR
RVOT
PV
5-50
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
AccT
PW
Time
ms
DecT
PW
Time
ms
A Dur.
PW
Time
ms
ET
PW
Time
ms
R-R Interval
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
MR VCW
PW
Distance
cm, mm
PISA Rad
C
PISA-Radius
cm, mm
Alias Vel.
C
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
dp / dt
PW
Calculation after time
measurement
mmHg/s
HR
PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
HR
PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Ann Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
PVA Planimetry
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
PHT
PW
Distance
ms
VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
AccT / ET
All
Continuous measurement
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
PV
PR
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
AccT
PW
Time
ms
ET
PW
Time
ms
DecT
PW
Time
ms
Q to PV Close
PW
Time
ms
R-R Interval
M, PW
Heart Rate
Bpm
VCW
PW
Distance
cm, mm
PISA Rad
C
PISA-Radius
cm, mm
Alias Vel.
C
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
MPA Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
PHT
PW
Time
ms
Distance
cm, mm
VTI
TV
AccT
PW
Time
ms
DecT
PW
Time
ms
HR
PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Ann Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Diam 1
All
Distance
cm, mm
Diam 2
All
Distance
cm, mm
TVA Planimetry
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
E/A
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
PHT
PW
Time
ms
VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
AccT
PW
Distance
ms
5-51
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
TV
TR
TR
5-52
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
DecT
PW
Distance
ms
A Dur.
PW
Distance
ms
Q to TV Open
PW
Distance
ms
R-R Interval
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
VCW
PW
Distance
cm, mm
PISA Rad
C
PISA-Radius
cm, mm
Alias Vel.
C
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
dp / dt
PW
Calculation after time
measurement
mmHg/s
RAP
PW
HR
PW
mmHg
Heart Rate
bpm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Adult Echo-System Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.7 Adult Echo-System Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Plum. Veins
Hepatic Veins
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
S/D
PW
Continuous measurement
S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Dur
PW
Time
ms
S/D
PW
Continuous measurement
S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Dur
PW
Time
ms
5-53
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Shunts
Qp / Qs
Tissue Doppler
5-54
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
MPA Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
LPA Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
RPA Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
PEd
All
Distance
cm, mm
PEs
All
Distance
cm, mm
SVC S/D
PW
Continuous measurement
SVC S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
SVC D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
SVC A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
SVC A Dur
PW
Time
ms
IVC S/D
PW
Continuous measurement
IVC S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
IVC D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
IVC A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
IVC A Dur
PW
Time
ms
Systemic VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
Plumonic VTI
PW
Distance
cm, mm
LVOT Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
RVOT Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
All LV TDI
PW
Continuous measurement
LV Peak E’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
LV Peak A’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
LV Peak S’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
LV AccT
PW
Time
ms
LV DecT
PW
Time
ms
All RV TDI
PW
Continuous measurement
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Tissue Doppler
Tei Index
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
RV Peak E’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
RV Peak A’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
RV Peak S’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
RV AccT
PW
Time
ms
RV DecT
PW
Time
ms
All LV
PW
Continuous measurement
LV TST
PW
Time
ms
LV ET
PW
Time
ms
LV IVCT
PW
Time
ms
LV IVRT
PW
Time
ms
All RV
PW
Continuous measurement
RV TST
PW
Time
ms
RV ET
PW
Time
ms
RV IVCT
PW
Time
ms
RV IVRT
PW
Time
ms
5-55
Operation Manual
Ped Echo Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.8 Ped Echo Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
LV / RV (2D)
5-56
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All LVd (2D)
All
Continuous
measurement
RVIDd
All
Distance
cm, mm
IVSd
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDd
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWd
All
Distance
cm, mm
All LVs (2D)
All
Continuous
measurement
IVSs
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDs
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWs
All
Distance
cm, mm
RVAWd
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVEDV A4C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVESV A4C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVEDV A2C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVESV A2C
All
Dist 20
ml
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
LV / RV (M)
Tissue Doppler
Lt. Inflow
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All LV (M)
M
Continuous
measurement
RVIDd
M
Distance
cm, mm
IVSd
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDd
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWd
M
Distance
cm, mm
IVSs
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDs
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWs
M
Distance
cm, mm
RVAWs
M
Distance
cm, mm
All LV TDI
PW
Continuous
measurement
LV Peak E’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
LV Peak A’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
LV Peak S’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
All RV TDI
PW
Continuous
measurement
RV Peak E’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
RV Peak A’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
RV Peak S’
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
LA Diam (2D)
All
Distance
cm, mm
MV Diam 1
All
Distance
cm, mm
MV E-DT-A
PW
Continuous
measurement
MR Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
MR dp / dt
PW
Calculation after
time measurement
mmHg/s
MV Dect
5-57
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Lt. Outflow
Plum. Veins
Hepatic Veins
Qp / Qs
5-58
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
LVOT Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao Sinus Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao Diam (2D)
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao ST Junct Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Asc Ao Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao Arch Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Ao Isth Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Desc Ao Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
AV Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
AR DecT
PW
Time
ms
AR ed Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
AR PHT
PW
PHT
ms
S/D
PW
Continuous
measurement
S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Dur
PW
Time
ms
S/D
PW
Continuous
measurement
D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Dur
PW
Time
ms
Systemic VTI
PW
MTrace(D)
cm, mm
Pulmonic VTI
PW
MTrace(D)
cm, mm
LVOT Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Qp / Qs
Rt. Inflow
Rt. Outflow
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
RVOT Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
SVC S/D
PW
Continuous
measurement
SVC S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
SVC D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
SVC A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
SVC A Dur
PW
Time
ms
IVC S/D
PW
Continuous
measurement
IVC S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
IVC D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
IVC A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
IVC A Dur
PW
Time
ms
RA Major
All
Distance
cm, mm
TV Diam 1
All
Distance
cm, mm
TR Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
RAP
PW
RAP
mmHg
TV E/A
PW
Continuous
measurement
RVOT Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
PV Ann Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
PV AccT
PW
Time
ms
PR DecT
PW
Time
ms
PR Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
MR dp / dt
PW
Calculation after
time measurement
mmHg/s
5-59
Operation Manual
Vascular Calculations
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.
NOTE:
For information on basic measurements, please refer to “Basic Measurements” in this chapter.
XX
For references on measurement items, please refer to “Reference Manual – Part 1.”
XX
Carotid Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.9 Carotid Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Prox CCA
5-60
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
IMT
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Mid CCA
Distal CCA
Bulb
ECA
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
IMT
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
IMT
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
IMT
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
IMT
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-61
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Prox ICA
Mid ICA
Vertebral A
General
5-62
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
IMT
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
IMT
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area.
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
General
Vol. Flow (LE A)
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vesl. Area.
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Volume Flow(Auto)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
Volume Flow(D)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
TAMV
PW
Spectrum Trace
cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vesl. Area.
All
Area
cm2, mm2
5-63
Operation Manual
Auto IMT (Optional)
This function allows you to take IMT measurement easily and quickly.
NOTE:
Auto IMT is available only under the following conditions:
Probe: Linear Probe
XX
Application: Vascular
XX
Diagnosis Mode: 2D, C or PD Mode(but the button is enabled in 2D menu )
XX
Auto IMT Screen
■■Risk Color Bar
It is shown in colors based on the IMT thickness. If the thickness is <= 0.5 mm, the entire bar is shown
in green. If the thickness is >= 1.1 mm, the entire bar is shown in red. For a thickness between these
values, it is shown in the corresponding color.
■■Rular and Range Bar
Use the trackball and Set button to specify the location and range at which IMT will be measured.
XX
Rular: The grid unit is 10 mm. This option is used when a vessel is lying laterally. At the
measurement location, press the Set button to take IMT measurement at 10 mm interval.
XX
Range Bar: This option is used when a vessel is not lying laterally, or the length of a specific
segment is measured. Press and hold the Set button at the start point, and then drag the
trackball to specify the end point.
■■Intima and Adventitia Pair
XX
Between the Near and Far zones, the one with the higher QI is automatically selected as a
measurement value and it is represented by the color of the Risk Color Bar.
XX
A pair with lower QI is represented in dark sky blue.
XX
Press the Update button on the control panel to move the Near and Far zones that are
automatically selected with QI. The measurement value and color presentation are also changed.
However, if QI is 0, it will not be changed.
5-64
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
■■Measure Result Table
XX
Max: The maximum thickness of the Intima/Adventitia pair.
XX
Mean: The average thickness of the Intima/Adventitia pair.
XX
SD : Standard Deviation
XX
QI: The distance ratio of the measured point in a distance for Quality Index measurement.
XX
Points: The total number of the measured Intima/Adventitia pairs.
[Figure 5.10 Auto IMT]
5-65
Operation Manual
Auto IMT Measurement
1. After checking the probe, application and preset, start carotid measurement.
2. If the desired images are obtained, press Freeze. Use the trackball to select an image for IMT
measurement.
3. Press the Auto IMT on the touch screen. The Auto IMT screen will appear.
XX
If scanning is performed when the center of the vessel is aligned with the center of the image
area, IMT measurement starts automatically.
4. Use the trackball and the Set button to set a location for IMT measurement.
Tips!
Operation #1, #2
If Operation #1, #2 in the user information area is followed, IMT measurement can be taken more
easily.
XX
Select a point between Near and Far.
XX
If the vessel image quality is poor, select an area that is close to the Intima to be measured.
XX
If a detailed area has to be selected, use Range Bar.
XX
Press Space Bar in the keyboard to turn on/off the Intima and Adventitia Marker.
5. Once the measurement location is set, measurement values are listed in a table.
Auto IMT Measurements Analysis
1. Tap Analysis on the touch screen. The Analysis screen appears.
2. Select the desired analysis among Framingham / CHD, Risk Factor, Normal IMT, and User Graph
using the trackball and the Set button.
XX
A bar corresponding to the measurement result is displayed on each graph. However, no bar is
displayed if the measurement result is smaller than Framingham / CHD or Risk Factor.
Tips!
User Graph
You can use User Graph to adjust the graph and analyze the measurement results as you want.
3. To finish analysis, tap Analysis again on the touch screen.
5-66
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
The following materials were referred to when analyzing the measurements of Auto IMT.
■■Framingham / CHD
Correlation between the Framingham Risk Score and Intima Media Thickness: the Paroi Arterielle et
Risque Cardio-vasculair (PARC) Study.
Pierre-Jean Touboul, EricVicaut, Julien Labreuche, Jean-Pierre Belliard, Serge Cohen, Serge Kownator,
Jean-Jacques Portal, Isabelle Pithois-Merli, Pierre Amarenco. On behalf of PARC Study participating
physicians.
■■Risk Factor
Mannheim Carotid Intima-Media Thickness Consensus (2004~2006)
P.-J. Touboul, M.G. Hennerici, S.Meairs, H.Adams, P.Amarenco, N.Borstein, L.Csiba, M.Desvarieux,
S.Ebrahim, M.Fatar, R.Hermandez Hernandez, M.Jaff, S.Kownator, P.Prati, T.Rundek, M.Sitzer,
U.Schiminke, J.-C. Tardif, A.Taylor, E.Vicaut, K.S.Woo, F.Zannad, M.Zureik
■■Normal IMT
Simon A, Gariepy J, Chironi G, Megnien JL, Levenson J: Intima-media thickness: a new tool for
diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular risk. Journal of Hypertension 20:159-169, 2002
[Figure 5.11 Analysis]
5-67
Operation Manual
Saving Auto IMT Measurement Values
1. Select the direction of the measurement site by tapping Direction on the touch screen or using
the [1] dial-button.
2. Select the position of the measurement site by tapping Position on the touch screen or using the
[2] dial-button.
3. Select the name corresponding to the measurement site by tapping it on the touch screen. When
you press the button, the measurement values are saved and the Auto IMT measurement mode
finishes. The details are displayed on the screen.
UE Artery Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.12 UE Artery Measurement Menu]
5-68
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Subclabian A
Axillary A
Brachial A
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-69
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Radial A
Ulnar A
SPA
5-70
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
General
Vol. Flow
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
HR
PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Volume Flow(Auto)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
Volume Flow(D)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
TAMV
PW
Spectrum Trace
cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vesl. Area.
All
Area
cm2, mm2
5-71
Operation Manual
LE Artery Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.13 LE Artery Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
CIA
IIA
5-72
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
IIA
EIA
CFA
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-73
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
SFA
DFA
Popliteal A
5-74
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
ATA
PTA
Peroneal A
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-75
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
DPA
Metatarsal A
Digital A
5-76
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
General
Vol. Flow
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Area
%
%StD
All
Distance
%
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
HR
PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Vol. Flow(Auto)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
Vol. Flow(D)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
TAMV
PW
Spectrum Trace
cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vesl. Area.
All
Area
cm2, mm2
5-77
Operation Manual
UE Vein Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.14 UE Vein Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Internal Jugular V
Innominate V
Subclavian V
5-78
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Axillary V
Brachial V
Basilic V
Radial V
Ulnar V
General
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
5-79
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Vol. Flow
5-80
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Vol. Flow(Auto)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
Vol. Flow(D)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
TAMV
PW
Spectrum Trace
cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
LE Vein Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.15 LE Vein Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
CIV
IIV
EIV
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-81
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
CFV
PFV
SFV
GSV
Popliteal V
5-82
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
LSV
ATV
PTV
Peroneal V
General
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Dur T
PW
Time
ms
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
5-83
Operation Manual
Fetal Heart Calculations
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. In addition, measurement
items are similar to those for cardiac calculation.
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.
NOTE:
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
XX
Measurement Methods’.
For references on measurement items, see the Reference Manual – Part 1.
XX
Fetal Heart - General Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.16 Fetal Heart - General Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
LV Vol. (Simpson)
5-84
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
LVEDV A2C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVESV A2C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVEDV A4C
All
Dist 20
ml
LVESV A4C
All
Dist 20
ml
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
2D Echo
CTAR
Fetal M-mode
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Asc Ao
All
Distance
cm, mm
MPA Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
Duct Art
All
Distance
cm, mm
LA Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
RA Diam
All
Distance
cm, mm
IVS
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDd
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDs
All
Distance
cm, mm
LVPW
All
Distance
cm, mm
HrtC
All
Circumference
cm, mm
CTAR All (D)
All
Continuous measurement
%
ThD ap
All
Distance
cm, mm
ThD trans
All
Distance
cm, mm
HrtD ap
All
Distance
cm, mm
HrtD trans
All
Distance
cm, mm
ThA
All
Area
cm2, mm2
HrtA
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Fetal M-mode (All)
M
Continuous measurement
cm, mm
IVSd
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDd
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVIDs
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWd
M
Distance
cm, mm
LVPWs
M
Distance
cm, mm
RVDd
M
Distance
cm, mm
5-85
Operation Manual
■■CTAR (Cardio-Thorax Area Ratio)
This measurement is for comparing the sizes of the fetus’ chest and heart. The comparison is made
by obtaining the ThD ap, ThD trans, HrtD ap, and HrtD trans values.
Fetal Heart - Doppler Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.17 Fetal Heart-Doppler Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
MPA
Duct Artriosus
5-86
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Duct Artriosus
Duct Venosus
Asc Aorta
Dsc Aorta
MV
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
All
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
E/A
PW
Velocity
%
E
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
MR Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
5-87
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
TV
IVC
PLI
Tei Index
5-88
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
E/A
PW
Velocity
%
E
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
TR Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Auto Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Limited Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
Manual Trace
PW
Spectrum Trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
All
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
S Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
A Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
D Vmax
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
All
PW
Calculation after
continuous
measurement
TST
PW
Time
ms
ET
PW
Time
ms
Fetal HR
M, PW
Heart Rate
bpm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Urology Calculations
Before Taking Urology Measurements
Set the related menus for convenient measurement.
You can select the volume method for measurement. There are four types of volume method. The
factor value can be set manually for the formulae that need it.
For more information on the measurement menus and settings, please refer to “Setting Measurements”
in Chapter 3 “Settings.”
Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.18 Urology Measurement Menu]
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items are
automatically recorded in a report.
NOTE:
The measurement methods of each menu vary with the Volume Method set at Utility >
XX
Measure Setup > Urology.
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
XX
Measurement Methods’.
For references on measurement items, see the Reference Manual – Part 2.
XX
5-89
Operation Manual
■■3Distance
Calculate a volume by measuring three distances.
Measurement Menu
WG Prostate Vol.
T-Zone Vol.
Bladder Vol.
Residual Vol.
5-90
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Pre All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
Pre L
All
Distance
cm, mm
Pre H
All
Distance
cm, mm
Pre W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Post All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
Post L
All
Distance
cm, mm
Post H
All
Distance
cm, mm
Post W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Renal Pelvis
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
Limited
Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
Manual
Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl.Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl.Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Rt. / Lt. Renal Vol.
General
The measurement for Transitional Zone Prostate Volume, Bladder Volume, Left Renal Volume, Right
Renal Volume are the same as for Prostate Volume.
■■3 Distance * Factor
The same as for “3 Distance.”
5-91
Operation Manual
■■Ellipsoid
Calculate a volume by using the Main Diameter and Beside Diameter values.
Measurement Menu
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
WG Prostate Vol.
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
T-Zone Vol.
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
Bladder Vol.
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
Pre Vol.
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
Post Vol.
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
Renal Pelvis
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl.Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl.Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Residual Vol.
Rt. / Lt. Renal Vol.
General
5-92
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
■■Sum of 20 Disks
After measuring the circumference of a prostate, use the Trackball and the Set button to calculate
the volume by measuring the axis of the prostate.
Measurement Menu
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Rt. / Lt. Renal Vol.
Renal Pelvis
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm, mm
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl.Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl.Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
General
5-93
Operation Manual
Abdomen Calculations
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement..
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.
NOTE:
It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
XX
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
XX
Measurement Methods’.
Abdomen Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.19 Abdomen Calculations Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Liver
5-94
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Gallbladder
Pancreas
Spleen
Bowel
Rt. / Lt. Kidney
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
CBD
All
Distance
cm, mm
GB Wall
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Head
All
Distance
cm, mm
Body
All
Distance
cm, mm
Tail
All
Distance
cm, mm
Duct
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Stomach
Wall
All
Distance
cm, mm
Small Bowel
Wall
All
Distance
cm, mm
Large Bowel
Wall
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-95
Operation Manual
Abd. Vascular Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.20 Abd. Vascular Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
M Portal V
5-96
Item
Mode
Method
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Calculation after area
measurement
%
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
M Hepatic V
Same as above
C Hepatic A
Same as above
R Hepatic A
Same as above
L Hepatic A
Same as above
Unit
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Item
Splenic V
Same as above
Mid Aorta
Same as above
Rt./Lt. Renal A
Same as above
Mid SMA
Same as above
IMA
Same as above
Mid IVC
Same as above
Rt./Lt. Renal V
Same as above
Mode
Method
Unit
5-97
Operation Manual
Small Parts Calculations
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement..
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.
NOTE:
It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
XX
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
XX
Measurement Methods’.
Thyroid Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.21 Thyroid Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Mass 1~5
5-98
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
D
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
Thyroid Vol.
Thyroid Flow
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vel. A
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vel. B
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
5-99
Operation Manual
Breast Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.22 Breast Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Mass1~8
Breast Flow
5-100
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
D
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vel. A
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vel. B
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Testicle Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.23 Testicle Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Mass 1~5
Vol.
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-101
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Testis Flow
5-102
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vel. A
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vel. B
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Superficial Measurement Menu
[Figure 5.24 Superficial Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Mass 1~5
Superficial Vol.
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
All
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
ml
L
All
Distance
cm, mm
H
All
Distance
cm, mm
W
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-103
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Superficial Flow
5-104
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vel. A
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Vel. B
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
TCD Calculations
NOTE:
It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
XX
For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
XX
Measurement Methods’.
General Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement..
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.
[Figure 5.25 TCD Measurement Menu]
5-105
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
ACA
MCA
PCA(P1)
5-106
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Measurement Menu
PCA(P2)
Distal Basilar A
Mid Basilar A
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
5-107
Operation Manual
Measurement Menu
Prox Basilar A
General
Vol. Flow
5-108
Item
Mode
Method
Unit
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Auto Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Limited Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
Manual Trace
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
PSV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
EDV
PW
Velocity
cm/s, m/s
%StA
All
Calculation after area
measurement
%
%StD
All
Calculation after distance
measurement
%
Vesl. Area
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Vesl. Dist
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vol. Flow(Auto)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
Vol. Flow(D)
PW
Automatic calculation
ml/m
TAMV
PW
Doppler spectrum trace
cm/s or m/s
Vesl. Dist.
All
Distance
cm, mm
Vesl. Area.
All
Area
cm2, mm2
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Pediatric Hips Calculations
Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement..
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.
NOTE: For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
Measurement Methods’.
[Figure 5.26 Pediatric Hips Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Item
Mode
Method
Rt. / Lt. Hip Angle
Rt. / Lt. Hip Angle
All
Calculation of angle after
measurement of three straight lines
Unit
5-109
Operation Manual
Measurement Methods
1. Specify the first straight line by using the trackball and the Set button.
XX
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and press the Set button.
Tips on Resetting Point Position
Tips!
Instead of pressing the Set button to confirm the point position, you can press the Change button
to reset it.
2. Repeat the above process to specify two other straight lines.
3. The angle between them will be calculated automatically.
XX
α: The angle made by the first and second straight lines.
XX
β: The angle made by the first and third straight lines.
4. Once measurement is taken, the result is displayed on the screen.
See the table below for Hip Joint Type information:
Type
α
β
1a
60 ≤ α < 90
0 < β < 55
1b
60 ≤ α < 90
55 ≤ β < 90
2a/b
50 ≤ α < 60
0 < β < 90
2c
43 ≤ α < 50
77 ≤ β < 90
d
43 ≤ α < 50
0 < β < 77
3/4
0 < α < 43
[Table 5.2 Hip Joint Type Table]
5-110
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Musculoskeletal Calculations
Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement.
Measured items are automatically recorded in a report.
NOTE: For information on basic measurement methods, see ‘Basic Measurements’ and ‘Common
Measurement Methods’.
[Figure 5.27 Musculoskeletal Measurement Menu]
Measurement Menu
Item
Mode
Method
Shoulder
1~10
Distance
cm, mm
Wrist
1~10
Distance
cm, mm
Knee
1~10
Distance
cm, mm
Ankle
1~10
Distance
cm, mm
5-111
Operation Manual
Report
The measurement results are summarized by application and shown on the screen in a report format.
Viewing Report
Press the Report button on the control panel or tap Report on the touch screen. The Ultrasound measure
Report appears.
The measurement results are summarized by application and shown on the screen in a report format.
NOTE: Only the reports of the applications that have measurement results are shown.
[Figure 5.28 Report Screen]
5-112
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
■■Scroll
Rotate the [2] Scroll dial-button to scroll the report page up and down. The current page is displayed
in Current Page at the bottom of the screen.
Tips!
Moving the report page
You can move the report page using the scroll bar at the right of the screen.
■■Zoom / Fit
XX
Zoom: You can zoom in or out the report page by rotating the [3] Zoom / Fit dial-button. The
zoom rate is displayed in Current Zoom at the bottom of the screen.
XX
Fit: A method for displaying the report page can be set. Select one of the following by pressing
the [3] Zoom / Fit dial-button. The selected method is displayed in Current Zoom at the bottom
of the screen.
XX
Fit Width: The screen is adjusted in line with the width of the report.
XX
Fit Height: The screen is adjusted in line with the height of the report.
XX
Fit Dual Page: Two pages of the report are displayed on one screen.
■■Report For Echo paper
Set the preview of the report in print format.
■■Video Out Mode
Select whether or not to set the report screen size to 1024*768.
5-113
Operation Manual
Editing Report
Tapping Edit Data on the touch screen switches to the report edit screen.You can edit measurement
results or change the way that measurements are displayed.
Click OK to save the changes and close the edit screen. Click Cancel to close the edit screen without
saving the changes. Click Next App on the screen to edit reports for other diagnosis items.
■■Page
Select a diagnosis mode by tapping Page on the touch screen or rotating the [1] dial-button .
[Figure 5.29 Editing Report]
5-114
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Modify Measurements
Use the trackball, the Set button and the alphanumeric keyboard on the control panel to modify
measurements. The values are displayed in grey, indicating that they are modified.
Measurement Display Method
The product allows you to measure one measurement item several times. However, only the first three
measurement results are saved in a report.
When taking the same item more than once, measurements can be displayed in four ways as below:
On the edit report screen, you can specify or change the measurement display method.
■■Avg.
Obtain the average of measurements and display it on the screen.
■■Last
Display the last measurements on the screen.
■■Max
Display the largest value of the measurements on the screen.
■■Min
Display the smallest value of the measurements on the screen.
5-115
Operation Manual
Adding Comment
Tap Comment or Edit Data on the touch screen and press Comment on the Ultrasound Report screen. A
screen in which you can enter opinion appears.
When OK is clicked on the screen, the content is saved and the edit screen ends. If you wish to end the
edit screen without saving changes, click Cancel on the screen. Click Next App on the screen to edit
reports for other diagnosis items.
You can enter comments for the Comment 1 - Comment 4 buttons, and then click the appropriate button
to apply the entered comment.
[Figure 5.30 Comment]
5-116
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
[Figure 5.31 Comment – Touch Screen]
5-117
Operation Manual
Printing Report
Press Print1 or Print2 on the control panel. The report is printed out by a connected printer.
NOTE: You can change the settings for printing measurement reports in Setup > Peripherals >
Print Setup > Measure Report Print. For more information, refer to “Peripherals Setup” in Chapter
7 “Utilities”.
Saving Report
Click Export on the touch screen. When the Export screen appears, save the report in an external storage
device.
When the Export screen appears, set a directory, drive, filename and file format. Click OK on the screen if
you wish to save the report. Click Cancel to cancel saving the report.
[Figure 5.32 Export]
5-118
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Transferring Report
Press Data Transfer on the touch screen. Transfer the report data using an RS232C cable.
To use this button,
1. Connect the RS232C cable with the console.
2. Set Setup > Peripherals > Peripherals > COM as ‘Open Line Transfer’.
NOTE: In order to set a data format to transfer, use Measure Setup > General > Data Transfer >
Serial Transfer. For more information, refer to Chapter 7. ‘Utilities’.
Store SR
The report is stored when you tap Store SR on the touch screen. You can see the stored reports on Exam
View under Patient Information.
5-119
Operation Manual
Edit Template
Tap Edit Template on the touch screen. You can change various settings related to report configuration.
The report preview appears at the top of the screen.
[Figure 5.33 Template Report]
Layout
■■General
Select the basic form of the report.
XX
Full: All measurement values are shown.
XX
Short: Only the final results (Avg., GA, Pctl) of the measurement values are shown.
■■Patient Info.
Select the page range for patient information.
XX
All page: The patient information is displayed on every page.
XX
Only 1st Page: The patient information is displayed only on the first page.
Report
■■Report
Header 1 / 2: Set the content to be displayed in the header of the report.
Footer: Set the content to be displayed in the footer of the report.
■■Title
XX
Ultrasound Report: This is the default title printed on the report. You can change this title.
XX
Institution: Set the title from Setup > General > Title > Institute.
5-120
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
■■Logo
Select whether or not to display the logo at the top of the page.
■■Change Logo
When you tap this button, a dialog window appears. You can select a JPEG or BMP image from a
USB memory or CD-ROM.
NOTE: The file does not appear in the list if the file name is in a language that is not supported by
this product.
■■Show Date in footer
Select whether or not to insert the print date in the report.
■■Black and White
On-screen report will be displayed in black text against a white background.
Print
■■Range
XX
All Pages: All pages are printed. This is the system default setting.
XX
Current Page: Only the current page is printed.
■■Color
XX
Black and White: Black letters on white background. This is the system default setting.
XX
Same as Preview: The report is printed in the same colors as shown in the preview.
NOTE: If the printer type does not match with the report type, a warning dialog appears.
5-121
Operation Manual
Insert Image
Use this function to insert images into the report. When you tap Insert Image on the touch screen, a
window appears in which you can select an image.
[Figure 5.34 Select Image]
1. Select an image from the image list. The selected image is shown in View.
2. You can enter a description in Description. When you press Add, the entered description is printed
at the bottom of the report.
3. When you select an image in Selected Images, the Modify button is enabled and you can modify
the description.
4. Press OK to save the selected images. The selected images appear in the report screen.
5-122
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
Graph
When you tap Graph on the touch screen, the Graph screen appears. You can review the graph and
history. To return to the report screen, tap Report on the touch screen.
NOTE: The graph function can be used only in OB reports.
The list of measured items appears in the left side of the screen. If you select an item, a graph for the
selected item will appear on the screen.
NOTE:
To display a graph, the LMP or Estab. Due Date should be saved under Patient Information, and
XX
the GA table and Fetal Growth table should be enabled.
A graph is created based on the patient ID, LMP and measurement date.
XX
■■Select Graph
Use the Trackball and the Set button to select an item from the list.
■■Display Graph
If the 2 x 2 checkbox is checked, 4 graphs will be displayed in a screen.
Specify a desired graph by checking the checkbox for a measurement item.
■■Pctl. Criteria (Percentile Criteria)
Select from LMP, EstabDD and AUA, GA View.
XX
GA by LMP: GA is calculated based on the maternal LMP.
XX
Estab. Due Date: GA is calculated based on the Estab. Due Date that is entered in the Patient
Information.
XX
AUA (Average US GA): GA is calculated using the average value of several ultrasound
measurements.
5-123
Operation Manual
■■History
The current and past measurements for a fetus are displayed in a concise format.
[Figure 5.35 Graph]
5-124
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
History
Tap History on the touch screen. The past and present measurement values of the fetus are displayed in
table format. You can change the Pctl. Criteria.
[Figure 5.36 History]
Tips!
Standard Deviation & Percentile
Among OB information, the Growth Table and the typical fetal distribution for the same number of
weeks are used to determine the following information:
The normal distribution curve.
XX
The measurements for an actual fetus or a position in EFW distribution.
XX
Whether a distribution point is within the normal range.
XX
The reference number of weeks for the Growth Table can be set to LMP, Estab. DD or Average US GA
under [Pctl.Criteria]. The typical setting is LMP.
When LMP is not known or uncertain, or when the difference between LMP and Average US GA
is substantial, care must be taken, as selecting different [Pctl.Criteria] can result in a significant
difference.
5-125
Operation Manual
The distribution of the number of weeks in the Growth Table for the selected reference is a normal
distribution that is laterally symmetrical around 50% (the average), and it shows the distance
from the average as a deviation. The deviation can be represented by Standard Deviation (SD) or
Percentile.
[Figure 5.37 The distribution of the Growth Table for the selected number of weeks
(m: Average, σ: Standard Deviation)]
When represented by SD, a point near the average indicates a value closer to ±0 SD and a point
away from the average indicates a value closer to the maximum or minimum value. The greater part
of the range falls within ±3 SD, and ±1 SD represents 68.3% of the entire range. Thus it can be seen
that most fetal measurements are tightly clustered around the average value.
The Percentile represents a point in distribution from between 0 and 100 inclusive. Therefore, the
average point is represented as 50 Percentile.
As shown in the figure, the average point corresponds to 0 SD (that is, 50 Percentile). If a point is in
the range between -1 SD and +1 SD, it falls within 68.3% of the entire range. This means that the
point falls within the range between 16 and 84.
Further, if a point is in the range between -2 SD and +2 SD, it falls within 95.5% of the entire range.
Thus, the point falls in the range between 3 and 97.
SD and Percentile are interchangeable. Percentile can be used when a fetal measurement ranking
is desired, and SD can be used when the distance between actual fetal measurements and the
average measurement is sought.
5-126
Chapter 5 Measurements and Calculations
While the range of Growth Table references that are primarily used with OB measurement data
varies depending on the user, the typical range accepted by most users is as below:
1) When references are created based on SD:
2.0 SD - +2.0 SD (when converted to Percentile: 2.28 Percentile - 97.72 Percentile)
XX
1.5 SD - +1.5 SD (when converted to Percentile: 6.68 Percentile - 93.32 Percentile)
XX
1.0 SD - +1.0 SD (when converted to Percentile: 15.87 Percentile - 84.13 Percentile)
XX
2) When references are created based on Percentile:
2.5 Percentile - 97.5 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.96 SD - 1.96 SD)
XX
5.0 Percentile - 95.0 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.645 SD - 1.645 SD)
XX
10.0 Percentile - 90.0 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.288 SD - 1.288 SD)
XX
5-127
Operation Manual
Fetal Description
Tap Fetal Description on the touch screen. This item only becomes active when OB measurement is
available. You can select Normal, Abnormal, Not seen, and Seen for each option. For Placenta Previa,
however, you can select either Yes or No.
[Figure 5.38 Fetal Description]
Closing Report
Tap Exit on the touch screen, or press the Exit button on the control panel.
5-128
Chapter
6
Image Management
‹‹CINE / LOOP...................................................... 6-3
‹‹Annotating Images ........................................ 6-6
Annotation..................................................................................6-6
Body Marker ............................................................................6-12
‹‹Saving, Playing and Transferring Images....6-14
Saving Images..........................................................................6-14
Playing Images........................................................................6-15
Transferring Images ..............................................................6-16
‹‹Printing and Recording Images ................6-17
Printing Images.......................................................................6-17
Recording Images .................................................................6-17
‹‹SONOVIEW.....................................................6-18
Exam Mode...............................................................................6-19
Compare Mode.......................................................................6-21
Exam Tool..................................................................................6-23
Chapter 6 Image Management
CINE / LOOP
Images are automatically saved in the memory during scanning. The saved images can be useful when a
patient is diagnosed and reviewed.
The saved images can be in CINE or LOOP depending on the diagnosis mode.
XX
CINE: Images that are saved in all modes other than M Mode and Spectral Mode.
XX
LOOP: Images that are saved in M Mode and Spectral Mode.
[Figure 6.1 CINE / LOOP]
6-3
Operation Manual
Starting and Finishing Image Review
During scanning, press the Freeze button on the control panel. The scanning is stopped and the
system switches to the image review mode screen.
Press the Freeze button again to return to the scan mode.
How to Review Images
Move the cursor in the Cine or Loop bar in the user information area to review an image. You can search
through saved images by moving the cursor with the trackball. Next to the bar, the total number of
saved images and the number of the current image being reviewed are shown.
■■Select CINE / LOOP
Select an image to play by tapping Cine / Loop on the touch screen. This option appears only when
both CINE and LOOP are available, as in M Mode or Spectral Doppler Mode. Select CINE or LOOP by
tapping the button on the touch screen or by pressing the Change button on the control panel.
The touch screen menu is changed when images are reviewed.
[Figure 6.2 Reviewing Images – Touch Screen]
■■Trim First
Press the Trim First and use the dial-button on the touch screen. You can specify the first frame in
the range in which CINE or LOOP will be saved. After specifying the position of the first frame by
rotating the dial-button or using the Trackball, press the dial-button to save it.
6-4
Chapter 6 Image Management
■■Trim Last
Press the Trim Last and use the dial-button on the touch screen. You can specify the last frame in
the range in which CINE or LOOP will be saved. After specifying the position of the last frame by
rotating the dial-button or using the Trackball, press the dial-button to save it.
■■Cine Speed
Press the Cine Speed and use the dial-button on the touch screen. You can adjust the automatic
playback speed for CINE or LOOP by rotating the dial-button. The allowable range for adjustment is
10-200% in increments/decrements of 10%.
■■CINE Save
Press the CINE Save button on the touch screen. You can save the specified image area by pressing
the dial-button. The saved image appears in the thumbnail list on the screen, and can be reloaded
or replayed in scan mode or SONOVIEW. You can select CINE or LOOP.
■■Cine Play
Press the Play button on the touch screen. You can stop or resume playback of an image by pressing
the button.
Reviewing Images in Multi-Image Mode
Only images in an active area can be reviewed. To review images in another area, change the active
area by using the Dual or Quad button on the touch screen. Alternatively, after pressing Pointer on
the control panel, place the cursor in the area to activate and press the Set button on the control panel.
6-5
Operation Manual
Annotating Images
Annotation
Enter or display a text, an indicator or a BodyMarker on an image. This function can be useful when the
diagnosis area is differentiated or displayed.
Starting Annotation Mode
Tap Annotation on the touch screen. Select Text, Indicator, or BodyMarker.
NOTE: When you select Quick Text for [Utility] > [Setup] > [Annotate] > [Text Setup]> [Option],
it changes to text input mode when you enter a text using the keyboard.
[Figure 6.3 Annotation Mode]
6-6
Chapter 6 Image Management
Typing Text
Tap Annotation on the touch screen and directly enter a text using the keyboard, or by tapping a
predefined text on the touch screen.
You can move the cursor by using the Trackball or the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Text Mode in Soft Menu
[Figure 6.4 Screen Keyboard]
■■Current App.
Display the current application.
■■Change App.
Change the current application using the dial-button. The text list will change depending on the
selected application.
■■Font Size
Specify the font size. Select a value between 10 and 30 by pressing the desired button on the touch
screen or by using the dial-button at the bottom of the touch screen monitor.
■■Page.
Change the current page of the text list.
6-7
Operation Manual
■■Language
Press the Language button on the touch screen and then use the dial-button.
Select the language to display by pressing or rotating dial-button.
NOTE: This button appears on the screen only in a product that supports Asian patient names.
XX
Alpha: Enter in English
XX
Korean: Enter in Korean
XX
Japanese: Enter in Japanese
XX
Chinese: Enter in Chinese
■■Set Home
Set the initial cursor position when Annotation mode starts. Place the cursor on the screen and tap
Set Home on the touch screen.
■■Load Home
When you tap Load Home, the cursor moves to the cursor position set with the Set Home button.
■■Screen Keyboard
Tapping the
button on the touch screen enables the screen keyboard.
XX
Symbol: Tapping Symbol on the screen keyboard displays a screen for entering special
characters.
NOTE: When you select On for [Utility] > [Setup] > [Annotate] > [Screen Keyboard], you can
use the screen keyboard for entering patient information.
■■BackSpace
Characters are erased one by one.
■■Erase All Text
Erases all entered text and moves the cursor back to the previous position.
6-8
Chapter 6 Image Management
■■Erase Last Word
The last entered text is erased. Alternatively, use the F11 button on the keyboard.
■■Erase Last Indicator
Only the last entered indicator is erased.
■■Edit
Tapping Edit on the touch screen switches to Text Edit mode. Tapping Edit again finishes the Text
Edit mode.
Tips!
Text Edit Window
The Text Edit window appears, allowing you to edit the current page. To edit another page, change
the current page using Page and then tap Edit.
[Figure 6.5 Edit Text Mode]
When you select a text to edit on the touch screen, the Text Edit window appears on the monitor.
After entering a text, tap OK to finish editing. Tap Cancel to cancel editing.
[Figure 6.6 Edit Text]
6-9
Operation Manual
NOTE: You can edit the entire page by selecting [Utility] > [Setup] > [Annotate] > [Text Setup] >
[Edit Text]. For more information, refer to Chapter 7 “Utilities”.
Autotext
This function allows you to enter text automatically by using an abbreviation. In this way, you can
enter text easily and quickly. When Autotext is enabled, the autotext list appears on the screen.
[Figure 6.7 The Autotext List]
NOTE: Select [Utility] > [Setup] > [Annotate]> [Text Setup] > [Autotext].
Deleting Text
Press the Clear button on the control panel. All the text entered on the screen will be deleted.
Exiting Text Input Mode
Press Exit button on the control panel or on the touch screen.
6-10
Chapter 6 Image Management
Indicator Mode
You can place an Indicator over an image. This function can be useful when the diagnosis area is
differentiated or displayed. Up to 50 indicators can be entered..
[Figure 6.8 Indicator Mode]
Entering Indicator
1. Tap Annotation on the touch screen and then press the Indicator button to switch to input mode.
2. Select the shape of an indicator on the screen.
3. Move the Indicator to a desired position by using the Trackball.
4. Adjust the Indicator direction by using the Angle dial-button on the touch screen.
5. Adjust the angle degree of the Indicator by using Angle Degree dial-button.
6. Press the Set button to finish. Press the Exit button to cancel.
Tips!
Indicator and Pointer Button
You can choose to enter indicators with Pointer button on the control panel. To use Pointer
button to enter indicators, go to Utility > Setup > User Defined Key > Indicator Select and
select Control Panel. In this case, pointer is controlled with the touch screen button.
Select Touch if you wish to enter indicators by using the touch screen (which is the default
setting).
6-11
Operation Manual
Deleting Indicator
Press the Clear button on the control panel and all Indicators displayed on the screen will be deleted.
Press the Erase Last Indicator on the touch screen to delete the last entered indicator only.
Exiting Indicator Mode
Tap Return on the touch screen to return to the Annotation input window or press the Exit button.
Body Marker
You can place a Body Marker over an image. This function can be useful when the diagnosis area is
differentiated or displayed.
Starting Body Marker Mode
Tap Body Marker on the touch screen. When you tap Body Marker or Annotation > Body Marker
on the touch screen, it switches to Body Marker input mode and Body Markers appear on the touch
screen.
[Figure 6.9 Body Marker Mode]
6-12
Chapter 6 Image Management
Entering Body Marker
1. Body markers will appear on the touch screen menu.
XX
The types of Body Marker shown in the Flexible Soft Menu vary with the diagnosis mode.
XX
A maximum of 30 body markers are displayed on the screen at any one time. When there are
more Body Markers than this, press the Page Change and use dial-button on the touch screen.
2. Press the button on the touch screen for the Body Marker that you want. The Body Marker will
appear in the image.
3. Position the probe cursor on the Body Marker using the Trackball.
4. Press the Angle button and rotate dial-button on the touch screen to adjust the angle of the
probe cursor.
5. To finish entering, press the Set or Exit button on the control panel. To cancel, press the Clear
button on the control panel.
Changing Body Marker Position
1. Press the Change button on the control panel.
2. Move the Body Marker to a desired position by using the Trackball.
3. Press the Change button on the control panel again to confirm the new position.
Deleting Body Marker
Press the Clear button on the control panel.
Exiting Body Marker Input Mode
Press the Exit button on the control panel.
NOTE: You can set the size of body markers from [Setup] > [Annotate] > [BodyMarker]. For
more information, refer to Chapter 7 “Utilities”.
6-13
Operation Manual
Saving, Playing and Transferring Images
Saving Images
WARNING: You must enter the patient ID because all images are saved according to patient
ID. Failure to enter a patient ID may result in a loss of and/or critical error(s) in previously saved
images.
The saved images are displayed on the thumbnail area.
Saving Still Images
Press the Freeze button and then press the Save button on the control panel. If the patient’s
information is not entered, the Patient Information screen will appear. The saved images can be edited
and managed with SONOVIEW.
Saving Multi Frame Images
Save multi frame images by using the User Key or the Store Clip function of the Print 1 and Print 2
keys. For a detailed description of Store Clip settings, refer to Chapter 7 “Utilities”.
In Dual/Quad Mode, CINE in the active area is saved only. Depending on the frozen mode, multi-frame
images can be saved in two ways:
XX
When frozen mode, use the trackball or press the First Pos and Las Pos Knob-button on the
touch screen to specify the range of images to save, and then press the Cine Save button or Clip
store button on the touch screen to save the Cine image.
XX
When in Live mode, press the, images are saved according to the settings. For information on
the settings, please refer to Chapter 3 ‘Setting.
If there is no basic patient information, the Patient Information screen appears when a Cine image is
saved in Freeze Mode, but an image cannot be saved in Live Mode.
If all frames are saved in Live Mode, the saving process is automatically finished regardless of the
settings.
The saved images are added to the thumbnail list in the right.
6-14
Chapter 6 Image Management
Playing Images
The saved images can be played in SONOVIEW or in a diagnosis mode.
Playing Images in SONOVIEW
NOTE: Please refer to “SONOVIEW” in this chapter.
Playing Images in Diagnosis Mode
Use the Pointer button on the control panel. Note that this function is available only when there are
images saved in the thumbnail list.
1. Press the Pointer button and the cursor will appear on the screen.
2. Select an image on the thumbnail area to play on the screen. The selected image is played on
the image area.
In Multi Mode, you can specify a location and play an image. For a 3D image, the 3D View screen will
appear.
6-15
Operation Manual
Transferring Images
ACCUVIX XG allows you to transfer images to the PACS system supporting DICOM. You can transfer all
saved images automatically, or select a desired image and transfer it manually. For information on the
DICOM server settings and DICOM operations, please refer to “DICOM” in Chapter 7 “Utilities.”
Transferring Images in Diagnosis Mode
You can transfer images automatically. Go to Setup > DICOM and transfer images based on the transfer
protocol for the storage server. For more information, please refer to “Setting DICOM” in Chapter 7
“Utilities.”
Transferring Images from SONOVIEW
You can transfer images manually in the following two ways:
■■Sending Exam
Send all images for an exam.
1. Select an exam in the Exam List
2. Press the Send button at the bottom of the screen. All images for the selected exam will be sent.
■■Sending Selected Images
Select a desired image from among the images for an exam and send it out.
1. View an exam in the SONOVIEW screen.
2. Select an image.
3. Press the Send Image to DICOM Storage
images will be sent.
6-16
icon at the bottom of the screen. The selected
Chapter 6 Image Management
Printing and Recording Images
NOTE: Set the function of Print 1 and Print 2 buttons first. Go to Utility > Setup > Peripherals >
Print Key.
Printing Images
Press the Print 1 (or Print 2) button on the control panel. Images are printed via an echo printer. For
information on how to setup a printer, please refer to Chapter 7 “Utility.”
Recording Images
Select VCR in the Utility menu.
NOTE: Please make sure that a VCR is properly connected to the product.
For Regular VCR
Record images by using the record button on the VCR.
or Panasonic MD 835, SONY DVO-1000MD, SONY SVO 9500, JVC BDF
X201, Mitsubishi MD3000
A VCR Counter is displayed on the screen. To connect these VCR via a serial port, specify the VCR Type
and Source under the Peripheral tab in the Setting window.
Press the Print 1 (or Print 2) button on the control panel to record images. Alternatively, press the
Record button on the VCR. To stop the VCR, press the Print 1 (or Print 2) button on the control panel.
6-17
Operation Manual
SONOVIEW
SONOVIEW is an integrated image management program in ACCUVIX XG. It allows you to save, view and
delete images, and export data to a standard PC.
The image file types used in this product follow the international standard DICOM (Digital Imaging and
Communication in Medicine). As a result, the PACS (Picture Archiving Communication System) can be
implemented in the ACCUVIX XG without any additional costs, and it’s easy to exchange image files with
other hospitals or equipment.
This product supports the Bitmap file format (the .BMP extension), which is most commonly used on
standard PCs, ensuring easier exchange of image data.
Starting SONOVIEW
Press the SONOVIEW button on the control panel. The system will switch to the SONOVIEWTM screen.
If there are the saved images available for the current exam, the information and saved images for the
exam appear when SONOVIEW starts.
WARNING: Make sure to register a patient before saving images or using SONOVIEW.
All diagnosis information in the product is saved and managed for each patient ID. As a result,
saving images without entering a patient ID may result in a loss of and/or critical error(s) in
previously saved image.
6-18
Chapter 6 Image Management
Exam Mode
Press Exam in the upper left corner of the screen. The button will appear in yellow.
In the Exam Mode, you can review the current or saved exam.
The Exam Mode Screen
Exams for each patient ID are displayed by date in a tree in the left side of the screen. The numbers in
parentheses represent the numbers of the saved images. To show or hide exams, use the Trackball
and the Set button to select a desired ID.
[Figure 6.10 Exam Mode]
6-19
Operation Manual
[Figure 6.11 Exam Mode - Touch Screen]
Selecting Exam
Use the trackball and the Set button to select a desired exam from the list in the left side of the screen.
The selected exam appears in the list and the saved images for it are displayed on the screen.
■■Reviewing the current exam
Press Current Exam. The current exam and its images are displayed on the screen. This button is
enabled only when the patient ID is registered.
■■Reviewing exams within last 24 hours
Press Continue Exam. Exams that were performed within the last 24 hours, and their images, are
displayed. The first performance date of the exam also appears in the feedback area.
In the loaded exam screen, you can make measurements and enter a text, body marker, or indicator.
■■Reviewing exams prior to the last 24 hours
Press Review Exam. The exams that were performed prior to the last 24 hours, and their images, are
displayed. Other details are the same as for Continue Exam.
■■Ending Continue Exam
Press End Exam.
6-20
Chapter 6 Image Management
Image Scroll
The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the screen. Press the Image Scroll and rotate
the dial-button. Rotating the dial-button to the left displays the previous page image and rotating it
to the right displays the next page image.
However, this button may not be used when the number of exams saved is less than the number of
images that appear in a page under the current layout.
Closing Exam Review
Press Close on the screen. To close all exams in the list, press the Close All button.
Compare Mode
Press Compare in the upper left corner of the screen. The button will appear in yellow.
In Compare Mode, you can select the images relating to an exam to compare and review them.
[Figure 6.12 Compare Mode]
6-21
Operation Manual
The Compare Mode Screen
As in Exam Mode, exams for each ID appear on the screen and images for the selected exam are
displayed in a thumbnail format.
Searching for Exam
As in Exam Mode, click the Exam Search
icon.
Selecting Images
Use the Trackball and the Set button to select an image from the thumbnail list. The selected image
is highlighted in yellow in the list. Select a location on the screen where the image will be displayed,
and then the selected image will appear.
NOTE: Only scan data can be retrieved into the image area.
Thumb Scroll
The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the thumbnail list. Press the Thumb Scroll and
use the dial-button on the touch screen. Rotating the dial-button to the left displays the previous page
image and rotating it to the right displays the next page image.
6-22
Chapter 6 Image Management
Exam Tool
Use the icon or the Knob dial-button on the touch screen. You can perform various tasks with images for
diagnosis.
A: Layout
I: Export Image
B: Exam Search
J: Send E-mail
C: Distance Caliper
K: Delete Image
D: Ellipse Caliper
L: Select All Images
E: Text Annotate
M: Deselect All Images
F: Print Image
N: Device
G: Send Image to DICOM Storage
O: Exit
H: Send Image to DICOM Print
[Figure 6.13 Exam Tools]
Reviewing the Current Exam
Press Current Exam on the screen. The current exam and its images will be displayed on the screen.
Reviewing the Most Recent Images
Press Continue Exam on the screen. The exams and their images for the last 24 hours will be displayed.
The initial exam date (Exam Resumed) for each exam will also be shown in the feedback area.
In the retrieved exam screen, tasks such as measurement taking or entering of text, Body Marker or
indicator can be performed.
■■Load Images into Image Area
The images stored for an exam are displayed in the thumbnail area at the bottom of the image. To
review an image, double-click an image to review in the thumbnail area.
XX
Use the arrow buttons below the thumbnail area to move to the next or previous page in the
thumbnail area.
6-23
Operation Manual
The stored image information is displayed in the feedback area.
NOTE: Only scanned data can be loaded into the image area.
■■Finish Continue Exam
Press the End Exam button on the control panel.
Closing Exam Review
Press Close on the screen. To close all exams in the list, press the Close All button.
Layouts
You can adjust the number of images displayed on the screen. Press the Layout and use the dialbutton or press the button on the touch screen. A maximum of 16 images (4 X 4) can be compared at
the same time.
The numbers shown in the layout section indicate the column and row of an image to display on the
screen. You can change this setting to configure various layouts.
Displaying in Full Screen
Place the cursor on an image and press the Set button twice, and then the image will be displayed in
full screen.
Selecting Multiple Images
While holding down the Ctrl key, use the Trackball and the Set button to select an image. The selected
image is highlighted in yellow.
Selecting All Images
Press the Select All Images (
) icon on the screen. All images saved for the current exam are
selected and highlighted in yellow.
6-24
Chapter 6 Image Management
Deselecting All Images
Press the Deselect All Images (
) icon on the screen. All images are deselected and unhighlighted.
Post-Processing Menu
Press
in the lower left corner of an image, and the post-processing menu will appear. Use the
menu to adjust the image for diagnosis. The effects of post-processing are not saved into the image.
NOTE: CINE images can be only played in the 2 x 2 or less layout.
Reviewing 3D Images
If the saved image is 3D, the 3D indication ( ) appears at the bottom of the image. Press 3D and the
3D View screen will appear allowing you to review the image.
Reviewing CINE
If the saved image is CINE, the playback and search scroll bar appear at the bottom of the image. You
can play, pause, stop or search forward/backward with the scroll bar.
NOTE: CINE images can be only played in the 2 x 2 or less layout.
[Figure 6.14 CINE Scroll Bar]
Searching Exam
Press the Exam Search (
) icon on the screen. The Exam List screen will appear.
In the top part of the Exam List screen, you can set ID and other search conditions and view a summary
of the search results. The search results are displayed in a list on the screen.
The list shows the Patient ID, Name, Age, Gender, Exam Date, Images, Measure, Structured Report (SR),
Stress Echo (SE), Storage Commit (SC), and Lock. When you press one of the fields, such as Patient ID
and Name, the data are sorted by the alphabetic or numeric order of the selected field.
6-25
Operation Manual
You can select an exam from the list and examine, delete or send it. For details, see ‘Printing Images’
and ‘Transferring Images via DICOM’ below.
To select multiple exams, check the Multi Select checkbox.
Measuring Distance
Press the Distance Caliper (
) icon on the screen. You can measure the distance between two
points on an image. Measurement results are not saved.
1. Place the cursor over an image and press the Set button. The image will be resized to its original
size.
2. Measure the desired distance. For information on measurements, please refer to “Basic
Measurements” in Chapter 5 “Measurements.”
3. Press the Exit button on the control panel and then press the icon again to finish measurement.
Measuring Circumference and Area
Press the Ellipse Caliper (
) icon on the screen. You can measure the circumference and area of the
desired area in an image. Measurement results are not saved.
1. Place the cursor over an image and press the Set button. The image will be resized to its original
size.
2. Measure the circumference and area of the desired area. For information on measurements, please
refer to “Basic Measurements” in Chapter 5 “Measurements.”
3. Press the Exit button on the control panel and then press the icon again to finish measurement.
Typing Text
Press the Text Annotation (
) icon on the screen. You can enter text into an image.
1. Place the cursor over an image and press the Set button. The image will be resized to its original
size.
2. Position the cursor on the desired area and enter text.
XX
Font Color: Change the font color.
6-26
Chapter 6 Image Management
XX
Font Size: Change the font size.
XX
Language: Select a language.
NOTE: This button appears on the screen only in a product that supports Asian patient names.
3. Press the Set button to confirm the text.
4. Press the Exit button on the control panel and then press the icon again to finish measurement.
Printing Images
1. Press the Print Image (
) icon on the screen. The Image Print window will appear.
2. Specify Setup and Comment.
3. Press the Print button to print the image. Press Close to cancel.
[Figure 6.15 Image Print]
6-27
Operation Manual
Transferring Images via DICOM
Transfer the selected image and measurement data via DICOM. The icon is enabled only when an
image(s) is selected. The icon is disabled in a system where DICOM is not enabled.
1. After selecting an image, press the Send Image to DICOM Storage (
DICOM Storage window will appear.
) icon on the screen. The
2. Press the Send button to transfer the selected image to the DICOM server. To cancel saving, press
Close.
[Figure 6.16 DICOM Storage]
Printing via DICOM
You can print the selected images via DICOM. The icon is enabled only when an image(s) is selected.
The icon is disabled in a system where DICOM is not enabled.
1. After selecting an image, press the Send Image to DICOM Print (
DICOM Printer window will appear.
) icon on the screen. The
2. Press the Transfer button to transfer the selected image to the DICOM server and print it. To cancel
saving, press Close.
[Figure 6.17 DICOM Printer]
6-28
Chapter 6 Image Management
Transferring Images
1. Press the Export Image (
) icon on the screen. The Image Export window will appear.
2. Specify various parameters such as directory, drive, filename and file format.
3. Press the Export button to start a transfer. Press the Close button to cancel.
NOTE: The Export function is not activated when the file name and directory are not entered.
[Figure 6.18 Image Export]
Sending in E-mail
1. Press the Send E-mail (
) icon on the screen. The E-mail window will appear.
2. Specify various parameters such as sender and recipient.
3. After selecting an image to attach in the thumbnail list, enter a message.
4. Press the Send button to transfer the selected image. Press the Close button to cancel.
6-29
Operation Manual
NOTE: When email cannot be transferred although the mail server is working properly, please
check the following:
The connection of the LAN cable
XX
E-mail settings at Setup > Utility
XX
If ICMP (ping) is open for the corresponding Mail Server. If ICMP (ping) is closed, the E-mail
XX
function may not work properly.
[Figure 6.19 E-mail]
Deleting Images
Press the Delete Image (
) icon on the screen. Press OK to delete the selected image. Please note
that images for the current patient under diagnosis cannot be deleted.
Storage Manager
Press the Device (
) icon on the screen. The Storage Manager window will appear. For information
on Storage Manager, please refer to Chapter 3 “Setting” in this manual.
Closing SONOVIEW
Press the Exit (
) icon on the screen. Alternatively, you can press the SONOVIEW button or the Exit
button on the control panel to close SONOVIEW.
6-30
Chapter
7
Utilities
‹‹System Settings............................................... 7-3
General ........................................................................................7-4
Display .........................................................................................7-9
Annotate....................................................................................7-12
Peripherals................................................................................7-18
User Defined Key....................................................................7-20
Miscellaneous..........................................................................7-23
Option.........................................................................................7-27
DICOM Setup (Optional)......................................................7-29
Auto Calc....................................................................................7-44
About..........................................................................................7-45
‹‹Measurement Setup.....................................7-46
Touch Menu Design .............................................................7-47
General ......................................................................................7-50
Obstetrics .................................................................................7-59
Cardiac .......................................................................................7-68
Vascular .....................................................................................7-70
Urology ......................................................................................7-71
Fetal Heart ................................................................................7-73
Chapter
7
‹‹Utility...............................................................7-74
Post Curve.................................................................................7-75
ECG...............................................................................................7-81
Histogram..................................................................................7-83
Biopsy..........................................................................................7-85
VCR...............................................................................................7-87
Storage Manager....................................................................7-89
Presets.........................................................................................7-91
Help.............................................................................................7-91
Chapter 7 Utilities
System Settings
This mode is used for system settings. It does not affect image output. The setup may be modified
depending on specific needs or preferences.
1. Press the Utility > Setup button on the touch screen.
2. The Setting screen will appear. Select a tab that has items to specify.
Tips!
Selecting a tab
You can select a tab in either of two ways as desired.
Use the Trackball and the Set button to select a tab.
XX
Press a button on the touch screen.
XX
3. Specify settings for each item.
4. Save and finish the setting. Press the Close button on the monitor screen or the Exit button on the
touch screen or the control panel to switch to scan mode. Press Return on the touch screen to go
back to the Utility menu.
[Figure 7.1 Touch Screen for Setup]
7-3
Operation Manual
General
Select the General tab in the Setup screen. Or tab General on the touch screen.
You can specify general settings such as title settings.
[Figure 7.2 Setup - General]
Title
You can specify information displayed in the title area on the screen.
■■Institution
Enter the name of the hospital/institution where the product is installed.
7-4
Chapter 7 Utilities
NOTE: You cannot input following characters; #, [, ", :, ?, |, \, "
■■Date
The current date is displayed. To change the date, press
.
NOTE:
You cannot change the date and time when a patient ID is registered. To change the date and
XX
time, you should finish the current diagnosis by pressing the End Exam button on the control
panel.
You can select the year from 2006 to 2027.
XX
Tips!
How to set the date and time
1. Click
in the Date (or Time) button.
2. Set the date and time by using the trackball and the Set button on the control panel.
3. If it is properly set, click Apply to apply changes. Click OK to close the Date & Time window. To
cancel, click Cancel or the Exit button on the control panel.
[Figure 7.3 [7.3 Date & Time]
■■Date Format
Specify the date format. Select a desired date format by pressing the combo button. The date
format that you specify will be applied to various date fields in Patient Information.
■■Time
The current time is displayed.
7-5
Operation Manual
■■Time Format
Specify the time format. Select a desired time format (12 Hour, 24 Hour) by pressing the combo
button.
Clip Store Setting
■■Clip Store Method
Specify the method and range in which an image is acquired and saved.
You can select ECG Beat, Time or Manual. Note that ECG Beat can be selected only when ECG is on.
XX
ECG Beat: Specify the heart beat as 1 – 8 beats.
XX
Time: Specify it as 1 – 50 seconds.
XX
Manual: Save images automatically for 50 seconds after pressing the Store Clip button.
■■Cine Loop Period
XX
Prospective: When Store Clip button is pressed during scanning, the subsequent images are
saved.
XX
Retrospective: When Store Clip button is pressed during scanning, the previous images are
saved.
NOTE: You can set the Store Clip button from Utility > Setup > Peripherals > Print Setup >
Print key > Print 1 / Print 2 or Utility > Setup > User Defined Key > User Key Setup > User
Key > User key 1 / User key 2.
Control
■■Track Ball Speed for Scan Mode
Specify the Trackball speed as Slow, Normal or Fast.
■■Track Ball Speed for Measurement
Specify the Trackball speed as Slow, Normal or Fast. Slower speed allows more precise measurement.
7-6
Chapter 7 Utilities
Scan Mode
■■Simultaneous Mode
This determines whether to enable simultaneous mode in Spectral Doppler Mode.
XX
Off: Select this if you do not wish to use simultaneous mode.
XX
Allow B/PW: Select this if you do not wish to use simultaneous mode in 2D/C/PW modes but do
wish to use it in 2D/PW mode.
XX
Allow B/C/PW: Select this if you wish to use simultaneous mode for both 2D/PW and for 2D/C/
PW.
■■Dual / Quad Operation
Select whether to activate the selected area in Dual or Quad mode.
XX
Auto Unfreeze: When you select Auto Unfreeze, the selected screen is always activated in Dual
or Quad mode.
■■Dual Mode
Select whether to activate the Change Window in Dual Mode.
■■2D/C Live
Select the position of the Color Doppler Mode in 2D/C Live Mode.
XX
Left: Color Doppler Mode is located in the left or upper part.
XX
Right: Color Doppler Mode is located in the right or lower part.
XX
2D/C Live Left-Right Dual Only: The Top-Bottom Dual button disappears when you check this
checkbox.
■■Freeze Action
Select a function to execute when the Freeze button on the control panel is pressed. Available
options are Bodymarker, Caliper, Measure and None.
7-7
Operation Manual
■■End Exam Action
XX
End Exam Only: Pressing the End Exam button on the control panel exits Exam and switches to
the B mode Scan screen.
XX
End Exam + Patient: Pressing the End Exam button on the control panel switches to the Patient
Information screen.
■■Option
You can select multiple items. Select an item with the trackball or the Set button to check or
uncheck it.
XX
Auto freeze: The Scan Mode is frozen automatically when you don’t use the product for 10
minutes.
NOTE: In Live 3D mode, Auto Freeze is activated when you don't use the product for 20 minutes.
XX
HPRF: Select whether to activate HPRF (High Pulse Repetition Frequency) which is supported in
PW Spectral Doppler Mode. Check the checkbox to use the HPRF function.
XX
Color Map Auto invert: Check this checkbox to automatically highlight Color Map. This is only
applied when you change Steer in 2D/C/D mode, C mode, or DPDI mode in PD mode.
XX
M/PW Loop Side by Side: Add Loop Side by Side display in M mode or Power Spectral Doppler
mode.
XX
Width Rescale: Automatically fit the image size to the screen size when the depth of a 2D image
is adjusted. This function can be used only with Linear Probe.
7-8
Chapter 7 Utilities
Display
Select the Display tab in the Setup screen. Or tab Display on the touch screen. Specify display-related
options.
[Figure 7.4 Setup-Display]
Display
■■Option
You can specify more than one item. Use the trackball and the Set button to select a desired item
and check or uncheck it.
XX
VCR Counter: This sets whether to show the VCR Counter on the screen when a VCR is connected
to a serial port. When the counter interferes with an image and is turned off, it will appear during
recording only.
XX
TGC Line: This sets whether to display the TGC line. When TGC Line is off, the TGC line appears
when you set the TGC line, and disappears after 3 seconds.
XX
Image Info: This sets whether to display image information. When the image information
interferes with an image and is turned off, it will not be displayed.
7-9
Operation Manual
XX
Name + Age: Select whether to display the name and age at the patient ID display position.
XX
Name + Birth: Select whether to display the name and birth date at the patient ID display
position.
NOTE: You cannot use ‘Name + Age’ and ‘Name + Birth’ at the same time.
XX
Display Blank: Select whether to display the screen saver. When this is On, you can set the screen
saver activation time from between 1 and 30 minutes.
XX
TI (Thermal Index) Display: Specify the TI to display on the screen as TIs (Soft tissue Thermal
Index), TIb (Bone Thermal Index) or TIc (Cranial bone Thermal Index).
■■Doppler Axis
Select the axis scale unit in Spectral Doppler Mode.
XX
Velocity: Specify the Doppler axis scale unit in cm/s (m/s).
XX
Frequency: Specify the Doppler axis scale unit in kHz.
■■LMP / GA Display
Specify how the LMP, GA and EDD entered in the Patient Information screen will be displayed on the
monitor screen. Select two from LMP, GA and EDD.
XX
Information Bar (Replace ID): Replace the ID in the title area.
XX
Information Bar (Replace Name): Replace the patient name in the title area.
XX
Information Bar (Replace App.): Replace the application in the title area.
XX
Measure Result: Displayed along with measurement results after measurement.
XX
None: Not displayed on the screen.
7-10
Chapter 7 Utilities
Font
■■Font
Specify the target for which you want to set the font. Choose from Document Font and Measure
Result Font.
■■Font Name
Select the font type to use.
■■Font Size
Select the font size to use.
■■Font Color
Select the font colour to use.
■■Preview
Preview window displays the font you selected.
■■Default
Go back to the default setting like below.
Document Font
Measure Result Font
Font Name
Helvetica
Verdana
Font Size
11
11
Font Color
White
Yellow
NOTE: Certain fonts may not appear correctly on the screen.
7-11
Operation Manual
Annotate
Select the Annotate tab in the Setup screen. Or tab Annotate on the touch screen. Specify displayrelated options.
[Figure 7.5 Setup –Annotate]
Screen Keyboard
■■Screen Keyboard
You directly enter patient information using the screen keyboard on the Patient Information screen.
Set this to On to enable the screen keyboard.
NOTE: When you enter a birth date or age, the screen keyboard for entering numbers is activated.
BodyMarker
■■Size
Set the BodyMarker size (Small, Medium, Large).
■■Option
XX
BodyMarker Auto Active: Set whether to activate BodyMarker mode automatically when
changing an active image region.
7-12
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■BodyMarker Edit
u
v
[Figure 7.6 Bodymarker Edit]
Item
Descriptions
1
Bodymarker list: This list differs depending on the group selected in Group. “Current page/Total pages” is
displayed below the list. If total pages are 2 or more, you can move to other pages by using [_] or [`].
2
Bodymarker list of probe or preset currently being used. ‘Current page/Total pages’ is displayed below the list.
If total pages are 2 or more, you can move to other pages by using [_] or [`].
NOTE: You can add or save between 1 and 100 Bodymarker(s) in each list.
XX
Adding a Bodymarker
Select and double-click a bodymarker in the left list (u). The selected bodymarker is added to
the right list (v). The list cannot have duplicated bodymarkers. In this case a warning message
was popped-up.
7-13
Operation Manual
XX
Removing a Bodymarker
Select and double-click a bodymarker in the right list (v).
XX
Saving and Canceling Bodymarker list
Click Save to save the list. Click Close to cancel the list.
XX
Resetting Bodymarker List
Click Reset. The Bodymarker list is reset to the system defaults.
Text Setup
Select whether to use Quick Text, Auto Text Erase, Boot up Caps Lock on, Autotext, Edit Text, Autotext
Edit or Clear Annotation.
■■Quick Text
If the checkbox is selected, the Quick Text function is enabled. Quick Text switches the system to
the text input mode immediately after a character key in the Alphanumeric Keyboard is pressed.
NOTE:
The Quick Text checkbox is checked by system default.
XX
You can enter a text even if you don't select Quick Text. To switch to the text mode in this case,
XX
tap Annotation on the touch screen.
■■Auto Text Erase
If this checkbox is checked, whole texts are deleted at once when pressing Freeze button after
input texts.
■■Boot up Caps Lock on
If this checkbox is checked, Boot up Caps Lock on is turned on. When text is entered, it is entered in
capital letters.
■■Autotext
If an abbreviation is entered, the system retrieves and enters a full word automatically. When this
option is selected, you can enter text more easily and quickly.
For example, to enter the text ‘Abdominal Circumference’, you only need to enter ‘AC’ and the system
will search the full word from the abbreviation list and automatically enter it.
7-14
Chapter 7 Utilities
To enable Autotext, check the Autotext checkbox with the Trackball. Otherwise, uncheck the
checkbox.
If this option is selected, the abbreviation list appears on the screen when text is entered.
[Figure 7.7 Abbreviation list]
The system has a built-in abbreviation list for this function. You can add a new abbreviation or edit
the existing abbreviation as desired.
Tips!
Editing Abbreviation List
To enable the abbreviation list stored in the system, press the Autotext Edit button. The system will
switch to the Autotext Edit screen.
To save the changes and finish editing, press the Close button.
Modify Word
XX
1. Use the Trackball and the Set button to select a word to modify in the list. An abbreviation for
the selected word and its full word are displayed under the Abbreviation and Full Word fields at
the bottom of the screen.
2. Modify words in the Abbreviation and Full Word fields. The abbreviation list is updated in real time.
Add Word
XX
1. Press the New button.
2. Enter words to add in the Abbreviation and Full Word fields at the bottom of the screen. The
entered words are added to the abbreviation list.
Delete Word
XX
1. Use the Trackball and the Set button to select a word to delete from the list. An abbreviation
for the selected word and its full word are displayed under Abbreviation and Full Word at the
bottom of the screen.
2. Press the Delete button, and the following warning message will appear.
3. To delete the selected word, press Ok. The selected word will be deleted from the abbreviation
list. Press Cancel to cancel.
Specify Word Input Delays
XX
Specify the time taken by the system to convert an abbreviation to a full word and enter it. In the
Autotext Delay Time field at the bottom of the screen, enter the input delay time in 0.1 - 5seconds.
7-15
Operation Manual
[Figure 7.8 Autotext Edit]
■■Clear Annotation
Check this checkbox to delete the entered annotation when you change the mode.
■■Edit Text
Select an application to modify and edit the corresponding text page.
7-16
Chapter 7 Utilities
[Figure 7.9 Edit Text]
7-17
Operation Manual
Peripherals
Select the Peripherals tab in the Setup screen. Or tab Peripherals on the touch screen. You can configure
keys, buttons and the peripheral devices connected to the product.
[Figure 7.10 Setup - Peripherals]
Peripherals
■■VCR Model
Select the type of VCR Model from Panasonic MD835, Sony DVO-1000MD, JVC BD-X201, Mitsubishi
MD3000 or Sony SVO 9500. You should reboot the system before you can use the configured VCR.
■■COM
Configure a device to connect to a serial port. Available devices are VCR and Open Line Transfer. If
you select Reserve, the COM port will not be used.
7-18
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■VCR Source
Sets a VCR source. Select VHS or S-VHS.
Foot Switch
Set the function of the left and right pedals of the foot switch. You can select one of the following
functions for each pedal.
Foot Switch Functions
Freeze
Print
Update
Store Clip
Record
Volume Start
Save
Print Setup
■■Printer Orientation
NOTE: This option is available only for an Echo printer that uses roll paper.
Set the type and page orientation of the Echo printer.
XX
Printer Setting: Select the printer to use using the combo button.
XX
Portrait: When printed, the long part of the page is vertical.
XX
Landscape: When printed, the long part of the page is horizontal.
■■Print Key
Set the functionality of the Print buttons on the control panel. Select from Analog Printer, Digital
Printer, Record or Store Clip. Also set a printer or VCR to use when each button is pressed.
■■Measure Report printer Select for using A4/Letter Template
Select the checkbox for Print 1 or Print 2 to print the report in the Template Report format.
7-19
Operation Manual
■■Local Printing Area
Set the area that will be printed.
XX
Full Screen (1280 * 1024): Print the full monitor screen.
XX
Video Out (1024 * 768): Print part of the monitor screen containing the image area.
XX
Image Only: Print only the image area.
■■Printing Image Adjustment
Adjust the print quality of images. Select the image type and adjust gamma, brightness, and
contrast.
NOTE: This is only supported by some digital printers.
User Defined Key
Select the User defined Key tab on the Setup screen. Or tap User Defined Key on the touch screen. You
can set the keys and buttons connected to the product.
[Figure 7.11 Setup –User Defined key]
7-20
Chapter 7 Utilities
Set / Exit Key Setup
■■Set / Exit Key Switch
Set the functions of the buttons to the left and right of the trackball on the control panel.
XX
Set / Exit: The left button is set to Set and the right button is set to Exit.
XX
Exit / Set: The left button is set to Exit and the right button is set to Set.
Function Setup
Selects functions for Zoom, Focus and Depth dial-buttons on the control panel.
■■Zoom In
Selects the direction in which to rotate Zoom dial to zoom in on an image.
XX
Clockwise: Rotating the dial-button clockwise zooms in on an image.
XX
Counterclockwise: Rotating the dial-button counter-clockwise zooms in on an image.
■■Focus Up
Selects the direction in which to rotate Focus dial to adjust the focus depth.
XX
Clockwise: Rotate the dial-button clockwise to increase the focus depth.
XX
Counterclockwise: Rotate the dial-button counter-clockwise to increase the focus depth.
■■Depth Up
Selects the direction in which to rotate Depth dial to adjust the scanning depth.
XX
Clockwise: Rotate the dial-button clockwise to increase depth.
XX
Counterclockwise: Rotate the dial-button counter-clockwise to increase depth.
User Key Setup
■■User Key
Set the functions of the User 1, User 2, and User Knob 2 buttons on the control panel. The functions
that can be set are shown below.
7-21
Operation Manual
User Key 1, 2
None
Dual
EFW Result
2D Mode
Quad
BPD
C Mode
2D/C Live
HC
M Mode
Change Window
AC
PW Mode
Probe Change
FL
CW Mode
Application Change
APTD
PD Mode
Preset
TTD
TDI Mode
Biopsy
FTA
TDW Mode
Annotation
GS
Store Clip
BodyMarker
CRL
Save
Simultaneous
M Line
EFW Measure
User Knob 2
Gain
Frequency
Power
Angle
None
NOTE: The User Knob 2 key is only used in Scan Mode.
Indicator Select
■■Indicator Location Select
Selects which button to use for entering indicators. To enter indicators with the Pointer button on
the control panel, select Control panel.
Printer Key
■■Printer Key
XX
Print Only: Prints the image.
XX
Print + Image Save: Prints and saves the image.
7-22
Chapter 7 Utilities
Miscellaneous
Select the Miscellaneous tab on the Setup screen. Or tap Miscellaneous on the touch screen. You can
set E-mail, text, network status, etc.
[Figure 7.12 Setup - Miscellaneous]
E-mail
You can specify a server through which you will send and receive e-mails.
■■Mail (SMTP) Server
Specify the e-mail server.
■■Port No.
Enter a port number.
■■ID
Enter an ID for the e-mail server.
■■Password
Enter a password for the e-mail server.
7-23
Operation Manual
Buzzer Control
Generate a buzzer sound when a button or dial-button is use.
■■Buzzer Sound
Set this to on or off using the trackball. When this is set to on, the buzzer sounds each time a button
or dial-button is used.
■■Touch Screen Sound
Set this to on or off using the trackball. When this is set to on, it sounds each time the touch screen
is tapped.
■■Set / Exit Key Sound
Set this to on or off using the trackball. When this is set to on, it sounds each time the Set or Exit
button on the control panel is used.
Account
Register the user ID and password.
■■User ID and Password
Set the user account (log-in) function. . If the account is On, it can be used for the following areas.
XX
Blank Image (Screen Saver)
XX
Accessing Patient mode in Sonoview
XX
Search window for the Patient mode in Sonoview
■■Set ID and Password
This is the exclusive administrator function for approval and management of accounts. The account
list is activated.
XX
Add: Fill out the User Id, Password and Name fidles. And then press the Add button to creative
a new ID.
XX
Modify: Save the changes.
XX
Delete: Delete the selected ID.
XX
Close: Finish the setting.
7-24
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■Log-in
You can set the User Account ID after logging in as the Admin account. Contact Samsung Medison
Service Engineer for thr Admin account.
NOTE:
The Admin account cannot be deleted.
XX
Once the user account function is activated, you cannot load other exams when you have not
XX
logged in.
The password must be 6 to 15 characters and composed of at least three of the following:
XX
−−English alphabet upper case
−−English alphabet lower case
−−Numbers
−−Special characters
Export Image Compensation
Configure the post curve settings for the images for which DICOM services will be used. Click this
button to display the Compensation window.
Adjust gamma, brightness, and contrast by using the slider for each option. Click Default to revert to
the system defaults.
Tips!
Adjusting the post curve settings for images allows other monitors to display them as close as
possible to the original images, which is convenient in diagnosis.
[Figure 7.13 Compensation]
7-25
Operation Manual
Touch Screen Calibration
Starts calibration for the touch screen.
Tips!
How to calibrate the touch screen
1. Click Touch Screen Calibration. The calibration screen is shown on the touch screen.
2. Tap the blinked X symbol on the touch screen.
Tap it for three or four seconds until beep or stop blinking.
XX
Tap 25 symbols in the same way.
XX
3. After calibrating, the screen to save the current coordinates is shown.
CAUTION: Do not power off during the saving the coordinates.
4. Reboot the system after the saving screen disappeared.
Patient Name Formatting
This function is to display patient names in Asian languages such as Korean, Chinese, and Japanese.
This setting is initialized when you press Reset.
NOTE: This button appears on the screen only in a product that supports Asian patient names.
■■Name Formatting
Set the order in which patient names are displayed.
XX
Default: Names are displayed in the order of last name, first name and middle name (Ex. Smith,
Robert L).
XX
Custom: For ‘Item,’ specify the order as last name, first name and middle name. For ‘Separator,’
specify a symbol such as comma or space, or just omit it.
■■Representation Priority
Specify how patient names are displayed. Select the precedence of Roman, Ideographic and
Phonetic letters.
7-26
Chapter 7 Utilities
Option
Select the Option tab in the Setup screen. Or tap Option on the touch screen. You can enable or disable
optional software and hardware.
[Figure 7.14 Setup -Option]
7-27
Operation Manual
Options
The list of optional software is displayed on the screen.
NOTE: To purchase optional software, please contact the distributor for the software.
■■Option
It shows the types of optional software that can be installed on the product.
■■Status
It shows the current status of optional software.
XX
Lock_Not Installed: No hardware is connected.
XX
Lock_Unregistered: The software is not registered.
XX
Lock_Installed: Hardware is installed but not registered.
XX
Unlock_Permanent: Ready for use without any time limitation.
XX
Unlock_Restricted: Ready for use for a certain period.
XX
Lock_Expired: Use of the software is restricted and it cannot be used after a specified period of
use has expired.
■■Hardware Configuration
The list of optional hardware is displayed on the screen. Currently, only ECG is supported.
Check the checkbox for hardware that will be used. Reboot the system to finish settings.
7-28
Chapter 7 Utilities
DICOM Setup (Optional)
Select the DICOM tab in the Setup screen. Or tap DICOM on the touch screen. You can configure the
DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine) operation and the DICOM server.
NOTE: For more information, please refer to the user manual for the server equipment or the
DICOM Conformance Statement.
[Figure 7.15 Setup - DICOM]
7-29
Operation Manual
DICOM Configuration
The information on the DICOM server used by the system is displayed.
You can change the information, or add or delete a server. The server information is used to identify
DICOM for the system in a network. It is also used to transfer data between other DICOM servers.
NOTE: Please consult your network administrator to set IP Address, AE Title and Port No.
■■AE Title
Enter the name of the DICOM AE (Application Entity). The title is used to identify devices that use
DICOM in a network.
■■Station Name
Enter the name of the system. Along with AE Title, it is often used to identify the system in the
DICOM network.
■■Port No.
Enter the port number of the server being used.
DICOM Send Format
Specify the storage format for the 2D or Color mode images for which the DICOM services will be
used. Select either Color or Gray by using the combo button If you select Gray, images are saved only
in grayscale format.
NOTE: The DICOM Send Format settings are applied at the time when an image is saved. For
example, when set to Gray, an image is saved as a grayscale image.
DICOM Compression
Select whether to compress the still images for DICOM service. Select Uncompressed or JPEG Baseline
using the combo button. When you select Uncompressed, the images are saved without compression.
7-30
Chapter 7 Utilities
NOTE: The DICOM Compression setting is applied at the time when the image is saved. That is, if
JPEG Baseline is set, the image is compressed when it is saved.
Cine images, however, are saved as JPEG Baseline regardless of this setting.
Store SR at End of Exam
Select whether to store SR at the end of exam. When you check the checkbox, SR is automatically
stored at the end of exam; otherwise it is not stored.
Adding DICOM Service
Click Add on the screen. The system is switched to a screen where you can enter a DICOM service to
add. After adding a service, click Save to save the information. Click Cancel to cancel.
■■Services
Select the type of service to use via DICOM. The supported DICOM servers are Storage, Print,
Worklist, PPS, SC and Storage SR.
■■Alias
Enter the name of the DICOM server.
■■AE Title
Enter the AE title of the DICOM server. Consult your network administrator before specifying this
option.
■■Transfer Mode
Select a transfer method:
XX
Batch: Send all saved images when you click the End Exam button.
XX
Send As You Go: Send an image whenever you press the Save button to save it.
XX
Manual: Send the selected image in Exam List or SonoView.
■■Connect Timeout
Specify how long the system will wait until it receives a response from the DICOM server. You can
specify it in seconds.
7-31
Operation Manual
■■IP Address
Enter the IP address of the server being used. Consult your network administrator before specifying
this option.
■■Port no.
Enter the port number of the server being used. Consult your network administrator before
specifying this option.
■■Retry Interval
Specify how long the system will wait before it retries when transmission fails. You can specify it in
seconds.
■■Maximum Retries
Specify how many times the system will retry when transmission fails.
Storage Server Information
Select STORAGE under Services. Configure the Image Storage Service using DICOM.
■■Storage Options
XX
Send Cine Loops: Check this checkbox to send Cine Loops.
XX
Include Pixel Spacing: In addition to the area information used in ultrasonography, the area
information used in CT or radiography is included. Measures can be measured in the PACS
system, which does not support ultrasonic area information.
NOTE: However, only 2D and 2D Color mode images are supported. In Dual and Quad Mode, the
depths of the included images must be identical.
XX
Include 3D Volume: Select whether to send 3D volume data together with the 3D images.
NOTE: Select this only when you use a Storage service which supports the 3D volume data of
Samsung Medison.
7-32
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■VOI LUT Setup
Configure VOI LUT (Value Of Interest Look Up Table). Adjust the brightness and contrast of a DICOM
image when saving it. The saved image can be viewed with any PACS device that has DICOM VOI
LUT implemented.
XX
Window Center: Enter a value for the DICOM Tag (0028, 1050) setting. The setting value indicates
the brightness of an image that is displayed by the Storage service. Relative to 128, a higher
value results in a darker image. Note that this function can be used only when it is supported by
the Storage service.
XX
Window Width: Enter a value for the DICOM Tag (0028, 1051) setting. The setting value indicates
the brightness of an image that is displayed by the Storage service. Relative to 256, higher
values result in lower contrast. Note that this function is available only when it is supported by
the Storage service.
[Figure 7.16 DICOM Configuration - Storage]
7-33
Operation Manual
Print Server Information
Select PRINT under Services. Configure the Print Service using DICOM.
NOTE:
You can configure a printer connected to the DICOM network only.
XX
Depending on the printer, some of the following functions may not be available. Before
XX
configuring a printer service, please refer to the user manual for the printer or the DICOM
Conformance Statement.
■■Color
Specify whether to use colors. Select Grayscale or RGB.
■■Format
Specify the paper layout. Select from 1x1, 1x2, 2x2, 2x3, 3x3, 3x4, 3x5, 4x4, 4x5 and 4x6.
■■Orientation
Specify the paper orientation. Select Landscape or Portrait.
■■Magnification
When resizing an image to print, specify the interpolation. Select from Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic and
None.
■■Border Density
Specify the border density of an image to print. Select Black or White.
■■Empty Density
Specify the background color of an image to print. Select Black or White.
■■Min Density
Specify the minimum brightness of an image to print. If this option is not specified, the default
value is applied.
■■Max Density
Specify the maximum brightness of an image to print. If this option is not specified, the default
value is applied.
7-34
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■Medium Type
Specify the paper type. Select from Paper, Clear Film, Blue Film, Mammo Clear Film and Mammo
Blue Film.
■■Film Size
Specify the paper size. Select from 8 inchx10 inch, 5 inchx11 inch, 10 inchx12 inch, 10 inchx14 inch,
11 inchx14 inch, 11 inchx17 inch, 14 inchx14 inch, 14 inchx17 inch, 24cmx24cm, 24cmx30cm, A4
and A3.
■■Destination
Specify the paper pathway. Select Magazine or Processor.
■■Smoothing Type
This option is available only when Magnification is set to CUBIC. Enter a value specified in the
DICOM Conformance Statement for the printer.
■■Priority
Specify a priority for the print command. Select from High, Med and Low.
■■Copies
Enter the number of copies between 1 and 99.
■■Configuration Info
Specify the unique value for a printer. Please refer to the DICOM Conformance Statement for the
printer.
7-35
Operation Manual
[Figure 7.17 DICOM Configuration - Print]
Worklist Server Information
Select WORKLIST under Services. Configure the Modality Worklist Service using DICOM.
■■Show Worklist first when the patient screen opens
When you check this checkbox, the Worklist window appears when you press Patient Key.
Otherwise, the Study Information window appears.
■■Update Method
Specify the update method for Worklist.
XX
Only on user Request: Update only when asked by the user.
Tips!
To update a worklist, in the Search tab on the Patient Information screen, select Worklist for Search
Source and click Search.
XX
On Startup and Every : Update automatically at a specified interval after the system boots and
Worklist is updated.
7-36
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■Scheduled Station AE Title
Specify the range of AE Title to retrieve from the Worklist server in a hospital.
XX
Any: Retrieve the patient list stored in all AE Titles in the server.
XX
This System: Retrieve the patient list specified under the DICOM tab.
XX
Another: Retrieve the patient list stored in the AE Title specified by the user.
NOTE: This option is available only when the Worklist server is enabled.
■■Start Date
Specify the range of dates to search.
XX
Today: Retrieve the patient list for the current date.
XX
Range: Retrieve the patient list for n days before and n days after the current date.
XX
Past Week: Retrieve the patient list for 7 days before the current date.
XX
Past Month: Retrieve the patient list for a month before the current date.
XX
Custom Date: Specify a certain date and retrieve the patient list for that date.
[Figure 7.18 DICOM Configuration -Worklist]
7-37
Operation Manual
PPS Server Information
Select PPS (Performed Procedure Step) under Services. Configure the Modality Performed Procedure
Step Service using DICOM.
It can be configured in the same way as for the Storage server.
[Figure 7.19 DICOM Configuration -PPS]
■■Always complete exams
When you check this checkbox, exams are always reported in complete condition. If you press the
Cancel button without checking this checkbox, the cancel message is sent to the RIS server.
SC Server Information
Select SC (Storage Commitment) under Services. Configure the Storage Commitment Service using
DICOM. The Storage Commitment Service is used after a diagnosis is finished and all saved images and
reports are transferred.
■■Associated Storage Server
Select an image storage server to connect.
[Figure 7.20 DICOM Configuration -SC]
7-38
Chapter 7 Utilities
Storage SR Server Information
Select Storage SR (Storage Structured Report) under Services. Configure the Report Storage Service
using DICOM.
It can be configured in the same way as for the Storage server.
[Figure 7.21 DICOM Configuration –Storage SR]
Changing DICOM Information
Select a service and click Edit on the screen. The information on the selected service will appear.
After changing the information, click Save to save the changes. Click Cancel to cancel.
Deleting DICOM Service
Select a service and click Delete on the screen.
Testing DICOM Server
Select a service and click Test on the screen. The connection with the selected service is tested and
the results are shown under the Ping and Verify items. If the result is Normal, it indicates that the
connection is normal.
7-39
Operation Manual
Managing DICOM
Click Queue on the screen to switch to the DICOM Job Status screen. You can review the current job
status using the Job ID, Patient ID, etc.
The following describes the elements of the DICOM Job Status screen.
u v
w
x
y
z
{
[Figure 7.22 Job Status]
Item
Descriptions
1
Job ID: Display the job ID.
2
Patient ID: Display the patient ID.
3
Alias: Display the alias set in the DICOM Configuration screen.
4
Type: Display the job type. The available job types are Storage, Print, Storage SR, MPPS Start, MPPS End, and
Storage CMT.
5
Instances: Display the number of instances. What this denotes differs depending on the job type. For ‘Storage’
and ‘Print’, it means the number of images. For ‘Storage SR’, it means the amount of measurement data. For
MPPS Start, it is always displayed as 0.
6
Data/Time: Display the date and time when the job was created.
7-40
Chapter 7 Utilities
7
Status: Display the current status of the job.
Status
Description
Fail
The job failed.
Transfer
The job is in progress.
Imperfect
The job has been stopped during execution. It will be switched to the Ready state
immediately.
Wait
The job is waiting for execution.
Wait Resp
The job is waiting for a response.
Hold
The job is waiting for a retry. This occurs when the job has failed but the maximum
retry count is not yet reached.
Ready
The job is waiting for execution. This occurs when the network is not connected.
Not Ready
The Ready state is not completed. This occurs when MPPS (Modality Performed
Procedure Step) End occurs before MPPS Start is completed or the case that a
Storage or Print batch job is not completed.
■■Network Status
Display the network connection status. When connected, ‘Connected’ is displayed. When
disconnected, ‘Disconnected’ is displayed.
■■Number of Jobs
Display the number of jobs listed in the DICOM Job Status screen.
■■Log
Display the DICOM Log window.
■■Retry
Perform the selected job again. This button is enabled only when the status of the selected job is
Fail or Wait Resp.
■■Retry All
Retry all jobs for which the status is Fail.
7-41
Operation Manual
■■Delete
Delete the selected job. This button is enabled only when the status of the selected job is Fail,
Imperfect, Wait Resp, or Not Ready.
■■Clear
Delete all jobs.
DICOM Log
Click Log on the DICOM Job Status window to display the DICOM Log window. This is used to manage
the history of all DICOM services performed on this product.
■■Log Settings
Specify how log files will be managed.
XX
Delete Archived Log Afterwards: Specify how long a log file will be archived. Enter a number in
days. If the specified time has elapsed after the log file was created, the file is deleted from the
system.
XX
Log File Maximum Size: Specify the maximum size of a log file that can be archived. Enter a
number in Kb. A log file that is larger than the specified size is not archived on the system and
deleted immediately.
■■DICOM Log
Display a list of log files with their information.
XX
Select All: Select all log files.
XX
Delete Selected Files: Delete the selected log file.
XX
Copy Selected Files: Copy the selected log file to an external storage media.
XX
View Selected File: Display the details of the selected log file on the screen.
XX
Refresh: Update the information of a log file.
7-42
Chapter 7 Utilities
[Figure 7.23 DICOM Log]
7-43
Operation Manual
Auto Calc
Select the AutoCalc tab in the Setup screen. Or tap AutoCalc on the touch screen. The Auto Calc function
calculates specified measurement items automatically with measurement data and is supported in
Spectral Doppler Mode.
NOTE: The specified items will appear on the screen only when the Auto Calc button on the
touch screen is pressed in Spectral Doppler Mode.
[Figure 7.24 Setup- AutoCalc]
7-44
Chapter 7 Utilities
AutoCalc Setting
Enable or disable the following items for automatic calculation by checking their checkbox.
When the Peak Systolic Velocity and End Diastolic Velocity values are 0, not all results for the items will
be displayed on the screen.
In addition, the result value for Timed Averaged Mean Velocity is displayed only when Mean Trace is
‘On’.
XX
Peak Systolic Velocity
XX
Time Averaged Mean Velocity
XX
End Diastolic Velocity
XX
Diastole / Systole Ratio
XX
Time Averaged peak Velocity
XX
Max. Pressure gradient
XX
Resistive Index
XX
Mean pressure Gradient
XX
Pulsatility Index
XX
Velocity Time integral
XX
Systole / Diastole Ratio
XX
Peak A
About
Select the About tab in the Setup screen. Or tap About on the touch screen. Information about the
system S/W version will be displayed.
Click Detail to view more detailed information on the product version.
[Figure 7.25 Setup - Information]
* The S/W version of your system may be different from that in the figure above.
7-45
Operation Manual
Measurement Setup
Specify various setup options for measurement. The setup may be modified depending on specific needs
or preferences.
1. Tap Utility > Measure Setup on the touch screen. Or click Measure Setup on the Setup screen.
2. When the Measure Setup screen appears, select a tab that has items to configure.
3. Specify settings for each item.
4. Save and finish the setting. Press the Close button on the touch screen or the Exit button on the
control panel to switch to scan mode. Press Return on the touch screen to go back to the Utility
menu.
Tips!
Selecting a tab
You can select a tab in either of two ways as desired.
Use the trackball and the Set button to select a tab.
XX
Select a tab on the touch screen.
XX
[Figure 7.26 Touch Screen for Measure Setup]
7-46
Chapter 7 Utilities
Touch Menu Design
Press Touch Menu Design on the touch screen. The monitor and touch screen will then switch to the
Touch Menu Design screen.
Set the buttons that will appear on the touch screen during measurement. The menus for measurement
items and results can be configured as desired.
[Figure 7.27 Touch Menu Design]
Select Calc. Page
Select a calculation page (package) to set. You can also select it by rotating the [1] Page dial-button
on the touch screen. The calculation page consists of OB, Gynecology, Cardiac, Vascular, Fetal Heart,
Urology, Abdomen, Small Parts, TCD, Pediatric Hips, and MSK.
7-47
Operation Manual
Available Menu List
The possible measurement items appear as a menu on the touch page. Press ‘+’ to display the sub
measurement items.
After selecting measurement items in the Available Menu List, and the position, press aon the screen.
The selected items are added to the menu at the right.
Touch Menu Design
■■Measurement Package Setting
XX
Prev Page: Move to the previous page.
XX
Next page: Move to the next page.
■■Changing Menu Position
Select a measurement group or item, and change its position using ï, ð, ñ, and ò .
■■New Tab
Create a new tab.
■■Delete Menu
Delete the selected measurement item.
■■Rename Tab
Change the name of the created tab.
■■Clear All
Delete all the measurement groups or items of the selected tab.
■■Save this Page
Save the changes made to the current page.
■■Default Items
Pressing Default Items on the screen restores the default settings.
7-48
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■Close
Finish editing. When there are changes, a message asking whether to save them appears.
NOTE:
You cannot place sub measurement items in Group.
XX
For detailed descriptions of measurement items, see Chapter 5 “Measurements”.
XX
[Figure 7.28 Touch Menu Design -Touch Screen]
7-49
Operation Manual
General
Select the General tab at the Measure Setup screen. Or tap General on the touch screen. You can specify
basic measurement options.
General Settings
Select the sub tab General under the General tab. You can specify basic measurement options.
[Figure 7.29 Measure Setup - General - General]
7-50
Chapter 7 Utilities
Cursor & Method
■■Line Marker Type
Specify the shape of the caliper cursor displayed on the screen. Either Cross Hair or Arrow Head can
be selected.
■■Circ. and area method
Specify the method for measuring circumference and area. Either Ellipse or Trace can be selected.
By default, the selected method appears when the Caliper button is pressed. Therefore, you can
start measurement more easily by specifying the most commonly used measurement method. For
more information on Ellipse and Trace, please refer to the “Circumference and Area Measurement”
section in Chapter 5 “Measurement.”
■■Apply Auto Marker Cursor Size
Select whether to automatically reduce the marker cursor size when the distance between the start
point and moving point is 50 pixels or less at the time of measurement.
Line Type
From the following three options, select the line pattern to use when measuring a distance.
■■Dotted Line
Display with dotted line.
■■Hidden Dotted Line
Display start and end point of the line.
■■Hidden Dotted line after Set
Display with dotted line during making line. After set the line with Set button, dotted line will be
disappeared.
Tips!
Selecting Line Type
If you select Hidden Dotted Line or Hidden Dotted Line after Set, you can keep images from being
interfered with by a measurement line.
7-51
Operation Manual
Start Point of Measurement
Set a location indicated by the cursor. Set a start point during measurement.
XX
End Point of the Last: The cursor appears at the end point of the last measurement.
XX
Start Point of the Last: The cursor appears at the start point of the last measurement.
XX
Center of the Region: The cursor appears in the center of the image region.
Display
Specify items to display during measurement by checking their checkbox.
■■Guideline
XX
Display the Doppler Guideline: Specify whether to display cross lines while items are measured
in frozen spectrum. This option can be useful when approximate values are estimated.
XX
Display the M-Mode Guideline: Specify whether to display cross lines while items are measured
in the frozen state in M Mode. This option can be useful when approximate values are estimated.
■■Clear Function on UnFreeze
XX
Clear Measure 2D Mode Result On Unfreeze: Specify whether to clear measurement results from
the screen when switching to Scan mode after performing measurements in 2D mode.
XX
Clear Measure M/D Mode Result On Unfreeze: Specify whether to clear measurement results
from the screen when switching to Scan mode after performing measurements in M mode and
Doppler mode.
■■Measurement Unit
Specify the measurement unit. For a small object, it is more convenient to use ‘mm’ in Dist. When
blood flow is fast, it is better to use ‘m/s’ in Vel.
XX
Dist: Select either a cm- or mm-scale for the unit of distance, area and volume.
XX
Vel: Select either cm/s or m/s for the unit of velocity.
NOTE: Changing measurement units deletes all existing measurement data.
7-52
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■Measurement Results
XX
Transparent BK color: Set transparent background.
XX
Number of Results Displayed: Set the number of lines in which to display the measurement
results. This is applied to the basic measurement results for all applications except for obstetrics,
cardiac, vascular, urology, and fetal heart.
NOTE: Use the Setting tab of each application to set the Number of Measure Results Displayed for
obstetrics, cardiac, vascular, urology, and fetal heart.
Report
Select the Report tab under the General tab. Here you can set items related to the measurement report.
[Figure 7.30 Measure Setup - General -Report]
7-53
Operation Manual
■■Use SonoReport
The format provided by SonoReport is used instead of the report format provided by Samsung
Medison.
NOTE: You need a program supplied by SonoReport to use this function. For details, contact
the Customer Support Department of Samsung Medison in your region.
Report Header
Specify header options for reports. You can specify more than one item and the specified items appear
in all measurement reports.
■■Hospital Info.
This is information about the hospitals in which the product is installed. You can select Hospital
name, Diag. Physician, Ref. Physician, and Sonographer.
■■Patient Info.
This is information about the patient. You can select ID, name, Gender, Heart Rate, Birthday, Age,
and BSA.
■■Others
This information concerns other comments. You can select Description and Accession #.
Measurement Result
■■Measurement
calculated.
Result Type: Specify how measurements listed in a report are
XX
Average: Shows the average of the last three measurement values.
XX
Last: Shows the last measurement value.
XX
Max: Shows the largest measurement value.
XX
Min: Shows the smallest measurement value.
7-54
Chapter 7 Utilities
OB / FH Header layout
Specify item(s) to display under the header of obstetrics or fetal echo measurement reports. You can
specify more than one item.
XX
EFW
XX
Pctl. (EFW)
XX
GA (EFW)
XX
SD (EFW)
XX
Gravida
XX
Aborta
XX
Para
XX
Ectopic
Save
■■Range
XX
Current Page: Saves current page only.
XX
All Pages: Saves all pages.
■■Color
XX
Same as preview: Saves the image with the currently selected color.
XX
Black & White: Saves the image with black foreground and white background.
Comment
■■Comment 1~4
Enter up to four comments.
7-55
Operation Manual
Data Transfer
Select the sub tab Data Transfer under the General tab. Here you can set the data transfer method, etc.
[Figure 7.31 Measure Setup - General – Data Transfer]
Serial Transfer
Specify the data format in which data will be transferred. You can select from a text format and an XML
format.
This product uses an RS-232C USB serial cable to transfer data. Select the XML format to transfer data
with reporting tools such as Astraia, Sonoultra and Viewpoint.
NOTE: Before setting, make sure that COM is set to Open Line Transfer under the Peripherals tab
in the Setup screen.
User Table Backup & Restore
Back up a user-defined table or restore the backed-up table to the system. Click BackUp or Restore
and specify desired options.
7-56
Chapter 7 Utilities
DICOM SR Format
XX
General Report: This is the default format.
XX
ViewPoint: This is the ViewPoint data format.
Caliper
Select the Caliper sub-tab under the General tab.
Specify whether additional information will be shown along with basic measurement values when basic
measurements are taken by pressing the Caliper button on the control panel. If this option is selected,
the additional information will be also saved and output along with measurement results.
If Application is set to Cardiac, the D Velocity, D A/B, D Trace and M Distance items are changed.
NOTE: The Cardiac setting can be used only when probe preset is Cardiac or Pediatric Cardiology.
[Figure 7.32 Measure Setup - General –Caliper]
7-57
Operation Manual
Keys
From the sub-tabs under the General tab, select the Keys tab.
You can set the action performed by the Change Key to either Fetus Selection or None.
[Figure 7.33 Measure Setup - General – Keys]
7-58
Chapter 7 Utilities
Obstetrics
Select the OB tab on the Measure Setup screen. Or tap OB on the touch screen. Here you can set items
related to obstetrics measurement.
General Settings
Select the sub tab General under the OB tab. You can specify basic options for obstetrics measurement.
[Figure 7.34 Measure Setup - OB- General]
7-59
Operation Manual
Percentile Info.
■■Show Percentile Information
Check the checkbox to use the Percentile Information.
■■Percentile Criteria
Select a value that will be used for percentile calculation.
XX
GA by LMP: GA is calculated based on the maternal LMP.
XX
Estab. Due Date: GA is calculated based on the Estab. Due Date that is entered in the Patient
Information.
XX
AUA (Average US GA): GA is calculated using the average value of several ultrasound
measurements.
■■Rank Information Method
Specify how the growth range information will be displayed. Specify how the growth range
information will be displayed. The growth range information can be used to observe fetal
development and abnormality, if any.
XX
Standard Deviation: International standard deviation is used to indicate the fetal development.
Fetal development and abnormality are observed on the basis of SD = 0 indicating the standard
development.
XX
Pctl.: Fetal development is indicated in percentile. Fetal development and abnormality are
observed on the basis of 50% indicating the standard development.
XX
Bar (Graph): The percentile is shown in a bar graph. This option is available with OB reports only.
The green color indicates normal development range, while the red color indicates abnormal
development range.
Fetal Weight Unit
Specify the unit for fetal weight measurement. You can select up to 2 units from grams [g], ounces
[oz] and pounds [lb]. The primary and secondary units can be combined to show measurements in
various units. The primary unit can be either ‘Gram [g]’ or ‘lb +oz’ on the left. The secondary unit can be
selected from the units on the right, and can be any unit other than the one selected as the primary
unit.
‘lb +oz’ is a unit combining pounds and ounces, and ‘None’ indicates that no unit is used.
7-60
Chapter 7 Utilities
Clear Function on UnFreeze
This function is applied to obstetrics only.
■■Clear Measure 2D Mode Result On UnFreeze
Check the checkbox to delete 2D mode results when UnFreeze is selected after measurement.
■■Clear Measure M/D Mode Result On UnFreeze
Check the checkbox to delete M or D mode results when UnFreeze is selected after measurement.
Number of Measure Results Displayed
■■Number of Results Displayed
Set the number of lines in which to display the measurement results on the screen.
OB Doppler Results
Set the display for each item of the Doppler Results to be shown on the screen of the OB package.
XX
PSV : Disabled
XX
PGmean: Enabled
XX
EDV: Disabled
XX
S/D : Enabled
XX
TAPV: Enabled
XX
D/S : Enabled
XX
TAMV : Enabled
XX
PI: Enabled
XX
PGmax: Enabled
XX
RI: Enabled
OB Measurement Result
■■Measurement Result Type
Select the measurement result type from between average (Avg), the last measured value (Last),
maximum value (Max), and minimum value (Min).
7-61
Operation Manual
Table Settings
Select the sub tab Tables under the OB tab. You can specify references such as reference tables and
equations that will be used by each measurement item.
[Figure 7.35 Measure Setup - OB- Tables]
■■Items
This setting is intended for measurement of the gestational age (GA) and fetal size (Growth). Select
items in the following order:
1. Select a measurement item in the list on the left.
2. Select a reference type from the GA table and Growth table.
3. Select a reference in the list on the right.
■■Fetal Weight
This setting is intended for measurement of the estimated fetal weight (EFW). Select items in the
following order:
7-62
Chapter 7 Utilities
1. Select the EFW measurement method from EFW equation and EFW growth.
2. Select a reference in the list on the below.
■■Add Reference
NOTE:
Observe the following directions when adding a table reference. If these conditions are not met, a
warning message appears and the reference is not saved.
Input at least three types of data.
XX
If there are no Min and Max values, select Value Only for “Table Type.”
XX
1. Press
. The User Reference window will appear.
2. Enter a name and description for a new reference.
3. Specify the reference type as Table or Equation.
NOTE: EFW Equation can set only Equation and EFW Growth can set only Table as the reference
type.
4. Press OK to go to the next step. The system will switch to the Editor screen.
Press Cancel to cancel.
5. Enter a reference.
6. Press Save to save the information. Press Cancel to cancel.
7. Press OK to finish. Press Cancel to cancel.
[Figure 7.36 User Reference]
7-63
Operation Manual
Tips!
Add Reference Table
Pressing the question mark button shows the sources of the references. Pressing the question mark
button a second time hides the sources again.
[Figure 7.37 User Table]
Unit Information
The unit of the selected reference such as Input, Output, SD, etc. is displayed.
Table type
Select the table type for the selected reference. For Growth Table, SD (Standard Deviation) is
displayed.
Range Type: Set the Min. and Max. values of the selected reference and display them in a table.
XX
The SD value varies according to the range selected by user.
Value Type: Only the measurement values entered by the user are displayed, regardless of the
XX
range of Min., Max., and SD.
Misc.
Show In Days: When the checkbox is selected, the table unit is changed from wd (Week-day) to
XX
d (day).
Cursor Movement for the Enter key: Specify the direction of cursor movement when the Enter
XX
key on the alphanumeric keyboard is pressed while a table is being edited. Select from Right,
Down and Edit.
7-64
Chapter 7 Utilities
Tips!
Add Reference Equation
If a reference appears in an equation, the following should be entered:
Equation
Enter a reference equation. Use the measurement calculator shown in the lower right corner.
Input Value Ranges
Enter the minimum (Low) and maximum (High) ranges for the selected reference.
Tolerance Information
Select the tolerance from w or d .
[Figure 7.38 User Equation]
■■View & Modify Reference
1. Under Selection, select a preset to delete.
2. Press
and the Editor screen will appear.
3. View or modify a reference.
■■EFW Sequential Measurement
NOTE:
This setting is necessary when you set ‘EFW Measure’ for User Key1 or 2 in [Utility] > [Setup] >
XX
[User Defined key] > [User Key Setup]. The setting is applied when you measure EFW using
the User 1 or User 2 button.
You can also set EFW measure in Touch Menu Designer. For details, see ‘Touch Menu Designer’
XX
in this chapter.
Specify the order of measurement items when measuring EFW using the User 1 or User 2 button.
Change the order of measurement item using arrow buttons.
7-65
Operation Manual
Calc & Graph
Select the sub tab Calc & Graph under the OB tab. You can specify settings for calculation and graphs.
[Figure 7.39 Measure Setup – OB - Calc & Graph]
Auto calculations
Specify an item that will be calculated automatically. For example, if the MAD checkbox is selected
as shown below, when APD and TAD are measured, the measurements are used to calculate MAD
automatically and display the result on the screen. The results of automatic calculation may affect GA
and EDD information.
7-66
Chapter 7 Utilities
Ratio calculations
Specify a measurement item for which a ratio will be calculated. For example, if the FL/BPD checkbox
is selected, when FL and BPD are measured, the ratio between them is calculated and displayed on the
screen. This ratio also appears in a report.
Fetal Doppler trend graph
Specify whether to include PI and RI graphs for MCA (Mid Cerebral Artery) and UA (Umbilical Artery)
or Ductus Venosus PI graphs in an obstetrics report. Press , and the Editor screen for the selected
graph will appear.
Trend graph
Specify whether to include a graph for a certain item or ratio in an obstetrics report. Press
Editor screen for the selected graph will appear.
and the
7-67
Operation Manual
Cardiac
Select the Cardiac tab in the Measure Setup screen. Or tap Cardiac on the touch screen. You can specify
settings for cardiac measurement.
[Figure 7.40 Measure Setup - Cardiac]
Cursor & Method
■■Circ. and Area method
Specify how a circumference and area is measured in a 2D cardiac image. Either Ellipse or Trace can
be selected.
■■LV Volume Method
Specify how the volume of the left ventricle is measured. Teichholz, Cubed or Gibson can be
selected. For more information on calculation formulae, please refer to reference manual.
Cardiac Measurement Result
■■Measurement Result Type
Set a measurement method. Select Avg., Last, Max. or Min. value..
7-68
Chapter 7 Utilities
Number of Measure Results Displayed
■■Number of Results Displayed
Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen.
Type of Derived Calc Results Displayed
Set a display method for measurement results. Select ‘Brief’ for a brief display and ‘Detailed’ for a
detailed display.
7-69
Operation Manual
Vascular
Select the Vascular tab in the Measure Setup screen. Or tap Vascular on the touch screen. You can specify
settings for vascular measurement.
[Figure 7.41 Measure Setup - Vascular]
A/B Ratio
Specify each individual peak velocity for which a ratio between A and B will be calculated.
ICA/CCA Ratio
Specify each individual measurement item that will be used for the ICA/CCA ratio.
7-70
Chapter 7 Utilities
Doppler Results
Set the doppler measurement items that will be displayed with the measurement results.
Vascular Measurement Result
■■Measurement Result Type
Set a measurement method. Select Avg., Last, Max. or Min. value.
Number of Measure Results Displayed
■■Number of Results Displayed
Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen.
Urology
Select the Urology tab in the Measure Setup screen. Or tap Urology on the touch screen. You can specify
settings for urology measurement.
[Figure 7.42 Measure Setup - Urology]
7-71
Operation Manual
Volume Method
Specify an equation that will be used for volume calculation.
XX
3 Distance: The volume is calculated using three diameters in the longitudinal and transverse
planes (4 / 3 x π x A/2 x B/2 x C/2).
XX
3 Distance x Factor: The volume is calculated using three diameters in the longitudinal and
transversal planes, and a factor (F) value entered by the user (A x B x C x Factor).
XX
Ellipsoid: The volume is calculated using the length of the Main and Beside axes (4 / 3 x π x Main
/ 2 x (Beside / 2)2).
XX
Sum of 20 Disks: The volume is calculated by summing the areas in the 20 parallel planes (d / 20
x (A1 + A2 + ... A20), d : the sum of the distances between disks).
NOTE: 3 Distances * Factor: A = 1st Dia. ; B = 2nd Dia. ; C = 3rd Dia.
The factor value is set to “0.523” by default. When the value needs to be changed, a value between
0 and 1 (0 < factor <= 1) is recommended.
Predicted PSA correction factor
Specify the predicted PSA correction factor for measurement of volume of the WG and T-Zone. The
default value is 0.12.
Urology Measurement Result
■■Measurement Result Type
Select the measurement result type from between average (Avg), the last measured value (Last),
maximum value (Max), and minimum value (Min).
Number of Measure Results Displayed
■■Number of Results Displayed
Set the number of lines in which to display the measurement results on the screen.
7-72
Chapter 7 Utilities
Fetal Heart
Select the Fetal Heart tab on the Measure Setup screen. Or tap Fetal Heart on the touch screen. Here you
can set items related to the fetal heart measurement.
Cursor & Method
■■Circ. and Area Method
Specify how a circumference and area is measured in a 2D fetal cardiac image. Either Ellipse or Trace
can be selected.
■■LV Volume Method
Select the measurement method for the volume of left ventricle from between Teichholz, Cubed,
and Gibson. See the reference manual for details about the calculation formula.
Fetal Echo Measurement Result
■■Measurement Result Type
Set a measurement method. Select Avg, Last, Max or Min value.
Number of Measure Results Displayed
■■Number of Results Displayed
Specify the number of lines for measurement results that are displayed on the screen.
[Figure 7.43 Measure Setup - Fetal Heart]
7-73
Operation Manual
Utility
This menu is for system settings and for using ECG, Biopsy, and Histogram.
You can use the Utility menu as follows:
1. Tap Utility on the touch screen. The Utility screen appears on the touch screen.
2. Tap a button to select the desired item.
3. Tap Return to return to the Utility screen after using it. To exit the Utility screen and switch to the
scan mode, tap Exit on the touch screen or press the Exit button on the control panel.
[Figure 7.44 Utility – Touch Screen]
7-74
Chapter 7 Utilities
Post Curve
Tap Post Curve on the touch screen. The touch screen changes to Post Curve. Here you can set various
post maps and gamma values.
Touch Screen Setting
Adjust the contrast and brightness of the touch screen with the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Touch Screen Contrast
Set the contrast for the touch screen. Select a value between –20 and 20 with the dial-button.
■■TouchScreen Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch screen. Select a value between -25 and 25 with the dial-button.
[Figure 7.45 Touch Screen for Post Curve]
7-75
Operation Manual
2D Post
Select 2D Post.
[Figure 7.46 Touch Screen for 2D Post]
■■Chroma Map
Tap Chroma Map on the touch screen to set On or Off. When you select On, you can change the
colors of images on the screen according to your choice.
Use dial-button [1] to select one from Type 1-13 or User 1-3. When you set Curve as User type, the
Chroma Map Edit button on the touch screen is enabled.
■■Chroma Map Edit
You can set the Chroma colors of your choice. You can also set the Chroma colors in each diagnosis
mode menu. This is enabled only for User type.
Adjust the color using Red, Green, and Blue. You can select a value between 0 and 255.
When you change the setting, Chroma Map Save is enabled. Press Chroma Map Save to save the
setting.
■■Chroma Map Save
Save the setting changed in Chroma Map Edit.
7-76
Chapter 7 Utilities
■■Return
Returns to the previous step of the current menu after the current Post Map setting is completed.
■■Gamma
Use the dial-button on the touch screen to set brightness and contrast (Off, Weak, Medium, Hard).
XX
Off: Gamma Off
XX
Weak: Bright contrast
XX
Medium: Medium contrast
XX
Hard: Dark contrast
Color Map
Select Color Map.
[Figure 7.47 Touch Screen for Color Map]
■■Tag
Press the Tag button on the touch screen to turn it on/off. When turned on, a random color is
applied to a certain area in an image.
7-77
Operation Manual
■■Tag Width
Use the dial-button on the touch screen to select the range of tags, from between 8~256. Tag Width
affect to Tag Pos.
■■Tag Pos
Use the dial-button on the touch screen to select the position of tags, from between 0~248. Tag Pos
affect to Tag Width.
■■Color Map
Use the dial-button on the touch screen to select the type of color map. 14 types of post curves are
supported.
M Post
Select M Post. The settings can be specified in the same way as for 2D Post.
[Figure 7.48 Touch Screen for M post]
7-78
Chapter 7 Utilities
D Post
Select D Post. The editing method is identical to 2D Post.
[Figure 7.49 Touch Screen for D post]
Monitor Calibration
Tap Monitor Calibration.
[Figure 7.50 Touch Screen for Monitor Calibration]
7-79
Operation Manual
■■Brightness
Set the brightness of the screen. Select a value between 0 and 100 by using the dial-button.
■■Contrast
Set the contrast of the screen. Select a value between 0 and 100 by using the dial-button.
■■Curve
Specify the focus curve. Select one from Type 1 to 5 or User 1 to 3 by using the dial-button. You can
edit the user type focus curves according to your preferences by using Edit. They can be edited in
the same way as for 2D Post.
■■Edit
When you set Curve as User, the Edit button on the touch screen is enabled. Tapping Edit on the
touch screen shows the screen and menu for setting a curve.
XX
Insert: Insert a point to the curve. The new point is added in the middle between the presently
selected point and the next point.
XX
Delete: Deletes the currently selected point.
XX
Save: Save the current curve.
XX
Picker Pos: Select a point in the curve. Select the position of the point using the dial-button.
XX
Color: Select your choice of Red, Green or Blue for the color of the point on the curve.
7-80
Chapter 7 Utilities
ECG
Select the ECG. The ECG (echocardiogram) function allows viewing of the cardiac pulsation.
[Figure 7.51 Touch Screen for ECG]
NOTE: It shows an image of the heart beat and appears in the menu for cardiac or Vascular
application only.
In Multi Image Mode such as Dual or Quad, ECG CINE can be used for each image.
Starting ECG and terminating
Tab ECG on the touch screen.
ECG Setup
■■Invert
Invert ECG. Set this to on or off by tapping the button on the touch screen.
■■Auto Gain
Tap Auto Gain on the touch screen to automatically set the gain value of ECG.
7-81
Operation Manual
■■2D / Loop
Set the area for using ECG. Select 2D or Loop by tapping the button on the touch screen. You can
use ECG in the 2D area when you select 2D or in the Loop area of the Spectral Doppler Mode when
you select Loop.
■■Sweep Speed
Set the ECG speed. Select 60Hz, 120Hz, 180z, 240Hz, 300Hz, or 360Hz by using the dial-button on
the touch screen.
■■Trigger
Set the trigger interval. Turn it off or select a value between 1 – 5 by using the dial-button on the
touch screen.
■■Trigger Time
Set the time to initiate a trigger. Select a value between 0 - 1000 msec by using the dial-button on
the touch screen.
■■Gain
Set the ECG gain value. Select a value between 10 and 100 by using the dial-button on the touch
screen.
■■Size
Set the ECG size. Select a value between 50 - 200 by using the dial-button on the touch screen.
■■Position
Set the ECG position. Select a value between 0 - 90 by using the dial-button on the touch screen.
ECG moves toward the top as the value increases.
CAUTION:
XXIf the ECG is less then 30Hz, the Heart Rate (HR) is not displayed.
XXIn CW Mode, when ECG is active, the error ratio of the Heart Rate (HR) should be within 2%.
7-82
Chapter 7 Utilities
Histogram
A histogram is a type of graph representing the distribution of echoes.
1. Tab Histogram on the touch screen.
2. Specify an area that a histogram is to cover. Use the Trackball and the Set button to specify area
1, 2 and 3.
3. Histogram 1, 2 and 3 will appear on the screen.
[Figure 7.52 Histogram]
7-83
Operation Manual
Setting Histogram
Specify the position or type of a histogram.
[Figure 7.53 Touch Screen for Histogram]
■■Move Hist. 1 / Move Hist. 2 / Move Hist. 3
After selecting a histogram to move by pressing the button on the touch screen, move it by using
the Trackball and the Set button.
■■Rectangle, Ellipse
Set the histogram shape by pressing the Rectangle or Ellipse button on the touch screen. Select
Rectangle or Ellipse
7-84
Chapter 7 Utilities
Biopsy
Tab Biopsy on the touch screen.
CAUTION: Before performing biopsy, you should specify the Biopsy Guide Line.
[Figure 7.54 Biopsy]
7-85
Operation Manual
Editing Biopsy Guide Line
CAUTION:
Note that the Biopsy Guide Line cannot be edited when the Trapezoidal function is in use for
XX
the Linear Probe.
If the system is rebooted, the Biopsy Guide Line settings are restored to the default.
XX
1. Tap Edit. A warning message appears.
2. Tap Ok. The screen allowing you to set the guide line appears.
3. Set the Biopsy Guide Line by using the trackball and the Set button.
4. Tap Save on the touch screen to save the settings. A confirmation message appears.
XX
Tap Edit to set the Biopsy Guide Line again.
5. Tap Ok to apply the set Biopsy Guide Line. Tap Cancel to cancel the saving.
Tips!
Support for Multi-Guidelines
When you do a biopsy with a specific probe, User appears on the touch screen, which allows you
to preset two or more biopsy guidelines.
How to set the User Guide Line
1. Select the Biopsy Guide Line you want to set by using User on the touch screen.
2. Tap Edit. A warning message appears.
3. Tap Save on the touch screen to save the settings. A confirmation message appears.
Tap Edit to set the Biopsy Guide Line again.
XX
4. Tap Ok to apply the set Biopsy Guide Line. Tap Cancel to cancel the saving.
Starting and Finishing Biopsy
1. Press the Biopsy On/Off button. The warning message will appear.
2. Press OK, and the Biopsy Guide Line will appear on the screen.
XX
If the Biopsy Guide Line displayed is not correct, press the Edit button to edit it.
XX
When using a probe which supports multi-guidelines, you can select User to choose a preset
guideline.
3. Insert a needle along the Guide Line. And then perform biopsy as desired.
7-86
Chapter 7 Utilities
4. When finished, press the Biopsy On/Off button again. The biopsy is completed.
[Figure 7.55 Touch Screen for Biopsy]
VCR
Tab VCR on the touch screen.
CAUTION:
Connect the VCR on the system before using.
XX
Check the capacity of the media before recording.
XX
Only VCRs supported by Samsung Medison can be used.
XX
NOTE: Counter and Search may not be shown on the touch screen by VCR type.
■■Using VCR
XX
Play: Play back recorded data.
XX
Rew: Perform rewind.
XX
Pause: Stop playback temporarily.
XX
Stop: Stop playback.
XX
Record: Start recording.
XX
FF: Perform fast forward.
7-87
Operation Manual
CAUTION: Return and Exit are not available during playback.
■■Counter
The VCR Counter window appears on the monitor screen. Reset the counter.
■■Search
The VCR Counter window appears on the monitor screen. Enter a specific time in the counter to
search the image.
■■VCR Volume
Adjust the VCR volume. Select a value between 0 and 100 by using the dial-button on the touch screen.
[Figure 7.56 Touch Screen for VCR]
7-88
Chapter 7 Utilities
Storage Manager
Tab Storage Manager on the touch screen. All disk drives mounted in the system will be shown. The
drive type, available space and total space for each drive are displayed.
Storage Manager is a program that lets you manage various storage devices connected to the system.
You can remove, format or update a drive for which the checkbox in front of the drive symbol is checked.
NOTE: You may not remove, format or update a drive mounted in the computer within the
system.
Tab Exit on the touch screen or on the control panel to exit Storage Manager.
■■Refresh
Update the dislay on the touch screen to play of drives currently connected to the system.
NOTE: When using Storage Manager, you should press Refresh to update information.
■■Eject / Remove
Disconnect the selected drive.
NOTE: Before unplugging a USB Flash memory drive, make sure to disconnect it by using the
Eject / Remove button.
■■Format
Initialise the selected drive. Under the Format window, you can initialize various settings. Press
Start to start initialization. Press Close to cancel.
NOTE: In the case of DVD+RW or DVD-RW, its free space can be displayed as ‘O bytes’ after
formatting. Because it is an error of Windows™, there is no problem to use that media.
7-89
Operation Manual
[Figure 7.57 Storage Manager]
7-90
Chapter 7 Utilities
Presets
Tap Preset on the touch screen. The Pre. Load screen appears on the touch screen and the probe settings
supported by the current application appear as buttons.
Tap an application or App. Load on the touch screen to change to the selected application.
■■User 1 - 5
Select the image settings saved by the user previously.
XX
[Rename]: Change the Userset name that was saved previously.
XX
[App. Load]: Run the selected Userset.
■■Save
Pressing this button after making a selection saves the settings applied on the current screen.
[Figure 7.58 Touch Screen for Presets]
Help
Tap Help on the touch screen. The electronic manual appears on the monitor screen.
NOTE: There is no Return key on the Help screen.
7-91
Chapter
8
Maintenance
‹‹Operating Environment................................. 8-3
‹‹System Maintenance...................................... 8-4
Cleaning and disinfections ..................................................8-4
Fuse Replacement....................................................................8-5
Cleaning Air Filters...................................................................8-7
Accuracy Check.........................................................................8-7
‹‹Data Maintenance........................................... 8-8
User Setting Back up...............................................................8-8
Patient information Back-up................................................8-8
Software.......................................................................................8-8
Chapter 8 Maintenance
Operating Environment
When installing the console, please consider the following:
CAUTION: Placing the system near generators, X-Ray machines or broadcast cables may
result in screen noise and abnormal visual images. Sharing the power source with other
electrical devices may also induce noise.
XX
Avoid humidity.
XX
Avoid direct sunlight.
XX
Avoid places with extreme temperature variations.
XX
Optimal conditions for the system are temperatures of 10 ~ 35° C and humidity of 30 ~ 75%.
XX
Avoid heat sources.
XX
Avoid dusty and unventilated areas.
XX
Avoid places where the system is likely to be exposed to vibration or impacts.
XX
Avoid places where the system is likely to be exposed to chemical substances or gases.
8-3
Operation Manual
System Maintenance
NOTE: The expected service life of this equipment is 7 years.
Cleaning and disinfections
Using inappropriate detergent or disinfectant may damage the product. Please read the following
carefully.
WARNING:
Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet before cleaning
XX
and disinfections. Otherwise, it may result in electric shock or fire.
Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting the equipment.
XX
Cleaning
CAUTION:
Do not use a spray directly on the product exterior. It may cause cracks in the appliance, or the
XX
color to deteriorate.
Do not use chemical substances such as wax, benzene, alcohol, thinner, mosquito repellant,
XX
deodorant, lubricant or detergent.
■■Console
Use a soft cloth lightly dampened in a mild soap or detergent solution to clean exterior surfaces on
the system.
■■Cleaning Monitor
Wipe the LCD surface with a soft dry cloth. When the LCD panel has dirt on it, wipe it 2 - 3 times or
more in one direction.
NOTE: For information on cleaning and disinfection of the probe, please refer to Chapter 9 “Probes.”
8-4
Chapter 8 Maintenance
Disinfections
CAUTION: Use only recommended disinfectants on system surfaces.
A disinfectant qualified by the FDA 510(k) process is recommended. The following disinfectants are
recommended because of both their biological effectiveness (as qualified through the FDA 510(k)
process) and their chemical compatibility with Samsung Medison ultrasound products.
Solutions
Country
Type
Active ingredient
FDA 510(k)
Cidex
USA
Liquid
Gluteraldehyde
K934434
Cidex Plus
USA
Liquid
Gluteraldehyde
K923744
1. Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Mix the disinfection solution compatible with your system according to label instructions for
solution strength.
3. Wipe the system surfaces with the disinfectant solution, following the disinfectant label instructions
for wipe durations, solution strength, and disinfectant contact duration.
4. Air dry or towel dry with a sterile cloth according to the instructions on the disinfectant label.
Fuse Replacement
The power protection fuse protects the product from excess current. If the power monitoring protection
circuit detects excess current, it shuts off the current to the equipment in order to prevent overheating
and to restrict the ultrasound power output.
If the fuse blows, replace it as shown below.
CAUTION: To avoid risk of electric shock, always disconnect the plug from the system prior to
fuse replacement.
8-5
Operation Manual
[Figure 8.1 Fuse replacement]
1. Turn off the system and disconnect the system power cord from the wall outlet. (See Œ)
2. Press the fuse holder in the direction of the arrow and pull it out. (See )
3. Remove the old fuse and replace it with a new one.
4. After installing the new fuse, connect the plug to the system.
Fuse information is shown in the following table.
8-6
Input Ratings
Fuse Ratings
Maker
Order No.
100-120VAC
10AH/250V
Orisel
55T210000
200-240VAC
10A/H250V
Orisel
55T210000
Chapter 8 Maintenance
Cleaning Air Filters
The air filters minimize the indraft of dust. Clean the air filter to ensure that a clogged filter does not cause
the system to overheat and reduce the noise and the system performance.
It is recommended the air filters be cleaned once every three months.
CAUTION: Be sure to lock the brakes on the front wheels before cleaning the air filters to avoid
injury by any unexpected movement of the product.
1. Pull the filter under the front of the console to away from the product.
2. Shake the filter to remove the dust and wash in a mild soapy solution.
3. After dry with a cloth, air dry in the shade.
4. Slide the filter back into the product.
NOTE: Allow the wet filter to dry thoroughly before installing. The wet filter can cause the
malfunction.
Accuracy Check
NOTE: The user must ensure that safety inspections are performed every 2 years according to the
requirements of safety standard EN 60601-1. Only trained persons are allowed to perform these
safety inspections.
The product’s maintenance status may affect the measurements obtained using the product. The product
should be maintained in an optimal state to ensure reliable measurements.
To ensure optimal operation of the product, perform an accuracy check every year. The equations and
table related to measurement accuracy are included in “Chapter 5 Measurements” in this manual.
8-7
Operation Manual
Data Maintenance
CAUTION: You may lose information files on user settings or patients, because of shock on the
product or internal error. Thus, back-up on a regular basis.
User Setting Back up
Always keep a backup copy of all information related to the user settings in case of data loss. Clients
cannot back-up the user settings of the product. Please contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service
Department to attain support for back-up.
Patient information Back-up
The SonoView program can be used for backing up patient’s basic information and scanned images. The
user can choose to save the data, and the data is also saved in the system by default. If the system needs
to be reinstalled due to product failure, etc., the Samsung Medison customer support staff will restore
the patient’s basic information and scanned images that are saved in the system. For more information
on this, see ‘Chapter 6 Image Management’.
Software
The product software may be updated to enhance performance. The user cannot make any changes to
the software. Please contact the Samsung Medison customer support for help in software changes.
CAUTION: Minor software updates may be carried out without the prior notice from the
manufacturer.
Should errors occur in the operating system (Windows™), and should you desire to upgrade the operating
system, please follow the instructions of the operating system manufacturer.
8-8
Chapter
9
Probes
‹‹Probes................................................................ 9-3
Ultrasound transmission Gel................................................9-9
Sheaths.......................................................................................9-10
Probe Precautions..................................................................9-11
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe..............................9-13
‹‹Biopsy..............................................................9-22
Biopsy Kit Components........................................................9-22
Using the Biopsy Kit...............................................................9-23
Cleaning and Disinfecting Biopsy Kit..............................9-25
Assembling the Biopsy Kit..................................................9-27
Chapter 9 Probes
Probes
The probe is a device that sends and receives ultrasound for acquiring image data. It is also called a
Transducer or Scanhead.
The system limits patient contact temperature to 43 degrees Celsius, and acoustic output values to their
respective U.S. FDA limits. A power protection fuse circuit protects against over-current conditions. If
the power monitor protection circuit senses an over-current condition, then the drive current to the
probe is shut off immediately, preventing overheating of the probe surfaces and limiting acoustic output.
Validation of the power protection fuse circuit is performed under normal system operation. For invasive
probes, additional protections are designed to keep patient contact surface temperature under 43
degrees Celsius in the event of a single fault failure.
Probe List
The ultrasound image scanner uses probes to obtain graphic data of the human body and then displays
it on the screen. Always use application-specific probes in order to obtain the best quality images. It is
also important to configure the probe with the best settings for the particular organ being scanned.
■■Probe Application and Preset
Probes, applications and settings available for this product are as follows:
Probe
C1-4EC
C2-6IC
C4-9/10ED
Application
Preset
Abdomen
General, Aorta, Renal
OB
1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
Gynecology
Uterus
Contrast
Perfusion
Abdomen
General, Aorta, Renal
OB
1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
Gynecology
Uterus
Pediatric
General, Neo Head
Abdomen
AppendiX
Vascular
Carotid, Arterial, venous
9-3
Operation Manual
Probe
Preset
Vascular
Arterial, Carotid, Venous
Small Parts
Thyroid, Testicle, Breast, Bowel
Small Parts
Thyroid, Testicle, Breast, Bowel
Vascular
Arterial, Carotid, Venous
Musculoskeletal
Shoulder/Knee, Hand/Foot, Elbow/Wrist
Small Parts
Thyroid, Testicle, Breast, Bowel
Vascular
Carotid, Arterial, Venous
MSK
Shoulder/Knee, Hand/Foot, Elbow/Wrist
Vascular
Carotid, Arterial, Venous
Small Parts
Thyroid, Testicle, Breast, Bowel
Musculoskeletal
Shoulder/Knee, Hand/Foot, Elbow/Wrist
Intraoperative
General
Musculoskeletal
Shoulder/Knee, Hand/Foot, Elbow/Wrist
Abdomen
General, Aorta, Renal
Cardiac
Adult Echo, Aortic Arch, Ped Echo
TCD
General
Abdomen
General, Aorta, Renal
Cardiac
Adult Echo, Aortic Arch, Ped Echo
Cardiac
Aortic Arch, Ped Echo
Pediatric
Abdomen, Neo Head
CW2.0
Cardiac
Adult Echo
CW4.0
Cardiac
Adult Echo, Ped Echo
OB
1st Trimester
Gynecology
Uterus, AdneXa
Urology
Prostate
OB
1st Trimester
Gynecology
Uterus, AdneXa
Urology
Prostate
L3-8
L5-13IS
L7-16IS
LF5-12
LS5-13
P2-4BA
P3-8CA
P4-12
EV4-9/10ED
ER4-9/10ED
9-4
Application
Chapter 9 Probes
Probe
VR5-9
V4-8
V5-9
V6-12
3DC2-6
Application
Preset
OB
1st Trimester
Gynecology
Uterus, AdneXa
Urology
Prostate
Abdomen
General, Aorta, Renal
OB
1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
Gynecology
Uterus
OB
1st Trimester
Gynecology
Uterus, AdneXa
Urology
Prostate
Small Parts
Thyroid, Testicle, Breast
Musculoskeletal
Shoulder/Knee, Hand/Foot, Elbow/Wrist
Vascular
Carotid, Arterial, venous
Abdomen
General, Aorta, Renal
OB
1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
Gynecology
Uterus
NOTE:
Besides, user can have or select own preset between User1-5.
XX
Refer to ‘Chapter3. Starting Diagnosis’ for how to set probe and its preset.
XX
9-5
Operation Manual
■■Function list
Some functions depend on probe and its application. See following table.
Probe
C1-4EC
C2-6IC
C4-9/10ED
L3-8
L5-13IS
L7-16IS
LF5-12
LS5-13
P2-4BA
9-6
Application
Q Scan
Har
PI
TDI
CM
ECG
Biopsy
Abdomen
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
OB
●
●
●
x
FH
x
●
Gynecology
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
Contrast
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
Abdomen
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
OB
●
●
●
x
FH
x
●
Gynecology
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
Vascular
●
x
x
x
x
x
x
Pediatric
●
x
x
x
x
x
x
Abdomen
●
x
x
x
x
x
x
Vascular
●
●
x
x
x
●
●
Small Parts
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Smallparts
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Vascular
●
●
x
x
x
●
●
Musculoskeletal
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Smallparts
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Vascular
●
●
x
x
x
●
●
Musculoskeletal
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Musculoskeletal
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Smallparts
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Vascular
●
●
x
x
x
●
●
Intraoperative
●
●
x
x
x
x
x
Musculoskeletal
●
●
x
x
x
x
x
Abdomen
●
●
●
x
x
x
x
Cardiac
●
●
●
●
●
●
x
TCD
●
●
●
x
x
x
x
Chapter 9 Probes
Probe
Application
Q Scan
Har
PI
TDI
CM
ECG
Biopsy
Abdomen
●
●
●
x
x
x
x
Cardiac
●
●
●
●
●
●
x
Pediatric
●
●
●
x
x
x
x
Cardiac
●
●
●
●
●
●
x
CW2.0
Cardiac
x
x
x
x
x
●
x
CW4.0
Cardiac
x
x
x
x
x
●
x
OB
●
x
x
x
x
x
●
Gynecology
●
x
x
x
x
x
●
Urology
●
x
x
x
x
x
●
OB
●
x
x
x
x
x
●
Gynecology
●
x
x
x
x
x
●
Urology
●
x
x
x
x
x
●
Gynecology
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
OB
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Urology
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Abdomen
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
OB
●
●
●
x
FH
x
●
Gynecology
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
Gynecology
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
OB
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Urology
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Small Parts
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Musculoskeletal
●
●
x
x
x
x
●
Vascular
●
●
x
x
x
●
●
Abdomen
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
OB
●
●
●
x
FH
x
●
Gynecology
●
●
●
x
x
x
●
P3-8CA
P4-12
EV4-9/10ED
ER4-9/10ED
VR5-9
V4-8
V5-9
V6-12
3DC2-6
NOTE:
Q Scan: Quick Scan
TDI: Tissue Doppler Imaging
Har: Harmonic imaging
CM: Color M mode
PI: PuIse Inversion
ECG: Electro Cardio Graph
9-7
Operation Manual
Thermal IndeX (TI) Tables
TI values displayed on the screen title bar can change depending on probes and applications. ACCUVIX
XG decides automatically which TI value will be displayed out of TIs, TIb, and TIc. The TI values are as
follows,
TIs
C4-9/10ED
TIs
TIs
L3-8
TIs
TIs
L5-13IS
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
LF5-12
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
LS5-13
TIs
P2-4BA
TIs
TIs
P3-8CA
TIs
TIs
P4-12
TIs
CW2.0
TIs
CW4.0
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIs
ER4-9/10ED
TIb
TIs
TIs
VR5-9
TIb
TIs
TIs
TIb
TIs
TIb
TIs
V5-9
V6-12
3DC2-6
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIb
TIs
TIs
TIs
TIb
TIs
Tls
TIs
EV4-9/10ED
V4-8
Intraoperative
TIb
Contrast
TIs
TCD
C2-6IC
Small Parts
TIs
Pediatric
Gynecology
TIb
Urology
Obstetrics
TIs
Vascular
Abdomen
C1-4EC
Cardiac
Probe
L7-16IS
9-8
Musculoskeletal
Application
TIs
TIs
Chapter 9 Probes
Ultrasound transmission Gel
Using an inappropriate ultrasound gel may damage the probe. For proper transmission of the acoustic
beam, only use ultrasound transmission gel only approved by Samsung Medison.
WARNING:
Do not use mineral oil, oil-based solutions, or other non-approved material as they may cause
XX
damage to the probe.
Do not use gels that contain any of the following agents:
XX
−−Acetone
−−Methanol
−−Denatured Ethyl Alcohol
−−Mineral Oil
−−Iodine
−−Lanolin
−−Any lotions or gels containing perfume
9-9
Operation Manual
Sheaths
Sheaths are recommended for clinical applications of an invasive nature, including intraoperative,
transrectal, transvaginal, and biopsy procedures.
Samsung Medison does not supply sheaths so that you should purchase appropriate ones on your own.
WARNING:
Always keep sheaths in a sterile state.
XX
Sheaths are disposable. Do not reuse them.
XX
If sheaths are torn or soiled after use, clean and disinfect the probe.
XX
In neurosurgical applications, a disinfected probe must be used with sterile gel and a sterile
XX
pyrogen-free sheath.
If the sterile sheath becomes compromised during neurosurgical applica-tions involving a
XX
patient with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, the probe cannot be successfully sterilized by any
disinfection method.
Some sheaths contain natural rubber lateX and talc, which can cause allergic reactions in some
XX
individuals. Please refer to the FDA Medical Alert released on March 29, 1991.
Installing the Sheath
1. Put on sterile gloves. Unpack the sheath and fill it with acoustic coupling gel.
2. Insert the probe into the sheath and pull the lateX tip to cover the probe completely. If possible,
cover the probe cable as well.
3. Ensure that there is no air bubble within the ultrasound gel. If necessary, secure the sheath to the
probe and the probe cable.
4. Dispose of the sheath after use.
9-10
Chapter 9 Probes
Probe Precautions
CAUTION:
Do not apply mechanical shock to the probe.
XX
Do not place the probe cable on the floor where the cable can be run over by equipment
XX
wheels, etc. Do not apply eXcessive force to bend or pull the cable.
Do not immerse the probe into any inappropriate substances such as alcohol, bleach,
XX
ammonium chloride, and hydrogen peroXide.
Do not eXpose the probe to temperatures of +50°C or higher.
XX
The probe can easily be damaged by improper use or by contacting certain chemical substances. Always
follow the instructions in the user manual to inspect the probe cable, case and lens before and after each
use.
Check for cracks, broken parts, leaks and sharp edges. If there is any damage, immediately stop using the
probe and contact the Samsung Medison Customer Support Department. Using damaged probes may
result in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and/or users.
Use and Infection Control of the Probe
WARNING: No neurosurgical treatments or eXaminations should be carried out on a patient with
Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (critical brain disease caused by virus). If the probe has been used on
such a patient, it cannot be sterilized by any method whatsoever.
CAUTION: Sufficient washing and disinfecting must be carried out for preventing infection. This
is the responsibility of the user who manages and maintains the disinfection procedures for the
equipment. Always use legally approved detergents.
The ultrasonographic image scanner uses ultrasound, and it makes direct contact with the patient when
in use. Depending on the types of eXaminations, such contact can be made to a wide variety of locations
including the ordinary skin or the location of blood transfusion during a surgery.
The most effective method to prevent infection among patients is to use each probe only once. However,
probes may need to be reused, as they are compleX in design and eXpensive. Consequently, the safety
instructions must be followed carefully in order to minimize the risk of infection among patients.
9-11
Operation Manual
Electric Shocks
The probe uses electrical energy. If it touches conductive materials, there are risks of electric shocks to
the patient or the user.
WARNING:
Regularly receive short-circuit eXamination from the Samsung Medison Customer Support
XX
Department.
Do not immerse the probe into liquid.
XX
Do not drop the probe or apply mechanical shocks.
XX
Inspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for any functional
XX
problem before and after each use.
Do not apply eXcessive force to twist, pull or bend the probe cable. It may result in a short
XX
circuit.
The power protection fuse protects the probe and the product from eXcess current. If the
XX
power monitoring protection circuit detects eXcess current, it immediately shuts off the
current to the probe in order to prevent the probe surface from overheating and to restrict the
ultrasound power output.
The temperature of the product for making contact with patients is limited under 43°C. The
XX
ultrasound power output (AP&I) is in compliance with US FDA standards.
9-12
Chapter 9 Probes
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe
Using an inappropriate detergent or disinfectant may damage the probe.
WARNING:
Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting probes.
XX
Inspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for any functional
XX
problem after cleaning and disinfecting the probe.
Information of Detergent, Disinfectant, and Ultrasound Gel
Use an appropriate one with following tables. All probes are under tested in IPX 7 Criteria.
T-Spray
Sani-Cloth HB
Sani-Cloth Plus
Sani-Cloth Active
Septiwipes
Cleanisept Wipes
Ster-Bac Blu
Transeptic Spray
Incidin Foam
Super Sani-Cloth
Sani-Cloth Germicidal
Asepti-Wipes
Asepti-Wipes II
CaviWipes
MetriWipes
CideX 2%
Type
S
S
W
W
W
W
W
L
S
S
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
C1-4EC
●
●
●
C2-6IC
●
●
●
C4-9,10ED
●
●
L3-8
●
●
L5-13IS
●
●
●
L7-16IS
●
●
●
NA
Active Ingredient
IPA
Quaternary
Ammonium
(N-Alkyl)
Names
T-Spray II
Disinfectants
●
LF5-12
◆
◎
◎
LS5-13
●
●
●
●
▣
◎
●
●
◎
▣
●
9-13
9-14
Sani-Cloth HB
Sani-Cloth Plus
Sani-Cloth Active
Septiwipes
Cleanisept Wipes
Ster-Bac Blu
Transeptic Spray
Incidin Foam
Super Sani-Cloth
Sani-Cloth Germicidal
Asepti-Wipes
Asepti-Wipes II
CaviWipes
MetriWipes
CideX 2%
Type
S
S
W
W
W
W
W
L
S
S
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
P2-4BA
●
●
●
●
●
P3-8CA
●
●
●
●
●
P4-12
●
●
●
●
●
CW2.0
●
●
●
3DC2-6
VR5-9
◆
◆
◎
V4-8
◆
◆
◎
V5-9
◆
◆
◎
V6-12
◆
◆
◎
▣
▲
▲
▣
▲
▲
▲
▣
▲
▲
▲
▣
▲
■
NA
IPA
Quaternary
Ammonium
(N-Alkyl)
T-Spray
Active Ingredient
Names
T-Spray II
Operation Manual
Disinfectants
CW4.0
●
EV4-9/10ED
●
●
●
ER4-9/10ED
●
●
●
▲
▣
▣
▲
▲
▲
▣
▣
Chapter 9 Probes
Wavicide-01 3)
Sekusept EXtra
Salvanios pH 7
Salvanios pH10
Steranios 2%
Surfaces Hautes
Sekusept Plus
Milton
Bleach 5.25%
L
S
L
L
L
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
★
L
L
L
L
L
C1-4EC
★
★
●
C2-6IC
★
●
●
C4-9/10ED
●
●
L3-8
●
●
L5-13IS
●
●
●
L7-16IS
●
●
●
LF5-12
▲
◇
▣
▣
LS5-13
●
●
●
●
P2-4BA
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
P3-8CA
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
P4-12
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CW2.0
★
●
CW4.0
●
EV4-9/10ED
●
●
●
●
●
ER4-9/10ED
●
●
●
●
●
VR5-9
▲
◇
V4-8
▲
V5-9
▲
V6-12
▲
3DC2-6
●
Active Ingredient
●
Nonionic
surfactant
Type
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
◇
Sodium
Hypochlorite
L
Names
Glutaraldehyde
Omnicide - FG2
L
Omnicide 14NS
L
Omnicide (28)
L
Metricide 2)
L
CideX Plus 2)
L
CideX OPA 2,3)
Nuclean
Disinfectants
▣
▣
▣
▣
▣
▣
▣
▣
●
◎
●
9-15
9-16
SporoX
SporoX II
Gigasept
Type
L
L
L
L
Active Ingredient
C1-4EC
X
C2-6IC
X
L3-8
CW2.0
3DC2-6
●
C4-9/10ED
X
L5-13IS
●
●
L7-16IS
●
●
X
V5-9
◎
V6-12
◎
Hibitane
PeraSafe
L
L
P
X
LS5-13
P3-8CA
P4-12
X
V4-8
◎
●
CW4.0
◎
▲
◎
▲
◎
▲
Bersteinsaure
ChlorheXidine gluconate
solution
Peracetic Acid
●
●
●
●
●
Alcohol
Cidezyme
Klenzyme
Isopropyl alcohol(70%)
Isopropyl alcohol(80%)
Alkazyme
Disinfectants
Proteolytic Enzymes
NA
Enzol
Gigasept FF
L
DodecylphenolethoXylate,
Sodium Xylene Sulfonate
Gigasept AF 3)
Succindialdehyde,
formaldehyde
Hydrogen PeroXide
Virkon
Names
NA
Operation Manual
Cleaner
L
L
L
L
●
●
●
●
X
★
●
●
VR5-9
◐
●
X
LF5-12
●
P2-4BA
●
X
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
X
EV4-9/10ED
●
●
●
●
ER4-9/10ED
●
●
●
Chapter 9 Probes
PCMX
(Chloroxylenol)
Ammonium
Chlorides
G
●
●
Sonogel
Propylene Glycol
C1-4EC
G
Wavelength
Active Ingredient
G
Scan
G
Kendall
L
G
G
G
G
●
●
●
NA
Natural Image
L
Clear Image
McKesson
L
GE Ultrasound
Contact Gel
Metrizyme
Type
Names
Aquasonics 100 3)
Ethanol 75%
Gel
Alcohol
Cleaner
●
●
C4-9/10ED
●
●
L3-8
●
C2-6IC
●
●
L5-13IS
●
L7-16IS
●
LF5-12
●
LS5-13
●
P2-4BA
●
●
P3-8CA
●
●
P4-12
●
●
CW2.0
●
●
CW4.0
●
●
EV4-9/10ED
●
●
●
ER4-9/10ED
●
●
●
VR5-9
●
V4-8
●
V5-9
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
V6-12
●
●
●
●
3DC2-6
●
9-17
Operation Manual
Tips!
(1)
Compatible but no EPA Registration
(2)
FDA 510(k) qualified
(3)
Has CE mark
(4)Discontinued
(5)
Under Development
SSpray
WWipe
LLiquid
PPowder
GGel
X
Not compatible(DO NOT USE)
—Compatible
êStaining may o cur on housing parts; however, the acoust c performance and image
quality are not affected.
¡
Must not be used longer than 5 minutes.
◐
Must not be used longer than 10 minutes.
Must not be used longer than 15 minutes.
®
Must not be used longer than 20 minutes.
¯
Must not be used longer than 25 minutes.
◎
Must not be used longer than 30 minutes.
©
Must not be used longer than 50minutes.
Blank
Untested (DO NOT USE)
p
9-18
Chapter 9 Probes
Following is information about manufacturer (or Distributor) of Detergent, Disinfectant, and Ultrasound
Gel.
Product
Manufacturer or Distributor
Telephone number
Aquasonics
Parker Co.
+1-800-631-8888(USA)
CideX
CIVCO Co.
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
Enzol
CIVCO Co.
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
GIgasept AF
S&M(Schulke&mayr) Co.
+44-114-254-3500(UK)
Gigasept FF
S&M(Schulke&mayr) Co.
+44-114-254-3500(UK)
Isoproppyl alcohol (70%)
Local drugstore
None
Klenzyme
Steris Co.
+1-800-548-4873(USA)
Metricide
CIVCO Co.
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
Metrizyme
MetreX Research Corp.
+1-800-843-3343 (USA)
Milton
Product & Gamble Australia Pty. Ltd.
+61-1800-028-280(Australia)
Nuclean
Nation Diagonostics Co.
+1-800-526-3867(USA)
+44(0)-148-264-6020(UK)
Omnicide
Cottrell Ltd.
+1-800-843-3343 (USA)
Sani-cloth
PDI Nice/Pak Products Co.
+1-914-365-1602(USA)
Sekusept EXtra
Henkel Hygiene GmbH.
+49-0211-797-0(Germany)
SporoX II
Sultan Chemist Inc.
+1-800-637-8582(USA)
T-Spray
CIVCO Co.
+1-800-445-6741(USA)
+1-319-656-4447(Worldwide)
Virkon
Antec International LTD.
+1-403-286-1771(USA)
Wavicide
Wave Energy System Inc.
+1-800-252-1125(USA)
9-19
Operation Manual
Cleaning
Cleaning is an important procedure that is carried out before disinfecting the probe. The probe must
be cleaned after each use.
CAUTION:
Do not use a surgical brush when cleaning probes. The use of even soft brushes can damage
XX
the probe.
During cleaning and disinfection, keep the parts of the probe that must remain dry higher than
XX
the other parts during wetting until all parts are dry. This will help prevent liquid from entering
non-liquid-tight areas of the probe.
1. Disconnect the probe from the system.
2. Remove any biopsy adapters or biopsy needle guides. (Biopsy adapters are re-usable and can be
disinfected).
3. Discard sheaths. (Sheaths are single-use items).
4. Use a soft cloth lightly dampened with mild soap or compatible cleaning solution to remove any
particulate matter and body fluid that remain on the probe or cable.
5. To remove remaining particulates, rinse with water up to the immersion point.
6. Wipe with a dry cloth.
7. If necessary, wipe first with a water-dampened clothe to remove soap residue and wipe with a dry
cloth again.
9-20
Chapter 9 Probes
Disinfection
A 10-6 reduction in pathogens should be reached following the disinfection procedures in this Manual
and using the following Samsung Medison recommended solutions.
WARNING:
If a pre-miXed solution is used, be sure to observe the solution eXpiration date.
XX
The type of tissue it will contact during use dictates the level of disinfection required for
XX
a device. Ensure that the solution strength and duration of contact are appropriate for
disinfection.
CAUTION:
Using a non-recommended disinfectant or not following the recommended disinfection
XX
method can damage and/or discolor the probe and will void the probe warranty.
Do not immerse probes for longer than one hour, unless they are sterilizable.
XX
Only sterilize probes using liquid solutions. Avoid using autoclave, gas (EtO), or other nonXX
Samsung Medison-approved methods.
1. Follow the instructions on the disinfectant label for storage, use and disposition of the disinfectant.
2. MiX the disinfectant compatible with your probe according to lavel instructions for solution
strength.
3. Immerse the probe into the disinfectant as shown in the illustration below.
4. Using the instructions on the disinfectant, rinse the probe after the immersion process is complete.
5. Air dry the probe or towel it dry with a clean cloth.
[Figure 9.1 Disinfection]
9-21
Operation Manual
Biopsy
A biopsy is an eXamination method that surgically eXtracts tissue from the patient for eXamination. The
probe and the biopsy kit are used together when conducting a biopsy with the ultrasonographic image
scanner.
The ultrasound system shows the needle, which penetrates through the skin surface and veins, along
with the eXamination location, minimizing the risk to the patient.
Biopsy Kit Components
The biopsy kit consists of the adapter, needle guide and needle. The components vary depending on the
probe type. The components and accessories can be purchased from Samsung Medison.
Meedle
Meedle
Guide
Biopsy
Adapter
[Figure 9.2 Biopsy Kit Components]
XX
Adapter: Secures the needle guide to the probe tightly.
XX
Needle Guide: Guides the angle (direction) of the needle so that it can reach the eXamination
location accurately. It also secures the needle so that the needle is not loose.
XX
Needle: This is the needle that is inserted into the patient’s body.
XX
Sheath: Prevents the probe and adapter from getting soiled by any unwanted substances during
the eXamination (blood and other body fluids).
XX
Ultrasound Gel: The space between the probe and the sheath is filled with the ultrasound gel to
obtain images of the best quality.
9-22
Chapter 9 Probes
Using the Biopsy Kit
WARNING:
Verify the condition of the biopsy needle before use. Do not use a bent biopsy needle.
XX
The biopsy needle may bend during tissue penetration. The precise location of the needle
XX
must be checked by monitoring the echo generated from the needle.
Never use the biopsy kit to biopsy prostate tissue.
XX
Before Using Biopsy Kit
Ultrasonographic scanning using the biopsy kit must be conducted by medical doctors or eXperienced
medical staff with appropriate qualifications. Always, without fail, verify all safety prevention
procedures and disinfection.
Use only Samsung Medison-approved biopsy kits. Other bands may not properly fit Samsung Medison
probes. Improper installation may result in patient discomfort.
Inspect all components. Ensure that the biopsy kit you are using is the correct one for the probe, the
system, and system software.
WARNING:
Do not attempt to use the biopsy until you read the instructions for installing the sheath and
XX
verifying alignment of the needle guide.
Always ensure that the probe and the needle guide are secured on both the left and the right.
XX
Do not use in IVF, CVS, or PUBS procedures.
XX
Biopsy Procedure
The system generates a needle guideline though the displayed real-time ultrasound images to indicate
the anticipated path of the needle. You can use this guideline to ensure that the needle or instrument
is following the correct path.
1. Ready the patient according to the procedure appropriate for the eXamination objectives.
2. Install the sheath and the biopsy kit.
3. Set the system controls for the biopsy procedure.If necessary, apply acoustic gel to the patient.
4. Begin scanning the patient. Adjust the patient so that the location for eXamination fits into the
needle guideline on the screen.
9-23
Operation Manual
5. Insert the needle into the needle guide. Perform the puncture by sliding the needle through the
groove in the guide until the needle intercepts the target.
6. To keep the needle securely in the needle guide, press down on the top of the biopsy adapter with
your indeX finger.
7. When the eXamination location is reached, take the needle out of the needle guide.
8. Detach the needle guide, adapter and sheath from the probe.
9. Dispose of the components that are not designed for reuse.
Needle Guide Alignment
Alignment of the needle guide displayed on the system is for the purpose of verifying whether the
needle and the needle guide are properly installed. This must be done prior to the biopsy eXamination.
Do not use the needle guide if the needle is not following the intended path. Contact Samsung
Medison Customer Service Department for service.
Reverberation or other tissue artifacts may produce false needle images, which can cause confusion.
Ensure the needle path is along the guideline, and that you are not using a false needle image to
locate the needle.
WARNING:
The needle used for this alignment verification must not be used for the actual procedure.
XX
Always use a new, sterile needle for each biopsy procedure.
To assist in accurate projection of the needle, use a straight, new needle for each alignment
XX
procedure.
1. Attach the biopsy kit.
2. Set the system depth for the procedure to be performed and select the Biopsy menu.
3. Immerse the probe into the water bath, and insert the needle into the needle guide.
4. Confirm that the needle image is on the needle guidelines. If so, the needle guide is properly
aligned.
5. If the needle image is out of the needle guideline, check the needle guide or the probe adapter.
9-24
Chapter 9 Probes
Cleaning and Disinfecting Biopsy Kit
Wash and disinfect the biopsy kit to reduce pathogens to the level of 10-6. Some components of the
biopsy kit may be disposable. Please read the biopsy kit user manual carefully before use.
Refer to the table of ‘Cleaning and Disinfecting the Probe’ section in this chapter for detail.
WARNING: Always use protective eyewear and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting biopsy kit.
Cleaning and disinfection of stainless steel biopsy kit
■■Cleaning
1. After use, remove the biopsy kit from the probe.
2. Disassemble the biopsy kit into its component parts, if applicable.
3. Using a small brush and water, scrub each part to remove trapped material from the biopsy kit.
4. Rinse with water to remove remaining particulates.
■■Disinfection
1. Disinfect the adapter by autoclaving (Steam) or using gas (Ethylene OXide).
2. After disinfection, follow the proper post-disinfection procedure for the disinfection method
used. (Please refer to the disinfection user manual, etc.)
3. Inspect the biopsy kit for damage such as cracks, rust or breakage. If damage is evident,
discontinue use of the biopsy kit and contact Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
9-25
Operation Manual
Cleaning and Disinfection of plastic biopsy kit
■■Cleaning
1. After use, remove the biopsy kit from the probe.
2. Disassemble the biopsy kit into its component parts, if applicable. Discard the single-use parts.
These parts cannot be disinfected.
3. Using a small brush and water, scrub each part to remove trapped material from the reusable
components.
4. Rinse with water to remove remaining particulates.
■■Disinfection
CAUTION: Plastic biopsy kits can only be disinfected using a chemically compatible colddisinfectant. Disinfection by autoclaving or by using gas or radiation will cause damage to these
parts.
Please refer to the user manual of the disinfectant for storage, use, and disposition of the disinfectant.
1. Check the disinfection duration (generally 10 hours) and temperature of the disinfectant.
2. After disinfection, follow the proper post-disinfection procedure for the disinfection method
used.
3. Inspect the components for damage such as cracks, rust or breakage. If damage is evident,
discontinue use of the biopsy kit and contact Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
9-26
Chapter 9 Probes
Assembling the Biopsy Kit
C1-4EC Biopsy Guide
■■Specification
Model name
BP-KIT-016
Component
Biopsy KIT(Adapter&Guide)
1EA
Case1EA
User Manual
1EA
Material
Available Gauges
Polyphenolsulfone
14G, 15G, 16G, 17G, 18G, 20G, 21G, 22G, 23G
■■Installation
1. Mount the Adapter onto the probe.
2. Insert gel into the cover for the Kit and cover the adaptor completely.
9-27
Operation Manual
3. Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor along the groove.
9-28
Chapter 9 Probes
C2-6IC Biopsy Guide
■■Specification
Model name
BP-KIT-009
Component
Biopsy Adapter
1EA
Needle Guide
1EA
Clip2EA
Available Gauges
14G, 15G, 16G, 17G, 18G, 19G, 20G, 21G, 22G, 23G
■■Installation
1. Mount the biopsy adaptor onto the probe as shown below.
2. Insert gel into probe cover. And cover it.
3. Install the needle guide onto the adapter.
9-29
Operation Manual
4. Installing the Needle Guide Clip.
5. Insert the needle into the needle guide.
9-30
Chapter 9 Probes
L3-8 Biopsy Guide
■■Specification
Model name
BP-KIT-036
Component
Adapter1EA
Needle Guide
24EA
Material
Available Gauges
Acetal Copolymer
16G, 18G, 22G
■■Installation
1. Mount the adapter onto the probe.
2. Fill the sheath with the ultrasound gel and place the sheath all the way down to the Adapter.
9-31
Operation Manual
3. Mount the needle guide for the desired gauge onto the adaptor.
4. Insert the needle into the needle guide for use.
9-32
Chapter 9 Probes
L5-13IS, L7-16IS Biopsy Guide
■■Specification
Model name
BP-KIT-012
Component
Biopsy Adapter
Needle Guide
Clip
Available Gauges
1 EA
24 EA
2 EA
14G, 15G, 16G, 17G, 18G, 19G, 20G, 21G, 22G, 23G
■■Installation
1. Mount the biopsy adaptor onto the probe as shown below.
2. Selecting Bracket Angle (& Locking).
9-33
Operation Manual
3. Insert gel into probe cover. And cover it.
4. Installing the Needle Guide and Clip.
5. Insert the needle into the needle guide.
9-34
Chapter 9 Probes
LF5-12 Biopsy Guide
■■Specification
Model name
BP-KIT-032
Component
Biopsy Adapter
Material
Available Gauges
1 EA
Stainless
14G, 18G, 21G
■■Installation
1. Place the biopsy adapter onto the probe.
2. Fix the biopsy guide by locking the clip with the level on the opposite side of probe housing.
3. Install the needle into the needle guide for use.
9-35
Operation Manual
EV4-9/10ED, ER4-9/10ED Biopsy Guide
■■Specifications
Model name
BP-KIT-024
Component
Biopsy Adapter
Sheath
Material
Available Gauges
1 EA
2 EA
Stainless
16G
■■Installation
1. Fill the sheath with the ultrasound gel and place the sheath all the way down to the Adapter.
And then tie with rubber band.
2. Mount the adapter onto the probe
3. Place the sheath again and tie with the rubber band again. Tie the lower part than 1.
4. Insert the needle into the needle guide for use.
9-36
Chapter 9 Probes
V4-8 Biopsy Guide
■■Specification
Model name
BP-KIT-028
Component
Biopsy Adapter
Material
Available Gauges
1 EA
Stainless
14G, 18G, 21G
■■Installation
1. Place the biopsy adapter onto the probe.
2. Push it forward until the bracket catches in the support (two notches) on the probe housing.
9-37
Operation Manual
3. Fix the biopsy guide by locking the clip with the level on the opposite side of probe housing.
4. Install the needle into the needle guide for use.
9-38
Chapter 9 Probes
V5-9 Biopsy Guide
■■Specifications
Model name
BP-KIT-029
Component
Biopsy Adapter
Material
Available Gauges
1 EA
Stainless
18G
■■Installation
1. Place the biopsy adapter onto the probe.
2. Install the needle into the needle guide for use.
9-39
Operation Manual
VR5-9 Biopsy Guide
■■Specifications
Model name
BP-KIT-041
Component
Adapter
Material
Available Gauges
1 EA
ABS
16 ~ 18G
■■Installation
1. Fill the sheath with the ultrasound gel and place the sheath all the way down to the Probe.
2. Mount the adapter onto the probe.
3. Cover the adaptor and probe completely with sheath.
4. Insert the needle into the needle guide for use.
9-40
Chapter 9 Probes
V6-12 Biopsy Guide
■■Specifications
Model name
BP-KIT-030
Component
Biopsy Adapter
Material
Available Gauges
1 EA
Stainless
14G, 18G, 21G
■■Installation
1. Place the biopsy adapter onto the probe.
2. Install the needle into the needle guide for use.
9-41
Operation Manual
3DC2-6 Biopsy Guide
■■Specifications
Model name
BP-KIT-026
Component
Biopsy Adapter
Needle Guide
Material
Acetal Copolymer
Available Gauges
16G, 18G, 22G
■■Installation
1. Place the biopsy adapter onto the probe.
2. Fill the sheath with ultrasound gel and insert the probe.
9-42
1 EA
24 EA
Chapter 9 Probes
3. Mount the needle guide on the adapter.
4. Install the needle into the needle guide for use.
9-43
Download PDF